4 G
L T E
S M A R T P H O N E
User Manual
Please read this manual before operating your
device and keep it for future reference.
Warning! This product contains chemicals known to the State of California to cause cancer and reproductive toxicity.
Intellectual Property
All Intellectual Property, as defined below, owned by or which is otherwise the property of Samsung or its respective suppliers
relating to the SAMSUNG Phone, including but not limited to, accessories, parts, or software relating there to (the “Phone
System”), is proprietary to Samsung and protected under federal laws, state laws, and international treaty provisions. Intellectual
Property includes, but is not limited to, inventions (patentable or unpatentable), patents, trade secrets, copyrights, software,
computer programs, and related documentation and other works of authorship. You may not infringe or otherwise violate the
rights secured by the Intellectual Property. Moreover, you agree that you will not (and will not attempt to) modify, prepare
derivative works of, reverse engineer, decompile, disassemble, or otherwise attempt to create source code from the software. No
title to or ownership in the Intellectual Property is transferred to you. All applicable rights of the Intellectual Property shall remain
with SAMSUNG and its suppliers.
Open Source Software
Some software components of this product incorporate source code covered under GNU General Public License (GPL), GNU Lesser
General Public License (LGPL), OpenSSL License, BSD License and other open source licenses. To obtain the source code covered
under the open source licenses, please visit:
http://opensource.samsung.com.
M819N_UM_English_MJ4_PS_102313_F4
Disclaimer of Warranties; Exclusion of Liability
EXCEPT AS SET FORTH IN THE EXPRESS WARRANTY CONTAINED ON THE WARRANTY PAGE ENCLOSED WITH THE PRODUCT, THE
PURCHASER TAKES THE PRODUCT "AS IS", AND SAMSUNG MAKES NO EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTY OF ANY KIND
WHATSOEVER WITH RESPECT TO THE PRODUCT, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE MERCHANTABILITY OF THE PRODUCT OR
ITS FITNESS FOR ANY PARTICULAR PURPOSE OR USE; THE DESIGN, CONDITION OR QUALITY OF THE PRODUCT; THE
PERFORMANCE OF THE PRODUCT; THE WORKMANSHIP OF THE PRODUCT OR THE COMPONENTS CONTAINED THEREIN; OR
COMPLIANCE OF THE PRODUCT WITH THE REQUIREMENTS OF ANY LAW, RULE, SPECIFICATION OR CONTRACT PERTAINING
THERETO. NOTHING CONTAINED IN THE INSTRUCTION MANUAL SHALL BE CONSTRUED TO CREATE AN EXPRESS OR IMPLIED
WARRANTY OF ANY KIND WHATSOEVER WITH RESPECT TO THE PRODUCT. IN ADDITION, SAMSUNG SHALL NOT BE LIABLE FOR
ANY DAMAGES OF ANY KIND RESULTING FROM THE PURCHASE OR USE OF THE PRODUCT OR ARISING FROM THE BREACH OF
THE EXPRESS WARRANTY, INCLUDING INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES, OR LOSS OF ANTICIPATED PROFITS
OR BENEFITS.
Modification of Software
SAMSUNG IS NOT LIABLE FOR PERFORMANCE ISSUES OR INCOMPATIBILITIES CAUSED BY YOUR EDITING OF REGISTRY SETTINGS,
OR YOUR MODIFICATION OF OPERATING SYSTEM SOFTWARE.
USING CUSTOM OPERATING SYSTEM SOFTWARE MAY CAUSE YOUR DEVICE AND APPLICATIONS TO WORK IMPROPERLY. YOUR
CARRIER MAY NOT PERMIT USERS TO DOWNLOAD CERTAIN SOFTWARE, SUCH AS CUSTOM OS.
SAFE™ (Samsung Approved For Enterprise)
SAFE™: "SAFE™" (Samsung for Enterprise) is a mark for a Samsung device which has been tested against Samsung's own
internal criteria for interoperability with certain third party security-related solutions for MDM and VPN. The testing includes field
testing with local network connection and menu tree testing which tests functionality of the solutions in conjunction with the
Samsung device. During the testing, the device is tested with the security solutions to see if the solutions work with the device as
described by the third party security solution providers. The testing, for example, includes field testing with local network
connection and menu tree testing which tests functionality of the solutions in conjunction with the Samsung device. For more
information about Samsung's SAFE™ program, please refer to www.samsung.com/us/safe.
Disclaimer of Warranties: EXCEPT AS OTHERWISE PROVIDED IN THEIR STANDARD END USER LICENSE AND WARRANTY, TO THE
FULL EXTENT PERMITTED BY LAW SAMSUNG ELECTRONICS CO., LTD., SAMSUNG TELECOMMUNICATIONS AMERICA, LLC, AND
THEIR AFFILIATES (COLLECTIVELY REFERRED TO HEREIN AS THE "SAMSUNG ENTITIES") EXPRESSLY DISCLAIM ANY AND ALL
WARRANTIES, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING ANY WARRANTY OF MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE,
INTEROPERABILITY OR NON-INFRINGEMENT, WITH RESPECT TO INFORMATION TECHNOLOGY SECURITY PROTECTION, SAFE™
DEVICES AND APPLICATIONS TESTED WITH SAFE™ DEVICES. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE SAMSUNG ENTITIES BE LIABLE FOR ANY
DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, PUNITIVE, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES OF ANY KIND WHATSOEVER WITH RESPECT TO
INFORMATION TECHNOLOGY SECURITY PROTECTION, SAFE™ DEVICES OR APPLICATIONS TESTED WITH SAFE™ DEVICES. In
addition, information technology security protection will be affected by features or functionality associated with, among other
things the e-mail platform, master data management, and virtual private network solutions selected by the software provider,
solution provider or user. Choice of an e-mail, master data management, and virtual private network solution is at the sole
discretion of the software provider, solution provider or user and any associated effect on information technology security
protection is solely the responsibility of the software provider, solution provider or user. For complete statement of limited
warranty, please refer to www.samsung.com/us/safe, available on the web and where Samsung smartphone and Galaxy Tab™
devices are sold. [101212]
Samsung Telecommunications America (STA), LLC
Headquarters:
1301 E. Lookout Drive
Richardson, TX 75082
Customer Care Center:
1000 Klein Rd.
Plano, TX 75074
Toll Free Tel: 1.888.987.HELP (4357)
Internet Address:
http://www.samsung.com
©
2013 Samsung Telecommunications America, LLC. Samsung is a registered trademark of Samsung Electronics Co., Ltd.
Do you have questions about your Samsung Mobile Device?
For 24 hour information and assistance, we offer a new FAQ/ARS System (Automated Response System) at:
www.samsung.com/us/support
The actual available capacity of the internal memory is less than the specified capacity because the operating system and default
applications occupy part of the memory. The available capacity may change when you upgrade the device.
Nuance®, VSuite™, T9® Text Input, and the Nuance logo are trademarks or registered trademarks of Nuance Communications,
Inc., or its affiliates in the United States and/or other countries.
ACCESS® and NetFront™ are trademarks or registered trademarks of ACCESS Co., Ltd. in Japan and other countries.
The Bluetooth® word mark, figure mark (stylized “B Design”), and combination mark (Bluetooth word mark and “B Design”) are
registered trademarks and are wholly owned by the Bluetooth SIG.
microSD™ and the microSD logo are Trademarks of the SD Card Association.
Openwave® is a registered Trademark of Openwave, Inc.
Google, the Google logo, Android, the Android logo, Google Play, Gmail, Google Mail, Google Maps, Google Music, Google
Hangouts, Picasa, YouTube and other marks are trademarks of Google Inc.
Wi-Fi is a registered trademark of the Wireless Fidelity Alliance, Inc.
LTE is a trademark of ETSI
Swype and the Swype logos are trademarks of Swype, Inc. © 2010 Swype, Inc. All rights reserved.
Table of Contents
Section 1: Getting Started .......................... 6
Understanding this User Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
Setting Up Your Phone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
Charging a Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
Extending Your Battery Life . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
Switching the Phone On or Off . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
Locking and Unlocking the Touch Screen . . . . 13
Configuring your Phone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
Creating a Samsung Account . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
Creating a New Google Account . . . . . . . . . . . 15
Setting Up Your Voicemail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
Section 2: Understanding Your Phone ..... 17
Features of Your Phone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Front View of Your Phone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Side Views of Your Phone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Rear View of Your Phone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Display Layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Using Motions and Gestures . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Home Screen Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
17
18
20
21
21
26
28
Using the Multi Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Customizing Your Home Screen . . . . . . . . . . .
Notification Bar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Memory Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Entering Text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Selecting the Text Input Method . . . . . . . . . . .
Using the Google Voice Typing Feature . . . . . .
Using the Samsung Keyboard . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Using Swype . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
30
34
39
41
42
43
43
44
47
Section 3: Call Functions ..........................49
Displaying Your Phone Number . . . . . . . . . . .
Making a Call . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Making Emergency Calls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Dialing Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Making a Call Using Speed Dial . . . . . . . . . . .
Making a Call from the Address Book . . . . . . .
Answering a Call . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Call Log . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Call Duration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
49
49
51
52
53
55
55
55
58
1
Options During a Call . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
In-Call Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
Call Waiting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
Call Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
Section 4: Contacts and Your
Address Book .............................................66
Accounts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
Contacts List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
Adding a New Contact . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
Editing an Existing Contact . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
Using Contacts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
Linking Contacts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
Synchronizing Accounts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
Address Book Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
Groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
Address Book Favorites . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
Managing Address Book Contacts . . . . . . . . . . 78
Section 5: Messaging ................................81
Types of Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
Creating and Sending Messages . . . . . . . . . . . 82
Message Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
Viewing New Received Messages . . . . . . . . . . 86
2
Deleting Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .87
Message Search . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .88
Messaging Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .88
Assigning Messages as Spam . . . . . . . . . . . . .91
Accessing Your Spam Folder . . . . . . . . . . . . . .93
Text Templates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .93
Using Email . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .94
Section 6: Pictures and Videos ................. 96
Using the Camera . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .96
Camera Modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .97
Quick Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .98
Camera and Camcorder Settings . . . . . . . . . . .99
Editing a Photo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .100
Using the Camcorder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .102
Gallery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .103
Section 7: Applications ........................... 106
Application Icons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .106
AppStore . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .109
Calculator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .109
Calendar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .110
Camera . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .110
ChatON . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .111
Chrome . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Contacts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Downloads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Dropbox . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Email . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Flipboard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Gallery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Gmail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Google . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Google Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Google + . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Group Play . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Hangouts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Internet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Local . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Maps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Messaging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Messenger . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
MetroZONE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Mobile Hotspot . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
113
113
117
117
117
119
119
120
120
121
122
123
123
125
125
126
128
129
130
130
131
131
Music . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
My Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
myMetro . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Navigation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Phone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Play Books . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Play Games . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Play Magazines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Play Movies & TV . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Play Music . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Play Store . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Rhapsody . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
S Memo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
S Translator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
S Voice . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Samsung Apps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Samsung Hub . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Samsung Link . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Story Album . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
TripAdvisor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Video . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
132
134
135
135
136
136
136
136
137
137
138
139
139
141
141
142
143
146
150
151
151
151
3
Visual Voicemail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153
Voice Recorder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153
Voice Search . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154
VPN Client . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155
WatchON . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155
YouTube . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159
Section 8: Connections ...........................162
Wi-Fi . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162
NFC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166
Bluetooth . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166
PC Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170
Mobile Hotspot . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171
USB Tethering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173
Section 9: Changing Your Settings .........175
Accessing Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175
Settings Tabs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175
Wi-Fi Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176
Bluetooth settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178
Data Usage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179
More networks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180
NFC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188
S Beam . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189
4
Nearby devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .189
Screen Mirroring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .190
Kies via Wi-Fi . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .190
Lock Screen Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .191
Display Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .194
LED indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .195
Sound Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .195
Home screen mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .197
Call Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .198
Blocking Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .206
Driving Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .206
Power saving mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .207
Accessory Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .207
Accessibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .208
One-handed operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .210
Language and input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .210
Motions and Gestures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .216
Smart screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .217
Air view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .218
Voice control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .218
Add Account . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .219
Cloud . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .220
Back up and reset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Location services . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Application Manager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Date and time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
About Device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
221
222
223
226
228
228
229
229
Section 10: Health and Safety
Information .............................................. 232
Exposure to Radio Frequency (RF) Signals . .
Specific Absorption Rate (SAR) Certification
Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
FCC Part 15 Information to User . . . . . . . . . .
Commercial Mobile Alerting System (CMAS) .
Smart Practices While Driving . . . . . . . . . . .
Battery Use and Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Samsung Mobile Products and Recycling . . .
UL Certified Travel Charger . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Display / Touch-Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
GPS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Emergency Calls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Care and Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Responsible Listening . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Operating Environment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
FCC Hearing Aid Compatibility (HAC)
Regulations for Wireless Devices . . . . . . .
Restricting Children's Access to Your
Mobile Device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
FCC Notice and Cautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Other Important Safety Information . . . . . . . .
246
247
249
251
253
253
253
Section 11: Warranty Information ..........256
232
Standard Limited Warranty . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256
End User License Agreement for Software . . 261
237
239
239
240
241
243
244
244
245
245
Index .........................................................269
5
Section 1: Getting Started
This section explains how to start using your phone by
configuring your hardware, setting up accounts, and setting
up your voice mail.
Before using your device for the first time, you’ll need to
install and charge the battery and install the micro SIM card.
The micro SIM card is loaded with your subscription details,
such as your PIN, available optional services, and many other
features. If desired, you can also install an SD card to store
media for use with your phone.
Understanding this User Manual
The sections of this manual generally follow the features of
your phone. A robust index for features begins on page 269.
Also included is important safety information that you should
know before using your device. This information is available
near the back of the guide, beginning on page 232.
This manual provides navigation instructions according to
the default display settings. If you select other settings,
navigation may be different.
6
Unless otherwise specified, all instructions in this manual
assume you are starting from the Home screen and using the
available keys.
Note: Instructions in this manual are based on default settings,
and may vary from your device, depending on the
software version on your device, and any changes to the
device’s Settings.
Unless stated otherwise, instructions in this User Manual
start with the device unlocked, at the Home screen.
All screen images in this manual are simulated. Actual
displays may vary, depending on the software version of
your device and any changes to the device’s Settings.
Special Text
Throughout this manual, you’ll find text that is set apart from
the rest. These are intended to point out important
information, share quick methods for activating features, to
define terms, and more. The definitions for these methods
are as follows:
• Caution: Provides information for the user to take care and avoid
danger or risk.
Text Conventions
This manual provides condensed information about how to
use your phone. To make this possible, the following text
conventions are used to represent often-used steps:
➔
Arrows are used to represent the sequence of
selecting successive options in longer, or
repetitive, procedures.
• Important: Points out important information about the current
feature that could affect performance.
• Notes: Presents alternative options for the current feature, menu,
or sub-menu.
• Tips: Provides quick or innovative methods, or useful shortcuts.
• Warning: Brings to your attention important information to
prevent loss of data or functionality, or even prevent damage to
your device.
Note: From the Home screen, press
Connections tab ➔ Bluetooth.
(Menu) ➔ Settings ➔
Setting Up Your Phone
Prior to use it is necessary to install both the battery and SIM
into their corresponding internal compartments. The
microSD™ card slot is also located in this same internal
area.
Getting Started
7
Removing the Back Cover
Remove the back cover by inserting a fingernail into
the slot on the top of your phone (1) then lift the cover
up (2).
Installing the microSIM Card and MicroSD card
When you subscribe to a cellular network, you are provided
with a plug-in microSIM card loaded with your subscription
details, such as your PIN, available optional services, and
many others features. You can also install a MicroSD card
(memory card) to hold additional media (optional).
Important! The plug-in microSIM card information and its
contacts can be easily damaged by scratching or
bending, so be careful when handling, inserting, or
removing the card. Keep all SIM cards out of reach
of small children.
Caution! Do not bend or twist the back cover excessively.
Doing so may damage the cover.
Important! Before removing or replacing the microSIM card,
make sure the phone is switched off. To turn the
phone off, hold down the
key until the
Device options pop up displays, then tap Power off.
Note: MicroSD cards should be formatted within the Storage
menu. Using an older or slow microSD card can affect
camera performance, especially for video recording.
8
1. Carefully slide the microSIM card under the bottom
metal plate into the SIM card socket (as shown) until
the card locks into place.
• Make sure that the card’s gold contacts face into the phone
and that the upper-left angled corner of the card is positioned
as shown.
2. To insert a MicroSD card (optional), carefully slide the
MicroSD card under the top metal plate into the
MicroSD card socket (as shown) until the card locks
into place.
Installing the Battery
1. Insert the battery into the opening on the back of the
phone, making sure the connectors align (1).
Important! Before removing or replacing the battery, make
sure the phone is switched off. To turn the phone
off, hold down the
key until the Device
options pop up displays, then tap Power off.
2. Gently press down to secure the battery (2).
Note: If the card is not inserted correctly, the phone will not
detect it and no service will be available. If this happens,
turn off the device, remove the card, and reinstall the
card in the correct orientation.
Getting Started
9
Installing the Back Cover
1. Place the battery cover onto the back of the phone (1)
and press down (2).
Note: Make sure the battery is properly installed before
switching on the phone.
Charging a Battery
Your device is powered by a rechargeable Li-ion battery. The
Travel Charger that is used to charge the battery, is included
with your device. Use only Samsung-approved batteries and
chargers.
Note: You must fully charge the battery before using your
phone for the first time. A discharged battery recharges
fully in approximately 4 hours.
2. Press along the edge of the back cover (3) until you
have a secure seal.
Note: Long backlight settings, searching for service, vibrate
mode, web browser use, and other variables may
reduce the battery’s talk and standby times.
Although you can use the phone while the battery is
charging, doing so will require additional charging time.
10
Using the Travel Charger
Note: Verify that the battery is installed prior to connecting the
wall charger. If both the wall charger is connected and
the battery is not installed, the handset will power cycle
continuously and prevent proper operation. Failure to
unplug the wall charger before you remove the battery,
can cause the device to become damaged.
2. When charging is finished, remove the flat end from
the interface connector jack on the phone.
Warning! If your handset has a touch screen display, please
note that a touch screen responds best to a light
touch from the pad of your finger. Using excessive
force or a metallic object when pressing on the touch
screen may damage the tempered glass surface and
void the warranty. For more information, refer to
“Warranty Information” on page 256.
Note: Failure to unplug the wall charger before you remove the
battery, can cause damage to the phone.
Warning! While the phone is charging, if the touch screen does
not function due to an unstable power supply unplug
the USB power adapter from the power outlet or
unplug the USB cable from the phone.
1. Plug the flat end of the Travel Charger into the Power/
Accessory Interface connector and the other end into a
standard AC wall outlet.
Getting Started
11
Low Battery Indicator
When the battery is weak and only a few minutes of talk time
remain, the battery icon ( ) blinks and the device sounds a
warning tone at regular intervals. In this condition, your
phone conserves its remaining battery power, not by turning
off the backlight, but by entering the dimming mode. For a
quick check of your battery level, glance at the battery
charge indicator located in the upper-right corner of your
device’s display. Solid color ( ) indicates a full charge.
When the battery level becomes too low, the phone
automatically turns off.
You can also choose to display a percentage value. Having a
percentage value on-screen can provide a better idea of the
remaining charge on the battery.
From the Home screen, tap
(Apps) ➔ Settings ➔
(My device tab) ➔ Display ➔ Show battery
percentage.
My device
Extending Your Battery Life
Active applications, light levels, Bluetooth usage, and GPS
functionality all act to drain your battery. The following is a
list of helpful tips that can help conserve your battery power:
• Reduce your backlight on time.
• Turn Bluetooth off when not in use.
• Turn Wi-Fi off when not in use.
• Deactivate the GPS when not needed. Most applications using
this function will periodically query the GPS satellites for your
current location; each query drains your battery.
• Do not wait until your battery is completely depleted before
charging your device. Repeating this process of a complete
discharge and recharge can over time reduce the storage
capacity of any battery.
• Use the Power Saving feature to deactivate some hardware and
interface functions.
• Check the Battery use screen to review what features or functions
have been consuming your battery resources.
• Check the Running Services and close any unnecessary
applications.
12
• Use the Task Manager feature to end/shutdown background
applications that are still running. These minimized applications
can, over time, cause your device to “slow down”.
• Animated wallpapers use processing power, memory, and more
power. Change your Live Wallpaper to a non-animated Wallpaper
gallery or Gallery image.
Switching the Phone On or Off
1. Press and hold
on.
until the phone switches
2. Swipe your finger across the screen to unlock the
phone.
Note: The display language is preset to English at the factory.
To change the language, use the Language menu. For
more information, refer to “Changing Your Settings” on
page 175.
3. To switch off the phone, press and hold
until the Device options screen displays.
,
4. Tap Power off to switch off the phone.
Locking and Unlocking the Touch
Screen
1. Press
to lock the touch screen.
2. Press
again to display the lock screen
then swipe your finger across the screen to unlock.
Note: Swipe is the default screen locking method. To change
your screen lock, see “Lock Screen Settings” on
page 191.
Getting Started
13
Configuring your Phone
When you first turn on your phone, you will need to set up a
few things.
1. Select a language from the associated field.
English is the default language.
Note: If you are visually impaired or have difficulty hearing, tap
Accessibility to configure the accessibility settings.
2. Tap Next and follow the on-screen setup instructions.
Note: You may be prompted with a notification that your
activation is completed.
Note: Enabling Google location services can drain battery
power.
Important! The device name is also used to provide an
identification for your device’s Bluetooth and
Wi-Fi Direct names.
3. Tap Finish to complete the setup process.
14
Creating a Samsung Account
An active Samsung account is required to begin accessing
applications such as ChatON and Samsung Hub. If you did
not create a Samsung account when you first set up your
phone, follow these steps:
1. From the home screen, tap
(Apps) ➔
(Settings) ➔
(Accounts tab) ➔ Add
account.
2. Tap
(Samsung account).
3. Tap Create new account.
4. Follow the on-screen instructions to create and
activate your account.
Creating a New Google Account
In order to utilize your device to the fullest extent, you will
need to create a Google™ Account when you first use your
device. With a Google Account, Google applications will
always be in sync between your phone and computer.
If you did not create a new account during the setup
procedure when you first turned your phone on, follow these
steps:
1. From the home screen, tap
(Apps) ➔
(Gmail).
The Add a Google Account screen displays.
2. Tap New to create a new Google account.
– or –
If you already have a Google account, tap Existing to
sign in and add the account to your phone.
3. Follow the on-screen instructions to add a Google
Account.
Note: Once you have created a Google account, you only need
to sign in.
Setting Up Your Voicemail
Your device automatically transfers all unanswered calls to
voicemail, even if your device is in use or turned off. As soon
as your battery is charged and the micro SIM card inserted,
activate your voicemail account.
Important! Always use a password to protect against
unauthorized access.
For new users, follow the instructions below to set up voice
mail:
Note: Voicemail setup may be different depending on your
network.
key
1. From the Home screen, tap
(Phone) ➔
until the device dials voicemail. You may be prompted
to enter a password.
2. Follow the tutorial to create a password, record a
greeting, and record your name.
Note: These steps may be different depending on your
network.
Getting Started
15
Accessing Your Voicemail
1. From the Home screen, tap
(Phone) ➔
.
You may be prompted to enter a password.
2. When connected, follow the voice prompts from the
voice mail center.
Accessing Your Voicemail From Another Phone
1. Dial your wireless phone number.
2. When you hear your voicemail greeting, press the
asterisk key on the phone you are using.
3. Enter your password.
16
Section 2: Understanding Your Phone
This section outlines some key features of your phone and
describes the screen and the icons that appear when the
phone is in use. It also shows how to navigate through the
phone and provides information on using a memory card.
Features of Your Phone
Your phone is lightweight, easy-to-use and offers many
useful features. The following list outlines a few of the
features included in your phone.
• LTE network with 1.7 gigahertz dual-core processor
• Android v 4.2.2, Jelly Bean Platform
• Brilliant 6.3” HD PLS TFT display
• Touch screen provides quick response to a variety of in-phone
menus and options including applications, multi windows and up
to seven home screens.
• Smart Switch™ compliant. For more information, see
www.samsungsmartswitch.com.
• Ready access to the Internet
• Built-in Bluetooth™ and advanced Wi-Fi® technology
• Mobile Hotspot and USB Tethering capability
• Wi-Fi ® Capability
• WatchON® – Rich TV experience with Infrared (IR) remote
• Access Movies, TV Shows, Music, Games, and Books with
Samsung Hub™
• Samsung Link™ to share your media content across connected
devices. Cloud connectivity is enabled via the use of an external
Web storage service
• Compliant with AllShare Cast Hub® (not provided)
• 8 Megapixel camera and camcorder with Front Facing camera
• GPS Navigation functionality provides real-time navigation
• Delivers data faster using 4G LTE and High Speed Packet Access
Plus (HSPA+).
Understanding Your Phone
17
• Up to 64GB expandable memory slot
• Corporate and Personal Email
• Sync and update social network applications
• Apps available to download via Google Play Store™ and
Front View of Your Phone
5
11
1
10
Samsung Hub
9
• Full Integration of Google Mobile™ Services (Gmail, Google+,
Google Maps, Google Hangouts, etc..)
• Multiple Messaging Options: Text/Picture/Video Messaging, and
Instant Messaging with Google Hangouts™
• NFC-compatible
• IR LED (Remote Control)
2
8
3
4
5
6
7
1. Receiver: allows you to hear the caller.
2. Application icons: you can place shortcuts to your
favorite applications on the Home screen.
18
3. Primary shortcuts: allows quick access to important
features such as Phone, Contacts, Messaging, Internet,
and Apps. For more information, refer to “Adding and
Removing Primary Shortcuts” on page 35.
7. Back key: allows you step backwards when navigating
a menu or web page.
4. Menu key: allows you to access sub-menus with
additional options for different features and
applications such as Home screen, Phone, Contacts,
Messaging, and Web.
9. Indicator icons: shows the information needed to
operate your phone, such as the received signal
strength, phone battery level, time, unread Emails,
missed calls, etc.
5. Microphones are used during phone calls and allow
other callers to hear you clearly when you are speaking
to them. There are two microphones on the device:
• Bottom microphone: used during handset mode.
10. Front facing camera: allows you to take pictures of
yourself when you set the camera shooting mode to
Self shot.
• Top microphone: used while an active call is in the
speakerphone mode and assists in noise cancellation
(2 microphone solution).
6. Home key: allows you to return to the main Home
screen from any Home screen or menu. Press and hold
to display Recent apps, Task Manager, and Google
Search. Quickly press twice to activate the S Voice
application.
8. Home screen indicator: shows which Home screen is
presently displayed.
11. Proximity and Light sensors: uses the ambient light
level to adjust keypad access. If the light path is
blocked, for example, when holding the phone close to
your ear, the touch screen will turn off.
• While talking on the phone, the sensor detects talk activity and
locks the keypad to prevent accidental key presses.
• In a bright light condition (outdoors), the sensors cause the
device to increase the brightness and contrast for better
viewing.
Understanding Your Phone
19
• In dim light conditions, the device decreases the screen
brightness to compensate.
Side Views of Your Phone
1
5
2
4
1. 3.5mm Headset jack: allows you to plug in headphones.
2. Volume keys: allow you to adjust the ringer volume
while in standby mode or adjust the voice volume
during a call. When receiving an incoming call, briefly
press down either volume key to mute the ring tone.
Adjusts text size when reading a message.
3. Power/Accessory Interface connector: allows you to
connect a Travel Charger or other optional accessories
such as a USB/data cable or a hands-free headset for
convenient, hands-free conversations.
4. Power/Lock key: lets you power your phone on and
off. Also allows you to lock or unlock the touch screen.
For more information, refer to “Locking and Unlocking
the Touch Screen” on page 13.
5. Infrared Blaster: Used to emit infrared signals used for
controlling external devices.
3
20
Rear View of Your Phone
Display Layout
1
3
Your display screen provides a wealth of information about
the phone’s status and options, as well as providing access
to application icons. For more information, refer to “Front
View of Your Phone” on page 18.
Indicator Icons
This list identifies the symbols you’ll see on your phone’s
display and Indicator area:
Displays your current signal strength. The greater
the number of bars, the stronger the signal.
2
Indicates that the Airplane Mode is active. You
cannot send or receive any calls or access online
information.
Displays when there is no SIM card in the phone.
1. Camera lens: is used to take pictures and shoot videos.
2. External speaker: allows you to hear when the
Speakerphone is turned on.
Displays when there is no network available.
3. Flash: is used to provide adequate light when taking
pictures in dark places.
Displays when your phone is in Blocking mode.
Understanding Your Phone
21
Displays when there is a system error or alert.
Displays your battery charge level. Icon shown is
fully charged.
Displays when the Smart stay feature is activated.
The screen stays on as long as you are looking at it.
Displays when your battery is charging. Also
displays battery charge level.
Displays to indicate a security warning. You are
prompted to set a screen lock password.
Device Power Low – Shows your current battery
only has between 15 and 28 percent power
remaining.
Displays when a call is in progress.
Displays when a call is on hold.
Displays when the speakerphone is on.
Displays when a call has been missed.
Device Power Very Low – Shows your current
battery only has between 5 and 15 percent power
remaining.
Device Power Critical – Shows your current battery
only has less than 5 percent power remaining and
will immediately shutdown.
Displays when your connection to an EDGE network
is active.
Displays when a call has been muted.
Displays when your phone is communicating with
the EDGE network.
Displays when Call forwarding is set to Always
forward. For more information, refer to “Additional
settings” on page 200.
22
Displays when connected to the 3G network. 3G
indicator is only seen when roaming.
Displays when your phone is communicating with
the 3G network. 3G indicator is only seen when
roaming.
Displays when updates are available for download.
Displays when connected to the HSPA+ network.
Displays when the phone is connected to a
computer via a supported USB cable connection.
Displays when your phone is communicating with
the HSPA+ network.
Displays when the phone is tethered via a
supported USB cable connection.
Displays when a new text or multimedia message
is received.
Displays when your connection to a 4G LTE
network is active.
Displays when your phone is communicating
with the 4G LTE network.
Displays when your phone is downloading or has
downloaded a file. It will blink green when it is
installing.
Displays when the an outbound file transfer is in
progress.
Displays when a Play Store download has
completed.
Displays when a new voice mail is received.
Displays when Email is received.
Displays when there is a new visual voicemail
message.
Displays when a new Google+ notification has
been received.
Displays when the user is prompted to set up a
new Dropbox account.
Understanding Your Phone
23
Displays when the time and date for a Calendar Event
has arrived. For more information, refer to
“Calendar” on page 110.
Displays when you set an alarm to ring at a specified
time. For more information, refer to “Alarm” on page
113.
Displays when the Sound profile is set to Mute.
Displays when the Sound profile is set to Vibrate.
Displays when the Driving Mode is active.
For more information, refer to “Driving Mode” on
page 206.
Displays when Bluetooth is activated.
Displays when a Bluetooth device has been paired
with the phone.
Displays when Wi-Fi is connected, active, and
communicating with a Wireless Access Point
(WAP).
24
Displays when there is a Wi-Fi access point
available but you are not connected to it. May also
display if there is a communication issue with the
target Wireless Access Point (WAP).
Displays when the USB Tethering mode is active
and communicating. For more information, refer to
“USB Tethering” on page 173.
Displays when Wi-Fi is being used as a Mobile
HotSpot feature is active and communicating.
For more information, refer to “Mobile Hotspot” on
page 171.
Displays when the Wi-Fi calling feature is active.
Minutes used while connected to the Wi-Fi
network count against available rate plan minutes.
Displays when the Wi-Fi calling feature is active
and you are using it with within your current
active call.
Displays when there is an error in the use or 911
registration of the Wi-Fi Calling feature.
Displays when GPS is active and acquiring
a signal.
Displays when data synchronization and
application sync is active and synchronization is in
progress for Gmail, Calendar, and Contacts.
Displays when a screen capture has been taken.
Displays when Near Field Communication (NFC)
has been activated.
Displays in the notifications window when there are
too many on-screen notification icons to display.
Tap to show more notifications.
Displays when your device is connected being used
to control streaming media and is connected to a
Digital Living Network Alliance (DLNA) certified
device using the Samsung Link application.
Displays when storage within either the internal
location or the external SD card has reached its
capacity. It is recommended you either move
files off or delete them to make additional room.
Displays when your device is currently sharing/
streaming media to a paired device using the
Samsung Link application.
Displays when Power saving mode is enabled.
Displays when a file is being uploaded or sync’d
between your device and an external Web storage
location.
Displays when the uploaded or transferred file was
successfully delivered.
Displays when the keypad is active.
For more details on configuring your phone’s settings, see
“Changing Your Settings” on page 175.
Displays when TTY device has been inserted.
Understanding Your Phone
25
Google Search Bar
Touch and Hold
The Google Search Bar provides you an on-screen Internet
search engine powered by Google™.
1. From the main Home screen, swipe the screen to the
left to bring up the next Home screen.
2. Tap the Google Search bar
.
3. Use the on-screen keypad to enter the item you want
to search for, then tap
.
4. Tap
to use Google Voice Search. Follow the
on-screen instructions.
Using Motions and Gestures
By activating the various motion and gesture features, you
can access a variety of time saving functions.
Terms used in this user manual
Tap
Lightly touch items to select or launch them. For example:
• Tap the on screen keyboard to enter characters or text.
• Tap a menu item to select it.
• Tap an application’s icon to launch the application.
26
Activate on-screen items by a touch and hold gesture. For
example:
• Touch and hold a widget on the home screen to move it.
• Touch and hold on a field to display a pop-up menu of options.
Swipe and Palm Swipe
To swipe, lightly drag your finger vertically or horizontally
across the screen. Use swipe when:
• Unlocking the screen
• Scrolling through the Home screen or a menu
To palm swipe, swipe the side of your hand horizontally
across the screen. Use palm swipe when:
• Capturing the screen
Panning
To pan, touch and hold a selected icon, then move the device
to the left or right to reposition it to another page. You must
first activate Motion on your device. Use panning to:
• Move icons on your Home screens or Application Menus to
another page.
Tilt
To activate the tilt feature, press and hold two points on the
screen then tilt the device back and forth to reduce or
enlarge the screen. Use tilt to:
• Reduce or enlarge the screen in the Gallery or Browser.
Turn over
Turn your phone over so that the screen faces downward. For
example:
• Mute incoming calls and playing sounds by turning your phone
over.
Activating Motions and Gestures
Caution! Excessive shaking or impact to the device may cause
unintended results. To learn how to properly control
motions, tap
(Apps) ➔ Settings ➔
(My device tab) ➔ Motions and gestures. When
tapped, each entry comes with an on-screen tutorial.
My device
• Motion: Allows you to control your device using natural
movements (on the screen).
• Palm motion: Allows you to control your device by touching the
screen with your entire hand.
• Gyroscope calibration: Allows you to properly calibrate your
device’s touch screen.
To activate Motion:
1. From the Home screen, press
(Menu) and then tap
Settings ➔
(My device tab) ➔ Motions and
gestures.
My device
2. Tap the ON/OFF slider located to the right of Motion to
turn it on
.
3. Tap the Motion field and then move the ON/OFF slider
located to the right of each feature to turn it on.
To activate Palm Motion:
1. From the Home screen, press
(Menu) and then tap
Settings ➔
(My device tab) ➔ Motions and
gestures.
My device
2. In a single motion touch and slide the Palm motion
slider to the right to turn it on.
3. Tap the Palm motion field and then move the ON/OFF
slider located to the right of each feature to turn it on.
For more information, refer to “Motions and Gestures” on
page 216.
Understanding Your Phone
27
Gyroscope Calibration
Calibrate your device by using the built-in gyroscope.
1. From the main Settings page, tap My device tab ➔
Motions and gestures ➔ Gyroscope calibration.
2. Place the device on a level surface and tap Calibrate.
The device adjusts the level of the accelerometer.
During the calibration process a green circle appears
on-screen and the center circle adjusts to the center
position.
Home Screen Overview
The main home screen is the starting point for many
applications and functions, and it allows you to add items
like application icons, shortcuts, folders, or Google widgets
to give you instant access to information and applications.
This is the default page and accessible from any menu by
pressing
.
28
Navigating Through the Home Screens
Your phone originally has three home screens but you can
expand up to seven home screens. If you like, you can place
different applications on each of the home screens.
From the main Home screen, sweep the screen with
your finger in either direction. The main Home Screen
is located in the middle with a Home screen on each
side.
Home Screen Menu Settings
When on the Home screen, press
(Menu) and then select
any of the following menu options:
• Add apps and widgets allows you to quickly access the Widget
tab where you can then drag a selected widget to an available
area on a selected screen.
• Create folder allows you to create on-screen folders to help
organize files of application shortcuts.
• Set wallpaper allows you to assign the current wallpaper for the
Home screen, Lock screen, or Home and lock screens. Choose
from Gallery, Live wallpapers, or Wallpapers.
• Edit page allows you to add or remove extended screens from
your device. You can have up to six extended screens (one Home
screen and six Extended screens).
• Search displays the Google Search box that you can use to
search for a key term online.
• Settings provides quick access to the device’s settings menu.
– The Settings menu can also be accessed by pressing
(Menu) and then tapping
(Apps) ➔ Settings.
• Help displays an on-screen Help file.
Navigating Through the Application Menus
Your phone initially has three Application Menus available.
Follow these steps to navigate through the Application
Menus:
1. At the Home screen, tap
(Apps). The first
Application Menu will be displayed.
2. Sweep the screen left or right to access the other two
menus.
3. Tap one of the application icons.
Note: As you add applications, the number of Application
menus that you have available will increase.
Navigating Using Sub-Menus
Sub-menus are available when you are at any Home screen
or have selected a feature or application such as Phone,
Contacts, Messaging, or Browser.
To access a sub-menu:
1. Press
(Menu).
A sub-menu will appear at the bottom of the phone
screen.
2. Tap an option.
Understanding Your Phone
29
Using the Multi Window
This feature allows you to run multiple applications on the
current screen at the same time.
Note: Only applications found within the Multi window panel
can be active atop another current application on the
screen. When launching applications that contain
multimedia files (music/video), audio from both files will
be played simultaneously.
Activating and Deactivating Multi window
To activate Multi window:
1. From the Home screen, press
(Menu) and then tap
Settings ➔
(My device tab) ➔ Display.
My device
2. Tap the Multi window filed to activate the feature.
A checkmark will appear.
3. Tap Home
to return to the Home screen.
4. Tap the tab to open the application panel showing all
the available Multi window apps.
Note: Initially upon activation, the entire apps panel is briefly
displayed, then minimized to only show the tab.
30
To deactivate Multi window:
Press and hold the Back key (
). This action hides
the Multi window tab from view.
Note: Once you have set the Multi window option on in step 1,
you only need to press and hold the Back key (
) to
re-activate the Multi window feature.
Repositioning the Multi Window
The Multi window contains two components: tab and apps
panel. The tab can be manually moved across the screen.
The apps panel (containing the scrollable apps) can be
relocated to lock onto the different sides of the screen
(top/bottom/left/right).
To move the tab:
1. Activate the Multi window feature.
2. In a single motion, touch and hold the tab for
approximately one-second, then slowly drag it to its
new location along the current screen edge.
Note: This is a quick way to get the tab out of the way if you
can’t get to a button or option behind it.
To relocate the Multi window apps panel:
1. Activate the Multi window feature.
2. Tap the tab to display the apps panel (containing the
scrollable apps).
3. In a single motion, touch and hold the tab for
approximately one-second to detach it from the
screen, then slowly drag it to its new location along any
other available screen edge. You can move it to the top,
bottom, or either side.
Customizing the Multi Window apps
The applications found within the apps panel of the Multi
window can be organized by either being rearranged or
removed.
To rearrange the Multi window applications:
1. Activate the Multi window feature.
2. Tap the tab to display the apps panel (containing the
scrollable apps).
3. In a single motion, touch and hold a desired app until it
detaches from the panel, then carefully drag it to a new
location in the list of apps. Lift your finger or stylus off
the screen to let go of the app and drop it into its new
location.
To remove a Multi window application:
1. Activate the Multi window feature.
2. Tap the tab to display the apps panel (containing the
scrollable apps).
3. Tap the Edit button (located at the bottom of the list) to
reveal a staging area that can house any removed
applications from the Multi window panel.
4. Tap Done once you have completed the removal
process.
To restore a Multi window application:
1. Activate the Multi window feature.
2. Tap the tab to display the apps panel (containing the
scrollable apps).
3. Tap the Edit button (located at the bottom of the list) to
reveal the staging area containing any previously
removed apps.
Understanding Your Phone
31
4. Locate the desired application.
5. In a single motion, touch and hold a desired app until it
detaches from the staging area, then carefully drag it
to a new location in the current list of apps.
Using Multi Window to run multiple apps on the
same screen
In this example we will be launching both the Internet and
Maps applications.
1. Launch an application such as Maps.
• From the Home screen, tap
(Internet).
2. Activate the Multi window feature.
3. Tap the tab to display the apps panel.
Any of the apps found within the Multi window panel can be
run at the same time as a current on-screen app.
4. Touch and hold the desired app, such as Maps, until it
detaches from the panel.
Once multiple apps are running on the same screen, you can
then choose to either swap their positions or maximize a
desired app.
5. In a single motion, drag it over the current app and
drop the new Multi window app over either the top or
bottom area of the current on-screen app.
Note: Only applications found within the Multi window panel
can be active atop another current application on the
screen.
When launching applications that contain multimedia
files (music/video), audio from both files will be played
simultaneously.
32
Note: Once two applications are running, the device displays a
split screen view containing both the initial app and the
new Multi window app. Each application is still
independent of the other.
To switch the arrangement of
the applications:
1. With the two
applications shown in a
split screen, tap the
Border bar to show the
on-screen icons.
App #1
Split/Maximize
To increase the size of a desired application window:
1. With the two applications shown in a split screen,
locate the Border bar indicating the edge of the app
window.
2. In a single motion, touch and hold the Border bar then
drag it to resize the desired window.
To split the current applications:
1. With the two applications shown in a split screen, tap
the Border bar to show the on-screen icons.
2. Tap the desired
application area (top or
bottom).
2. Tap the desired application area (top or bottom).
3. Locate and tap
(Switch app location).
The current apps are
switched.
3. Locate and tap
(Maximize the app). The current
apps are the both maximized.
To exit the Multi window app, tap
.
Exit
App #2 Border Switch
bar Positions
Understanding Your Phone
33
Customizing Your Home Screen
You can customize your Home screen by doing the following:
• Creating Shortcuts
• Adding and Removing Primary Shortcuts
• Adding and Removing Widgets
• Moving Icons in the Apps Menu
• Sharing an Application
• Creating Application Folders
• Adding a New Page to the Application Menu
• Changing the Wallpaper
• Adding and Deleting Home Screens
• Moving Home Screens
Creating Shortcuts
Shortcuts are different than the current Home screen
Widgets that only launch an application. Shortcuts activate a
feature, action, or launch an application.
Note: To move a shortcut from one screen to another, it must
first be deleted from its current screen. Navigate to the
new screen, then add the shortcut.
34
Adding a shortcut from the Apps Menu
1. Press
to activate the main Home screen.
2. Navigate to the desired Home Page.
3. Tap
(Apps) to display your current applications.
4. Scroll through the list and locate your desired
application.
5. Touch and hold the application icon. This creates an
immediate shortcut of the selected icon and closes the
Apps tab.
6. While still holding the on-screen icon, position it on the
current page. Once complete, release the screen to
lock the new shortcut into its new position on the
current screen.
Adding a shortcut via the Add to Home screen
1. Press
to activate the main Home screen.
2. Navigate to the desired Home Page.
3. Touch and hold on an empty area of the Home screen.
4. Tap Apps and widgets, Folder, or Page.
5. Press and hold a shortcut from the available list and
position it on the current screen.
Deleting a shortcut
1. Press
to activate the main Home screen.
2. Touch and hold the desired shortcut. This unlocks it
from its location on the current screen.
3. Drag the icon over the Remove icon
and release it.
As you place the shortcut into the Trash, both items
turn red.
Note: This action does not delete the shortcut, it just removes
it from the current screen.
Adding and Removing Primary Shortcuts
You can change any of your primary shortcuts with the
exception of the
(Apps) shortcut.
1. Press
to activate the main Home screen.
2. Touch and hold the primary shortcut you want to
replace, then drag it to an empty space on any Home
screen.
The new primary shortcut will now appear on all Home
screens.
Adding and Removing Widgets
Widgets are self-contained applications that reside in either
your Widgets tab or on the main or extended Home screens.
Unlike a shortcut, the Widget appears as an on-screen
application.
Adding a Widget
1. Press
to activate the main Home screen.
2. Navigate to the desired Home Page.
3. Touch and hold on an empty area of the screen.
4. Tap Apps and widgets.
5. Tap the Widgets tab at the top of the screen.
6. Press and hold an available Widget to position it on the
current screen, then release the Widget.
3. Scroll through the Apps menu to find the shortcut you
want to add as the new primary short cut.
4. Touch and hold the new shortcut, then drag it to the
empty space in the row of primary shortcuts.
Understanding Your Phone
35
Removing a Widget
1. Touch and hold a Widget until you can move it around
on the screen.
2. Drag the Widget up to the Remove icon
release it.
and
As you place the Widget into the Trash, both items turn
red.
Note: This action does not actually delete the Widget, it just
removes it from the current Home screen.
Moving Icons in the Apps Menu
1. From the Home screen, tap
current applications.
(Apps) to display your
2. Tap the Apps tab at the top of the screen if it is not
already selected.
3. Press
(Menu) and tap Edit.
6. Scroll through the list and locate the icon you wish to
move.
36
8. Tap Save.
9. Press
to return to the Home screen.
Sharing an Application
The phone’s Applications menu now comes with a feature
that allows you to share information about your selected
applications with external users.
1. From the Home screen, tap
(Apps).
2. Press
(Menu) and then tap Share apps.
3. Place a check mark alongside those applications you
wish to share information about and tap Done.
Note: Shared applications consist of those that have
previously been downloaded from the Play Store.
(Menu) and tap View type.
4. Tap Customizable grid. A green circle will appear next
to the option.
5. Press
7. Touch and drag the icon to the position that you want.
To move to a different page, drag the icon to the edge
of the page until the page scrolls to the desired page.
4. Select a sharing method.
5. The recipient will be notified about the receipt of the
new information.
Creating Application Folders
Adding a New Page to the Application Menu
You can create application folders to hold similar applications
if you wish.
1. Press
To create a folder follow these steps:
1. From the Home screen, tap
current applications.
3. Tap the Apps tab at the top of the screen if it is not
already selected.
(Apps) to display your
2. Tap the Apps tab at the top of the screen if it is not
already selected.
3. Press
(Menu) and tap Edit.
4. Touch and hold the first application that you would like
to move to a folder.
5. Drag the icon up to
(Create folder) icon.
6. Enter a folder name and tap OK.
A folder is displayed in the original place of the
application icon with the application icon displayed on
top of it. You can now drag other Apps into the folder.
7. To view information on an App, drag the App icon up to
icon to view information on the
the App info
application.
8. Tap Save.
2. Tap
4. Press
to activate the main Home screen.
(Apps) to display your current applications.
(Menu) and tap Edit.
5. Touch and hold the first application that you would like
to move to a new page.
6. Drag the icon up to
(Create page) icon.
7. Tap Save. The app will appear on a new page.
Changing the Wallpaper
You can change the Wallpaper (background) of your home
screens.
1. From any Home screen, touch and hold on an empty
area of the screen.
The Home screen window is displayed.
2. Tap Set wallpaper.
3. Select the location where you would like to change the
wallpaper. Tap Home screen, Lock screen, or Home and
lock screens.
Understanding Your Phone
37
4. Tap one of the following options:
• Gallery: select a wallpaper from photographs you have taken
with your camera.
• Live wallpapers: select an animated wallpaper. This option is
not available for the Lock screen option.
• Wallpapers: select from many still-life wallpapers.
5. Select a wallpaper and tap Set wallpaper, Done, or
Cancel.
Adding and Deleting Home Screens
You can add and delete Home screens. You can have up to
seven Home screens.
To add a new Home screen:
1. Press
to activate the main Home screen.
2. Press
(Menu) and tap Edit page.
3. Tap the Home screen that contains
.
A new screen is added.
4. If desired, touch and hold the new screen and drag it to
a different location.
5. Press
to return to the main Home screen.
You can now add items to your new Home screen.
38
To delete a Home screen:
1. Press
to activate the main Home screen.
2. Press
(Menu) and tap Edit page.
3. Touch and hold the Home screen you want to delete.
4. Drag it to the trash can located at the top of the screen.
The page will turn red.
5. If there are items on the Home screen, the Remove
home screen page prompt is displayed.
6. Tap OK to delete the page and its contents, otherwise
tap Cancel.
7. Press
to return to the main Home screen.
Notification Bar
Moving Home Screens
You can arrange your Home screens in any order that you
want.
To move a Home screen, follow these steps:
1. Press
to activate the main Home screen.
(Menu) and tap Edit page.
2. Press
3. Touch and hold the Home screen you want to move.
4. Drag it to the location that you would like to place it.
When you move a Home screen, the other Home
screens are re-ordered automatically.
5. Press
The Notification area indicates new message events (data
sync status, new messages, calendar events, call status,
etc). You can expand this area to display the Notification
screen that provides more detailed information about the
current on-screen notification icons.
1. Touch the Status bar to reveal the Notifications tab, and
then drag the tab to the bottom of the screen to open
the Notifications panel (1).
2. Tap a notification entry to open the associated
application (2).
to return to the main Home screen.
Assigning a New Home Screen
1. From the Home screen, press
Edit page.
2. Tap
(Menu) and then tap
. The new Home screen then indicates this
(Home screen) icon at the top of the selected
screen.
Understanding Your Phone
39
Clearing Notifications
To clear all notifications from the Notification panel:
1. From the Home screen, touch and hold the Notification
Bar until the pull-down displays, then drag down
vertically.
2. Tap the Clear button.
The notifications are cleared and the panel closes.
Accessing Additional Panel Functions
In addition to notifications, the Notification panel also
provides quick and ready access to separate device
functions. These can be quickly activated or deactivated by
toggling them on or off. You can choose the functions that
will be displayed.
1. From the notification panel, tap
(Open Grid view) to
display additional options.
The following functions (default) can either be
activated (green) or deactivated (gray): Wi-Fi, GPS,
Sound, Screen rotation, Bluetooth, Blocking mode,
Power saving, Multi window, Screen Mirroring,
S Beam, NFC, Air view, Driving mode, Smart stay,
Sync, and Airplane mode.
40
2. Tap
(Edit) then locate the button at the bottom of
the Notifications panel screen.
3. In a single motion, touch and hold a desired function
then drag it to the top two rows.
4. Tap Brightness adjustment to create a checkmark if you
want to be able to adjust the screen brightness via the
Notification panel.
(Close Grid view) to
5. Tap
(Back) and then tap
display only your primary functions.
Memory Card
Your device lets you use a microSD (SD) or microSDHC
card to expand available memory space. This secure digital
card enables you to exchange images, music, and data
between SD-compatible devices. This section addresses the
features and options of your device’s SD functionality. The
device has a USB SD card mode.
Mounting the SD Card
To store additional photos, music, videos, and other
applications, you must mount (install) the SD card prior to
use. Mounting the SD card establishes a USB connection
with your computer.
1. Insert the SD card into the SD card slot. For more
information, refer to “Installing the microSIM Card and
MicroSD card” on page 8.
2. Your SD card is scanned to see the available
information on it.
Unmounting the SD card
Unmounting the SD card prevents corruption and damage to
the SD card while removing it from the slot.
1. From the Home screen, press
(Menu) and then tap
Settings ➔
(More tab) ➔ Storage.
More
2. Scroll to the bottom of the display and tap Unmount SD
card.
3. Tap OK.
For more information, refer to “Installing the microSIM
Card and MicroSD card” on page 8.
SD card Available Memory Status
To view the memory allocation for your external SD card:
(Menu) and then tap
1. From the Home screen, press
Settings ➔
(More tab) ➔ Storage.
More
2. The available memory for Device and SD card displays
under the Total space and Available space headings.
Understanding Your Phone
41
Entering Text
Formatting the SD card
You can erase files from the SD card using the phone.
1. Ensure the SD card is mounted. For more information,
refer to “Mounting the SD Card” on page 41.
(Menu) and then tap
2. From the Home screen, press
Settings ➔
(More tab) ➔ Storage.
More
3. Tap Format SD card.
4. At the Format SD card confirmation prompt, tap Format
SD card.
Warning! Performing the next step erases all data stored on
the SD card.
5. Tap Delete all to format or press
(Back) to cancel.
This section describes how to select the desired text input
method when entering characters into your phone.
Your phone comes equipped with an orientation detector that
can tell if the phone is being held in an upright (Portrait) or
sideways (Landscape) orientation. This is useful when
entering text.
Text Input Methods
There are three text input methods available:
• Google voice typing: allows you to enter text by speaking.
• Samsung keyboard (default): Samsung’s on-screen
QWERTY keypad that can be used in both portrait and
landscape orientation.
• Swype: a new way to enter text on touch screens. Instead
of tapping each key, use your finger to trace over each
letter of a word.
To change the input method, see “Keyboards and Input
Methods” on page 210.
42
Selecting the Text Input Method
Using the Google Voice Typing Feature
The Text Input Method can be assigned from within one of
two locations:
This feature uses Google voice recognition to convert your
spoken words into on-screen text.
Settings Menu:
You can use your voice to enter text using the Google Voice
typing feature.
1. Tap
(Input Methods) on the keyboard.
From the Home screen, press
(Menu) and then tap
Settings ➔
(My device tab) ➔ Language and
input ➔ Default and select an input method.
My device
Text Input field:
1. From a screen where you can enter text, in a single
motion, touch and drag the Status bar down to the
bottom of the screen to open the Notifications screen.
2. Tap
(Select input method) and select an available
input method.
2. At the Listening prompt
(Speak now), speak
clearly and distinctly into the microphone.
The text is displayed in the message as you are
speaking.
3. Tap
– or –
Tap
(Done) when you are finished.
(Resume) to resume recognition.
Note: The feature works best when you break your message
down into smaller segments.
4. If the text is incorrect, tap DELETE.
5. After you have quit speaking for several seconds, tap
to return to the keyboard.
Understanding Your Phone
43
Using the Samsung Keyboard
Changing the Text Input Mode - Keypad
Entering Text Using the Samsung Keyboard
This QWERTY keyboard can be used to enter text in either a
Portrait or landscape orientation. The only difference
between the two orientations are the sizes of the keys.
From a screen where you can enter text, rotate your phone
counterclockwise to a Landscape orientation. The on-screen
QWERTY keypad will display.
There are two main keypad layout keys that will change the
on-screen keys within the QWERTY keypad. The available
Text Input modes are: Sym and Abc.
Symbol/Numeric Mode: activates the number,
symbol, and emoticon keys.
ABC Mode: activates the default alphabet keys.
Can also be set to Abc or abc by using the shift
(
) key.
Note: When in Abc mode, the Sym button will appear. When in
Sym mode, the Abc/ABC/abc button will appear.
Shift
Key
Delete
Key
Voice Typing
and More Options Space Bar
Text Input Mode
44
New
Paragraph
Using ABC Mode
1. If desired, rotate your phone counterclockwise to a
Landscape orientation.
2. Tap the Enter message field.
3. Tap the desired alphabetic characters.
4. The screen initially opens in ABC mode. After typing the
first letter, the shift key (
) will change to
and following letters will be lowercase.
5. Tap
to input another upper-case letter or tap
twice to switch to ABC mode. The shift key will
change to
in ABC mode. All following letters will
be uppercase until you tap the shift key again.
Using Symbol/Numeric Mode
Use Symbol/Numeric Mode to add numbers, symbols, or
emoticons.
1. Rotate your phone counterclockwise to a Landscape
orientation.
at the bottom of the screen. The Symbol/
2. Tap
Numeric keyboard is displayed.
3. Tap the desired number, symbol, or emoticon
characters.
4. Tap the
5. Tap
button to access additional symbols.
to return to Abc mode.
Predictive Text
By using the Predictive Text option, you can have next-letter
prediction and regional error correction, which compensates
for pressing the wrong keys on the QWERTY keyboard.
Predictive text is turned on by default.
1. Press and hold
(Input Methods) on the keyboard,
then tap
.
2. Tap the ON/OFF slider, located to the right of the
Predictive text field, to
.
3. In the text portion of the message screen, begin typing
a word. A list of word options is displayed. Tap one of
the words to replace the word that has already been
typed or scroll the line of words to the left for more
word choices.
4. Continue typing your message. Tap
to send the
(Menu) for more options. For
message or press
more information, refer to “Creating and Sending
Messages” on page 82.
Understanding Your Phone
45
Entering Text Using Handwriting
You can enter text simply by using your finger to handwrite
letters on your screen.
1. Press and hold
(Input Methods) on the keyboard,
then tap
.
2. Use your finger tip to write out each character. You can
print or use cursive.
3. You can write out your entire message using the
(Options)
Handwriting feature or press and hold
and then tap
to switch back to Samsung
keyboard mode.
Samsung Keyboard Settings
For information on how you can configure your Samsung
keyboard settings, see “Samsung Keyboard settings” on
page 211.
Touch and hold
(Input Methods) to select from
other input methods such as:
• Sentence characters to place commonly used characters
such as commas, ?, !, etc..
• Voice to text to launch the device’s Google Voice typing
application to covert spoken words into on-screen text.
46
• Handwriting to launch an on-screen handwriting area that can
be used to convert on-screen patterns (text) to text.
• Clipboard to launch the device’s clipboard area from where
you can select a current clipboard item to place in your current
message.
• Settings to access the Samsung keyboard settings menu.
• Keyboard alignment to detach the on-screen keyboard so that
you can manually dock it anywhere on the current text entry
screen. Selecting the feature again redocks the keyboard into
its original location using the original size.
Using Swype
Entering Text Using Swype
Swype™ is a text input method that allows you to enter a
word by sliding your finger or stylus from letter to letter,
lifting your finger between words. Swype uses error
correcting algorithms and a language model to predict the
next word. Swype also includes a tapping predictive text
system.
The following example shows how to enter the word “This”.
Put your finger down on the “T”, and without lifting, glide it
to the “h”, then to the “i” then over to the “s”.
Enabling and Configuring Swype
The Samsung keyboard is the default text input method, so
to use Swype, you must first change the default keyboard
setting.
To enable Swype:
1. From a screen where you can enter text, touch and
drag
down from the Notifications area then tap
Select input method.
2. Tap the Swype radio button. It will turn green.
The Swype keyboard is displayed.
Swype Settings
For information on how you can configure your Swype
settings, see “Swype Keypad Settings” on page 213.
Understanding Your Phone
47
Swype Text Entry Tips
You can access the SwypeTips application and watch a video
or tutorial on using Swype. You can also use the following
Swype text entry tips.
• Create a squiggle (like an S shape) to create a double letter (such
as pp in apple).
• Touch and hold a key to view the punctuation menu then make a
selection.
• Move your finger or stylus over the apostrophe to enter
contractions.
• Double-tap on the word you want to change to correct a
misspelled word, then tap the delete key to erase one character.
Touch and hold the delete key to erase an entire word.
48
Section 3: Call Functions
This section describes how to make or answer a call. It also
includes the features and functionality associated with
making or answering a call.
For more information, refer to “Call Settings” on page 198.
Displaying Your Phone Number
From the Home screen, tap
(Apps) ➔ Settings ➔
(More tab) ➔ About device ➔ Status. Your
phone number is displayed in the My phone number
field.
More
Making a Call
1. From the Home screen, tap
(Phone) and use the
on-screen keypad to enter the number you wish to dial.
2. Tap
(Call) to make the call.
Making an International Call
1. From the Home screen, tap
(Phone), then touch
and hold 0 + . The + character appears.
2. Use the on-screen keypad to enter the country code,
area code, and phone number.
• If you make a mistake, tap
until the desired numbers
have been deleted.
3. Tap
To manually call a number with pause(s) without storing it in
your Contacts list:
1. From the Home screen, tap
(Phone) and use the
on-screen keypad to enter the phone number.
2. Press
Note: When you activate the Auto redial option in the Voice Call
menu, the phone will automatically redial up to 10 times
when the person does not answer the call or is already
on the phone. For more information, see Auto redial on
page 201.
(Call) to make the call.
Manual Pause Dialing
(Menu) to display the dialer sub-menu.
3. Tap Add 2-sec pause to add a two second pause, and
use the keypad to enter the additional numbers.
Tip: You can create pauses longer than two seconds by
entering multiple two second pauses.
Call Functions
49
4. Select Add wait to add a wait. A wait will pause the
calling sequence until you enter a number or press a
key.
(Call) to make the call.
5. Tap
For more information, refer to “Adding Pauses to Contact
Numbers” on page 69.
Correcting an Entered Number
Use the following steps to correct a mis-typed entry when
dialing.
After entering a number using the keypad:
• If you make a mistake, tap
to erase a single character.
• Press and hold
Ending a Call
50
Tap
(End Call).
to erase the entire string of numbers.
Dialing a Recent Number
All incoming, outgoing and missed calls are recorded in the
Call log. If the number or caller is listed in your Address
Book, the associated name is also displayed.
1. From the Home screen, tap
(Phone).
2. Tap
(Logs tab).
A list of recent calls is displayed.
3. Tap the desired Contact to enter the Details page,
then tap
to make a call.
Making Emergency Calls
Making an Emergency Call with a SIM card
If you do not have a SIM card installed the first time you turn
on the phone, the Insert SIM card to make calls message
displays and an animated tutorial shows you how to install
the SIM card.
The Emergency calling mode makes redialing an emergency
number a 1-tap process. Before you can resume normal
calling operations, you should first exit this mode.
1. From the Home screen, tap
(Phone).
Without a SIM card, you can only make an emergency call
with the phone; normal cell phone service is not available.
Making an Emergency Call without a SIM card
1. Tap Emergency call from the on-screen display to make
an emergency call.
2. Enter the emergency number (example: 911) and then
(Call).
tap
(Call). Complete your call.
2. Enter 9-1-1 and tap
During this type of call, you will have access to the
Speaker mode, Keypad, and End Call features.
3. Tap
3. Complete your call. During this type of call, you will
have access to the Speaker mode, Keypad, and End
Call features.
Note: This mode can drain your battery power more rapidly
than normal calling mode.
(End Call) to exit this calling mode.
Call Functions
51
Dialing Options
From the Home screen and Application menus, you have the
option to access the Dialer and initiate a call by tapping
(Phone) ➔ Keypad. From the Dialer and the Contacts
screen, the following tabs are located at the top of your
screen:
• Keypad: dials the current number entered using the on-screen
keypad.
• Logs: displays a list of all dialed, received, and missed calls.
• Favorites: displays your contacts that you have marked as
Favorites.
• Contacts: takes you to your Address Book where you can select a
contact to call.
After you begin to enter numbers, the Add to contacts option
appears so you can save the Contact if needed.
From the keypad screen, use one of the following options:
• Voicemail (
• Call (
• Delete (
52
) to access your Voicemail service.
) to call the entered number.
) to delete digits from the current number.
To view additional dialing options:
After entering a number, tap
(Menu):
• Send message to send the current caller a text message while
still maintaining the current call active.
• Add to contacts to add the current number to either a new or
existing Contacts entry.
• Speed dial setting to access the Speed dialing setting menu
where you can assign a speed dial location to a current
Contacts entry.
• Add 2-sec pause to insert a two-second pause to enter a
2-second delay within a number string (the phone continues
dialing after 2 seconds without any additional keys being
pressed.
Tip: You can create pauses longer than two seconds by
entering multiple 2 second pauses.
• Add wait to insert a hard pause within the number string (the
phone waits for your input). A wait requires that any
consecutive numbers be manually sent by tapping Yes.
• One-handed operation on/off to enable or disable the
resize and reposition the keypad/dialer for either left (off) or
right handed operation (on).
• Call settings to provide you access to the Call settings screen.
Making a Call Using Speed Dial
You can assign a short cut number to a phone number in your
Contacts List for speed dialing.
1. From the Home screen, tap
(Contacts) to display
your Contacts List.
5. To remove a speed dial number or change the order,
(Menu) to display the Speed dial setting subpress
menu.
6. Tap Change order or Remove.
To make a call using Speed Dial:
1. Tap
(Phone) ➔ Keypad.
2. From the Dialer, touch and hold the speed dial number.
If the speed dial number is more than 1 digit long,
enter the first digits, then hold the last digit.
(Menu) ➔ Speed dial setting. The Speed dial
2. Press
setting screen displays showing the numbers 1 through
100. The number 1 is reserved for Voicemail.
3. Tap an unused number and the Select contact screen
displays.
4. Tap a contact to assign to the number. The selected
contact number will display in the speed dial number
box.
Call Functions
53
Changing a Speed Dial Entry Order
1. From the Home screen, tap
2. Press
(Phone) ➔ Keypad tab.
(Menu) and then tap Speed dial setting.
Important! The number 1 is reserved for Voicemail and
another number cannot be assigned to this slot.
3. Press
(Menu) and then tap Change order.
4. Tap the current entry then tap the new target speed
dial location.
Note: Tapping 2 existing speed dial locations causes the
entries to switch positions.
5. Tap Done. to store the change.
6. Press
54
(Back) to return to the previous screen.
Removing a Speed Dial Entry
1. From the Home screen, tap
2. Press
(Phone) ➔ Keypad tab.
(Menu) and then tap Speed dial setting.
3. Touch and hold a existing on-screen speed dial
location and select Remove from the context menu.
– or –
Press
and select
(Menu) and then tap Remove. Tap an entry
(Remove entry). Select either Done
(to complete the deletion) or Cancel (to exit).
4. Press
(Back) to return to the previous screen.
Making a Call from the Address Book
You can store phone numbers that you use regularly on the
SIM card or in the phone’s memory. These entries are
collectively called the Address Book.
Answering a Call
When a call is received the phone rings and displays the
caller’s phone number, or name if stored in the Address
Book.
1. At the incoming call screen:
• Touch and drag
in any direction to answer the call.
• Touch and drag
in any direction to reject the call
and send it to your voicemail.
• Touch and drag the Reject call with message tab upward and
tap a predefined text message to send to the caller.
2. Tap
(End Call) to end the call.
Note: You can answer a call while using the Address Book or
other menu feature. After ending the call, the phone
returns to the previously active function screen.
Call Log
The phone stores the numbers of the calls you’ve dialed,
received, or missed in the Call log. The Call log displays the
details of the call.
1. From the Home screen, tap
(Phone).
2. Tap
(Logs tab).
A list of recent calls is displayed. If the number or caller
is listed in your Address Book, the associated name is
displayed.
– I’m driving
– I’m at the movie theater
– I’m in class
– I’m in a meeting
– Sorry, I’m busy. Call back later.
– or –
– Tap Create new message to compose a new message.
Call Functions
55
All calls made, received, and missed are listed. Types of calls
are identified by the following icons:
• Incoming Calls:
(Phone) ➔
(Logs
2. Tap the call you want to save to your Address Book.
• Missed Calls:
3. The call detail page is displayed. Tap Create contact to
add the call to your Address Book.
• Rejected Calls:
The Create contact screen is displayed.
• Auto Rejected Calls:
– or –
If you want to replace the number for an existing
contact, tap Update existing.
Calling Back a Missed Call
(Phone) ➔
(Logs
A list of recent calls is displayed. If the number or caller
is listed in your Address Book, the associated name is
displayed.
2. Swipe the desired missed call to the right to call.
– or –
Swipe the desired missed call to the left to message.
56
1. From the Home screen, tap
tab).
A list of recent calls is displayed.
• Outgoing Calls:
To call back a missed call number:
1. From the Home screen, tap
tab).
Saving a Recent Call to your Address Book
Call the number
Add as new
contact
Update an existing
contact
Send a message
To access additional menu options:
Press
(Menu) and select an available option:
• Copy to dialing screen to pass the current number to your
dialer and then edit the selected number before you place your
next outbound call.
• Delete to delete the Contacts entry.
• Send number to send the current Contacts entry information to
an external recipient.
• Add to reject list to add the current phone number to an
automatic rejection list. Similar to a block list, the selected caller
will be blocked from making an incoming calls to your phone.
4. Enter information into the various fields using the
keypad.
5. Tap Save to save when you are finished.
For further details about the Address Book feature, see
“Adding a New Contact” on page 67.
Call Functions
57
Sending a Message to a Recent Call
Adding a Call to the Reject List
1. From the Home screen, tap
(Phone) ➔
tab). A list of recent calls is displayed.
(Logs
2. Swipe the entry you want to message to the left.
3. At the Message screen, tap the empty text field and
use the on-screen keypad to type in a message.
4. When you are done with your message, tap
to send.
(Send)
For more information, refer to “Creating and Sending
Messages” on page 82.
Deleting a Call from the Call Log
1. From the Home screen, tap
(Phone) ➔
tab). A list of recent calls is displayed.
4. At the Delete log prompt, tap Delete.
The call is deleted from the Call log.
58
(Logs
2. Touch and hold the call you want to add to the Reject
List.
3. Tap Add to reject list.
4. At the Add to reject list prompt, tap OK.
Future calls from this number will be rejected and sent
to your voicemail.
Call Duration
1. From the Home screen, tap
(Logs
2. Touch and hold the call you want to delete from the Call
log.
3. Tap Delete.
1. From the Home screen, tap
(Phone) ➔
tab). A list of recent calls is displayed.
2. Press
➔ Logs
.
(Menu) ➔ Call duration.
3. The following times are displayed for Voice and Data:
• Last call: shows the length of time for the last call.
• Dialed calls: shows the total length of time for all calls made.
• Received calls: shows the total length of time for all calls
received.
• All calls: shows the total length of time for all calls made and
received.
4. You may reset these times to zero by pressing
(Menu) then tapping Reset.
Options During a Call
Your phone provides a number of control functions that you
can use during a call.
Personalized
call sound
Call duration
Places a
call on hold
Dialer
Background
Noise
Reduction
Adds a
new call
Activates or
Deactivates
speakerphone
Extra volume
Ends the
call
Mutes or Unmutes
the call
Activates or
Deactivates
Bluetooth
Headset
Adjusting the Call Volume
During a call, to adjust the volume, use the Volume keys on
the left side of the phone.
Press the Up volume key to increase the volume level
and press the Down volume key to decrease the
volume level.
– or –
Quickly add more volume to the incoming audio by
tapping
( Extra volume).
From the Home screen, you can also adjust the ringer volume
using these same keys.
In-Call Options
During an active call there are several functions available by
tapping a corresponding on-screen button.
• Hold: place the current active call on hold.
• Add call: displays the dialer so you can call another person.
• Keypad: displays the on-screen keypad, where you can
enter number using DTMF (Dual Tone Multi-Frequency).
Note: Noise reduction and Extra volume features are disabled
while using Wi-Fi Calling.
• End call: terminates the call.
• Speaker: routes the phone’s audio through either the speaker or
through the earpiece.
Call Functions
59
– Tap Speaker to route the audio through the speaker. (You can
adjust the speaker volume using the volume keys.) A green line
will appear under the Speaker button.
– Tap Speaker again to use the phone’s earpiece (see “Using
the Speakerphone” on page 63). The green line will
disappear when Speaker is not activated.
• Mute/Unmute turn the onboard microphone either on or off.
– Tap Mute during a call to mute the microphone. A green line
will appear under the Mute button.
– Tap Mute again to unmute the microphone. The green line will
disappear when Mute is not activated.
• Headset connects to a Bluetooth headset.
– Tap Headset during a call to activate a Bluetooth headset. A
green line will appear under the Headset button.
– Tap Headset again to de-activate the Bluetooth headset. The
green line will disappear when the Headset is not activated.
More In-call Options
During a call you can save the current caller’s information to
the Contacts list, or create a Memo.
Press
(Menu) and then select an available in-call
option:
• Contacts: During a call you can look up a number in the
Contacts list. Browse the Contacts list for the information you
need.
• Memo: During a call it may be necessary to create a new
memo via an available pop up screen.
• Message: During a call you can create a message.
– Tap Message ➔
(Compose).
– Address and create the message.
– Review your message and tap
(Send).
• One-handed operation on/off to enable or disable the
resize and reposition the keypad/dialer for either left (off) or
right handed operation (on). For more information, refer to
“One-handed operation” on page 210.
60
Personalizing the Call Sound Setting
During a call it may be necessary to adjust the sound of the
incoming call by selecting an audio equalizer setting for the
current call.
1. From the call screen, tap
(Personalize call sound).
2. Confirm the option is enabled
.
3. Select an available option. Choose from: Off, Soft
sound, Clear sound, Adapt Sound left, or Adapt Sound
right.
Activating Noise Reduction
During a call it may be necessary to activate the noise
reduction feature. Activating this feature can improve the
quality of your conversation by reducing ambient noise.
Noise reduction in on by default.
1. Press
to turn Noise reduction off.
2. Press
to turn Noise reduction on.
Placing a Call on Hold
You can place the current call on hold at any point during a
conversation. You can also make another call while you have
a call in progress if your network supports this service.
Hold (Hold). This action places
1. While on a call, tap
the current caller on hold.
2. You can later reactivate this call by tapping
(Unhold).
Unhold
To make a new call while you have a call in progress:
Hold (Hold).
1. Tap
2. Tap
(Add call) to display the dialer.
3. Enter the new number and tap
.
Once connected, the active call will appear in a large
box at the top of your screen and the call on hold will
appear in a smaller box in the middle of your screen.
To end a call on hold:
1. Tap
(End Call) to disconnect the active call.
2. The call on hold will now become the active call. Tap
(End Call) to end the call.
Call Functions
61
Switching Between Calls
When you have an active call and a call on hold, you may
switch between the two calls, changing the one on hold to
active and placing the other on hold.
1. Tap ( Swap ) (Swap).
The current call (caller #2) is placed on hold and the
previous call on hold (caller #1) is then reactivated so
that you can continue conversing with that person. The
active call will appear in a green box.
2. Tap
(End Call) to end the currently active call.
To end a specific call:
1. Tap Swap until the call you want to end appears in a
green box.
2. Tap
(End Call) to end the specific call.
3. Tap
(End Call) to end the remaining call.
62
Call Waiting
You can answer another call while you have a call in progress
if you have activated your Call waiting feature. Otherwise, the
other call will go to your Voicemail box. For more information,
refer to “Additional settings” on page 200.
1. Tap
and slide to the right to answer another call.
2. Tap Putting "Name/Number" on hold to put the first call
on hold.
– or –
Tap Ending call with "Name/Number" to end the first
call.
3. To switch between the two calls, tap ( Swap ) (Swap).
• Swap: Places the current call on hold and then activates the
previous call. The active call will appear in a green box. Tap
Swap again to switch back.
3-Way Calling (Multi-Party Calling)
The 3-Way or Multi-Party feature allows you to answer a
series of incoming calls and place them on hold. If this
service is supported by the network, all calls can be joined
together. You are notified of an incoming call by a call waiting
tone.
Note: The Merge option combines all of the calls you have
established with your phone (both active and on hold).
Swap places the current call on hold and then activates
the previous call.
This feature joins all of the calls you have established with
your phone (both active and on hold) into a multi-party call.
1. From the Home screen, tap
(Phone) and use the
on-screen keypad to enter the number you wish to dial.
2. Tap
(Call) to make the call.
3. Once connected, tap Add call, enter the second phone
(Call). The first caller is placed
number and tap
on hold.
4. Wait for the second caller to answer the incoming call
(Merge). The two calls are now joined
and tap
into a multi-party call and display in the order in which
they were called.
Merge
5. To temporarily leave the conference call, tap
(Hold).
6. To rejoin the conference call tap
Unhold
Hold
(Unhold).
(End Call) to end the call.
7. Tap
Using the Speakerphone
While in an active call, it is possible to enable the
speakerphone feature.
1. Tap
(Speaker).
Speaker
The Speaker button now appears as
speakerphone is activated.
Speaker
and the
2. Use the Volume keys (located on the left side of your
phone) to adjust the volume.
3. To deactivate the speakerphone, tap
Speaker
(Speaker).
Important! For more information, refer to “Responsible
Listening” on page 247.
Call Functions
63
Switching off the Microphone (Mute)
You can temporarily switch your phone’s microphone off, so
that the other person cannot hear you.
Example: You wish to say something to person in the room,
but do not want the person on the phone to hear
you.
Bluetooth Headset
1. Tap
Headset
(Headset).
2. The phone will scan for your Bluetooth headset. When
found, connect to the headset.
The Headset button now appears as
Bluetooth headset is activated.
Headset
and the
3. Tap
(Headset) to deactivate the Bluetooth
headset and reactivate the phone speaker.
Headset
To mute your phone during a call:
1. Tap
(Mute).
Mute
The Mute button now appears as
activated.
Mute
and Mute is
2. Tap
(Mute) to deactivate the Mute function and
reactivate the microphone.
Mute
64
Searching for a Number in Address Book
1. During the active call, press
Contacts.
(Menu) then tap
2. Tap the Address Book entry.
For further details about the Address Book feature, see
“Finding an Address Book Entry” on page 70.
Call Settings
To access the Call settings menu:
From the Home screen, tap
➔ Call settings.
– or –
(Phone) ➔
(Menu)
From the Home screen, tap
(Apps) ➔ Settings ➔
(My device tab) ➔ Call.
My device
For detailed information on all of the call settings, see “Call
Settings” on page 198.
Call Functions
65
Section 4: Contacts and Your Address Book
This section explains how to use and manage your Contacts
List. You can save phone numbers to your phone’s memory.
Accounts
From the Accounts menu you decide if you want applications
to synchronize, send, and receive data at any given time, or if
you want the applications to synchronize automatically. After
determining how you want the accounts to synchronize,
indicate which account to synchronize with your Contacts
list.
1. Sign in to your Google account.
2. From the Home screen, press
(Menu) and then tap
Settings ➔
(Accounts tab) then navigate to the
My accounts area.
Note: The Accounts area lists those accounts that have been
added to the device and provides an Add account button
to quickly and easily add new ones.
66
Contacts List
Tabs
Search
Contacts
field
Contacts
Create
Contacts
Tabbed
Navigation
Adding a New Contact
The default storage location for saving phone numbers to
your Contacts List is your device’s built-in memory.
If existing Google and Corporate email accounts have been
synchronized to your phone, these will be made available to
your device during the creation of new entries. These new
Contacts entries can be assigned or saved to synced
accounts such as Phone, SIM, Google, or Corporate.
Your device automatically sorts the Contacts entries
alphabetically. You can create either a Device, SIM, Samsung
account, Google, or Microsoft Exchange ActiveSync contact.
Important! The Google and Microsoft Exchange ActiveSync
account types are only visible after creating an
email account of those types on your phone.
• Device contacts are stored locally on the device.
Note: If the phone is ever reset to its factory default
parameters, contacts stored on the phone can be lost.
• SIM contacts are stored within the micro SIM Card.
Note: SIM contacts only store the Name and Phone number for
an entry.
• Samsung account contacts are shared with your existing
Samsung account.
• Google contacts are shared with your existing Google account
and can also be imported to your phone after you have created a
Google Mail account.
• Microsoft Exchange ActiveSync (also known as Work or
Outlook) contacts are those contacts that are intended to be
shared with either an Exchange Server or from within Microsoft®
Outlook®.
• Add new account lets you create a new account type. Choose
from Samsung account, Google, or Microsoft Exchange
ActiveSync.
Note: When storing an entry into your micro SIM card, note
that only the Name, and Number are saved. To save
additional information for a particular contact, such as
notes, email, dates, etc., it is important to save that
Contact into your phone’s onboard memory.
Contacts and Your Address Book
67
Saving a Number from the Home screen
1. From the Home screen, tap
(Contacts) ➔
.
Note: You can also add a new contact by entering a number
from the keypad and pressing
and then tap
Add to contacts ➔ Create contact. Continue with step 2
2. At the Save contact to prompt, tap on Device, SIM, or
Account name.
3. Tap the image icon and assign a picture to the new
entry by choosing one of three options:
• Image: retrieve a previously stored image from your Gallery or
from your My files folder and assign it to this entry. Tap an
image to assign the image to the contact, then tap Done.
• Pictures by people: retrieve a previously shared image from
your Gallery.
• Take picture: use the camera to take a new picture and assign
it to this entry, then tap Done.
• S Memo: use an image from one of your S Memos.
• Remove: although not an option with a new entry, deletes any
previously assigned image on an existing contact.
68
4. Tap the Name field and use the on-screen keypad to
enter the full name. For more information, refer to
“Entering Text” on page 42.
– or –
Tap
next to the Name field to display additional
name fields.
5. Tap the Phone number field.
The numerical keypad is displayed.
The Mobile button 0RELOH initially displays next to the
Phone number field. If you want to add a phone number
that is not a mobile number, tap the Mobile button and
select another phone number type.
6. Enter the phone number.
to add another Phone number field or tap
Tap
to delete a field.
7. Tap the Email address field.
The keyboard is displayed.
The Home button +RPH initially displays next to the
Email field. If you want to add an Email address that is
not a Home email address, tap the Home button and
select another Email address type.
8. Enter the Email address.
to add another Email address field or tap
Tap
to delete a field.
9. Tap any of the following fields that you want to add to
your new contact:
• Groups: assign the contact to Not assigned, ICE - emergency
contacts, Co-workers, Family, or Friends.
10. Tap Save to save the new contact.
Adding Pauses to Contact Numbers
When you call automated systems, you are often required to
enter a password or account number. Instead of manually
entering the numbers each time, you can store the numbers
in your Contacts along with special characters called pauses
and waits. A pause will stop the calling sequence for two
seconds and a wait will pause the calling sequence until you
enter a number or press a key.
To add a pause or a wait to an existing Contact:
1. From the Home screen, tap
(Contacts), and then
tap the name or number to open the Contact.
2. Tap
to edit.
3. Tap the phone number field.
• Ringtone: adds a field used to assign a message tone that will
sound when messages are received from this contact.
4. Tap the screen at the position where the pause or wait
needs to be added.
• Message alert: allows you to set the ringtone for your
message alerts.
5. Tap
• Vibration pattern: allows you to set the specific type of
vibration.
• Add another field: tap this button to add additional fields.
.
6. Tap Pause(,) to add a two-second pause or tap Wait(;)
to add a wait, and use the keypad to enter the
additional numbers. A pause will be displayed as a
comma (,) and a wait will be displayed as a semi-colon
(;).
Contacts and Your Address Book
69
7. Tap Save to save your changes, or tap Cancel to
discard.
Editing an Existing Contact
When editing an existing contact, you can tap a field and
change or delete the information, or you can add additional
fields to the contact’s list of information.
1. From the Home screen, tap
(Contacts).
2. Press and hold the Contact that you want to edit.
3. Tap Edit.
4. Tap any of the fields to add, change, or delete
information.
5. Tap Save to save the edited information.
Using Contacts
Dialing or Messaging from Address Book
Once you have stored phone numbers in the Address Book,
you can dial them easily and quickly by either using their SIM
card location number or by using the Search field to locate
the entry.
From the Address book, you can also send messages.
Finding an Address Book Entry
You can store phone numbers and their corresponding
names onto your SIM card and phone’s onboard memory.
The two locations are physically separate but are used as a
single entity, called the Address Book.
Depending on your particular SIM card, the maximum
number of phone numbers the SIM card can store and how
they are stored may differ.
1. From the Home screen, tap
(Contacts).
2. Within the Contacts list (sorted alphabetically), tap a
letter on the right side of the display to quickly jump to
the contacts beginning with that letter.
3. Tap the contact you wish to call or message.
70
4. Tap the phone icon to make a phone call or tap the
message icon to send a message.
Linking Contacts
Linking Contact Information
Many people now maintain multiple email accounts, social
networking logins, and other similar account information. For
example, a Facebook account login name might differ from a
corporate email account login because they are maintained
separately and for different groups of people.
This device can synchronize with multiple accounts such as
Facebook, Twitter, Corporate email, and Google. When you
synchronize your phone with these accounts, each account
creates a separate contact entry in the Contacts list.
For more information, refer to “Creating and Sending
Messages” on page 82.
Tip: From the Contact list, sweep right over a listing to make a
call. Sweep left over a listing to send a message.
If one of your contacts (Amy Smith, for example) has a
regular email account that you maintain in Gmail, but also
has a Facebook account under her maiden and married
name, as well as a Yahoo! chat account, when you merge
these accounts into your Contacts list you can link all of her
entries and view the information in one record.
The next time you synchronize your phone with your
accounts, any updates that contacts make to email account
names, email addresses, etc. automatically update in your
contacts list.
For more information about synchronizing accounts, see
“Synchronizing Accounts” on page 73.
Contacts and Your Address Book
71
1. From the Home screen, tap
(Contacts).
2. Tap a contact name (the name you want to link to
another entry). Typically this is the same contact with a
different name or account information.
3. Press
(Menu) ➔ Link contact.
The contact list is displayed.
Note: Only contacts stored on your device can be linked.
4. Tap the second contact entry (the entry in which to
link). The second contact is now linked with the first
and the account information is merged into one screen.
Note: The information is still maintained in both entries, but
displays in one record for easier viewing when you link
the contacts.
Important! It is the first contact image that is displayed for
both, and the first contact’s name that is used.
For example: If Amy (original entry) is joined with
Julie (second entry). Julie seems to disappear and
only Amy remains. Tap the Amy entry (showing the
Amy image) to view both.
5. Tap area under the Connection bar to view the contact
information you linked. The contacts and information
displays with an icon next to the contact name to
indicate what type of account information is contained
in the entry.
Unlinking a Contact
1. From the Home screen, tap
(Contacts).
2. Tap a contact name (the account name from which you
want to unlink an entry).
Note: Typically this is the same contact with a different name
or account information.
3. Tap the link icon
4. Tap
72
under the Connection bar.
next to entry in which you want to unlink.
5. At the Separate contact prompt, tap OK.
The contacts are “unlinked” or separated and no
longer display in the merged record screen. Both
contacts now go back to being separately displayed.
Marking a Contact as Default
When you use messaging type applications, the application
needs to know which information is primary (default) in a
contact entry list. For example, you may have three different
contact records for John Smith, so the application will be
looking for the “default” number or entry.
1. From the Home screen, tap
(Contacts).
2. Tap a Contact name.
3. Press
(Menu) ➔ Mark as default. The Mark as
default screen displays radio buttons next to the
contact names or phone numbers of all the linked
contacts. The radio button next to the default contact
will be green.
4. To change the default contact, tap the radio button next
to another entry that you want to be the default. The
radio button will turn green, then tap Done.
Note: If there are multiple phone numbers assigned to an
entry, assigning one as the default will automatically dial
that number when the contact is selected for dialing.
Synchronizing Accounts
From the Accounts menu you decide if you want applications
to synchronize, send, and receive data at any given time, or if
you want the applications to synchronize automatically. After
determining how you want the accounts to synchronize,
indicate which account to synchronize with your Contacts
list.
1. From the Home screen, tap
➔ Settings ➔
(Accounts tab) and then navigate to the My accounts
area.
2. Select the email account containing the contacts you
wish to synchronize.
3. Tap
within the adjacent account field to reveal the
account’s synchronization settings screen.
• If
appears within the adjacent account field, this indicates
a sync error.
Contacts and Your Address Book
73
4. To synchronize only Contacts, toggle the active state of
the Sync Contacts field. A green check mark indicates
the feature is enabled.
Note: The process of updating your Contacts tab can take
several minutes. If after 10-20 minutes, your list has not
been updated, repeat step 2-3.
5. Your Contacts tab then reflects any updated Contact
information. Syncing of contacts requires you are
logged into your Gmail and Corporate accounts via the
device.
Note: You can also synchronize your accounts using the
Accounts option.
74
Address Book Options
You can access Address Book options while at the main
Address Book page or while in the details page for a specific
entry.
Options in Address Book
1. From the Home screen, tap
(Contacts).
2. Press
(Menu). The following options display:
• Delete: allows you to delete 1 or more of your contacts.
• Import/Export: imports or exports contacts to or from the USB
storage location, SIM card, or SD card.
• Share namecard via: allows you send selected namecards via
methods such as Bluetooth, ChatON, Email, Gmail, Messaging,
or Wi-Fi Direct.
• Merge accounts: allows you to merge all of your current
Contact entries with either your active Google or Samsung
account. If several of your contacts are from other external
sources, this allows you to “back them up” or copy them to
your Samsung account. Tap OK to continue or Cancel to exit.
• Accounts: allows you to add and manage mobile accounts on
Samsung account, ChatON, Dropbox, Google, LDAP, or
Microsoft Exchange ActiveSync. This option also allows you to
manually synchronize all of your current contacts with their
respective accounts.
• Speed dial setting: allows you to set up speed-dialing.
– Contact sharing settings: allows you to send all or individual
contacts via Bluetooth in the form of namecards.
• Help: provides an on-screen Help file that covers most high
level topics for Contacts.
Options at Selected Contact Screen
1. From the Home screen, tap
(Contacts).
• Send message/email: allows you to send a text /picture
message or an email using your Google account.
2. Tap a contact and at the contact’s display screen, press
(Menu).
• Contacts to display: allows you to choose to display All
contacts, those on your Device, SIM card, Samsung account,
Gmail, or only display contacts that are part of a Customized
list.
3. The following options are displayed:
• History: allows you to view the phone and message history for
the contact.
• Settings: allows you to choose set the following options:
– Only contacts with phones: allows you to only display
contacts that have phone numbers.
– List by: allows you to sort by First name or Last name.
– Display contacts by: allows you to sort by First name or Last
name first.
– Service numbers: allows you to display or edit your service
numbers.
• Edit: allows you to change the contact’s information. For more
information, refer to “Editing an Existing Contact” on
page 70.
• Delete: allows you to delete the contact from your Address
Book.
• Link contact: allows you to link contacts with other contacts
(only displays when contact is saved to SIM).
• Separate contact: allows you to separate contacts that have
been linked. This option only appears if the contact has been
linked.
Contacts and Your Address Book
75
• Mark as default: when you have multiple contacts linked
together, you can mark one of them as default (only displays
when contact is saved to the phone). For more information,
refer to “Marking a Contact as Default” on page 73.
• Share namecard via: allows you to send the contact’s
information via Bluetooth, ChatON, Email, Gmail, Messaging, or
Wi-Fi Direct.
• Add to/Remove from reject list: allows you to add or remove
the contact from your reject list. If they call while being on the
reject list, the call will be sent directly to voice mail.
• Add shortcut to home: allows you to place a shortcut for this
contact on your Home screen.
Groups
Adding a Contact to a Group
1. From the Home screen, tap
(Contacts).
2. Press and hold a contact that you would like to add to a
group.
3. Tap Add to group.
4. Tap a group entry.
5. Tap Save. The contact is added to the group.
Removing a Contact From a Group
1. From the Home screen, tap
(Groups).
(Contacts) ➔
Groups
2. Tap a group entry.
3. Press
(Menu) ➔ Remove member.
4. Tap all of the contacts you want to remove from this
group. A green checkmark will appear next to their
name.
5. Tap Done. The contacts are now removed from the
group.
76
Creating a New Group
1. From the Home screen, tap
(Contacts) ➔
(Menu) ➔ Create.
(Groups) ➔
8. Tap Done.
Groups
2. Tap the Group name field and use the on-screen
keypad to enter a new group name. For more
information, refer to “Entering Text” on page 42.
3. Tap Group ringtone to choose a ringtone for assignment
to this new group. Tap a ringtone to hear how it
sounds, then tap OK.
– or –
Tap Add to select a ringtone from your music files.
9. Tap Save to save the new Group category.
Editing a Caller Group
To edit a Group entry, there must be at least one member as
part of the selected group.
(Contacts) ➔
1. From the Home screen, tap
(Groups).
Groups
2. Tap a group entry.
3. Press
(Menu) ➔ Edit.
4. Make modifications to the Group name, Group ringtone,
Message alert, or Vibration pattern fields.
4. Tap Message alert to choose an alert tone for
assignment to this new group, then tap OK.
5. Tap Add member to add more contacts to this group.
5. Tap Vibration pattern to choose a vibration audio file for
assignment to this new group, then tap OK.
– or –
7. Tap Save to save the edited Group category.
6. Tap Done.
Tap Create and follow the on-screen instructions to
create your own vibration pattern.
6. Tap Add member to add contacts to the new group.
7. Tap each contact you want to add to create a
checkmark. You can also tap Select all.
Contacts and Your Address Book
77
Address Book Favorites
Once you have stored phone numbers in the Address Book,
you can add them to your Favorites list.
To view your Favorites list:
From the Home screen, tap
(Favorites).
(Contacts) ➔
(Contacts).
2. Within the Contacts list, touch and hold a contact that
you want to add to your favorites list.
3. Tap Add to favorites on the displayed list.
4. A gold star will appear next to the contact in the
Address Book.
Removing Favorites from your Address Book
1. From the Home screen, tap
(Contacts).
2. Within the Contacts list, touch and hold a contact that
you want to remove from your favorites list. Contacts in
your Favorites list will have a gold star.
3. Tap Remove from favorites on the displayed list.
78
Managing Address Book Contacts
You can copy, delete, and view the memory status for the
Phone and SIM contacts on your phone.
Favorites
Adding Favorites to your Address Book
1. From the Home screen, tap
4. The gold star will no longer appear next to the contact
in the Address Book.
Copying Contacts to the SIM Card
Note: When storing an Address Book entry into the SIM card,
only the name, phone number, and email address are
available as fields. Also, if you move the SIM card to
another phone that does not support additional fields on
the SIM card, this additional information may not be
available.
1. From the Home screen, tap
(Menu) ➔ Import/Export.
(Contacts) ➔
2. Tap Export to SIM card.
The phone then displays a list of your current phone
contacts.
3. Tap the contacts to place a checkmark adjacent to
those entries you wish to have copied to the SIM card.
• Repeat this step for all individual entries you wish copied to the
SIM or tap Select all to place a checkmark alongside all
entries.
4. Tap Done to copy.
5. At the Copy to SIM display, tap OK.
The selected numbers are copied to the SIM card.
Deleting Contacts from the SIM card
1. From the Home screen, tap
4. Tap the contacts to place a checkmark adjacent to
those entries you wish to have copied to your phone.
• Repeat this step for all individual entries you wish copied to
your phone or tap Select all to place a checkmark alongside all
entries.
5. Tap Done to copy.
The selected numbers are copied.
(Contacts).
2. Touch and hold the desired contact and select Delete.
3. At the Delete contact prompt, tap OK.
The selected numbers are deleted from the SIM card.
Copying Contacts to the Phone
1. From the Home screen, tap
(Menu) ➔ Import/Export
(Contacts) ➔
2. Tap Import from SIM.
3. At the Save contact to prompt, tap on Device or an
account name that you would like to copy the contact
to.
The phone then displays a list of your current contacts
stored on your SIM card.
Contacts and Your Address Book
79
Deleting Address Book Entries from the Phone
You can delete Phone or SIM entries from your phone’s
memory.
1. From the Home screen, tap
(Contacts).
2. Within the Contacts list, touch and hold a contact that
you want to delete.
3. Tap Delete on the displayed list.
4. At the Delete contact prompt, tap OK to delete the
contact or Cancel to exit.
Copying Contact Information to the microSD
Card
This procedure allows you to copy entry information saved
on the phone’s memory, onto the SD card.
1. From the Home screen, tap
(Contacts).
2. From the Contacts List, press
(Menu) and then tap
Import/Export ➔ Export to SD card.
3. Tap OK to choose all current phone contact entries.
80
Using the Service Dialing Numbers
You can view the list of Service Dialing Numbers (SDN)
assigned by your service provider. These numbers may
include emergency numbers, customer service numbers, and
directory inquiries.
1. From the Home screen, tap
(Contacts) ➔
(Menu) ➔ Settings.
2. Tap Service numbers.
3. Scroll through the available numbers (if available).
4. Tap a number and the call is made.
Note: This menu is available only when your SIM card
supports Service Dialing Numbers.
Section 5: Messaging
This section describes how to send and receive different
types of messages. It also includes the features and
functionality associated with messaging.
Types of Messages
Your phone provides the following message types:
• Text Messages
• Multimedia (Picture, Video, and Audio) Messages
• Email and Gmail Messages
• Messages
• Hangouts (replaces Google Talk)
• Google+ and Messenger Messages
• ChatON
The Short Message Service (SMS) lets you send and receive
text messages to and from other mobile phones or email
addresses. To use this feature, you may need to subscribe to
your service provider’s message service.
The Multimedia Messaging Service (MMS) lets you send and
receive multimedia messages (such as picture, video, and
audio messages) to and from other mobile phones or email
addresses. To use this feature, you may need to subscribe to
your service provider’s multimedia message service.
Important! When creating a message, adding an image, a
sound file, or a video clip to a text message
changes the message from a text message to a
multimedia message.
Messaging icons are displayed at the top of the screen and
indicate when messages are received and their type. For
more information, refer to “Indicator Icons” on page 21.
Note: The Messages application can also be accessed from
the Home screen by pressing
and then tapping
(Apps) ➔
(Messaging).
Messaging
81
Creating and Sending Messages
1. From the main Home screen, tap
(Compose).
(Messaging) ➔
2. Tap on the Enter recipient field to manually enter a
recipient.
– or –
Tap
to select from one of the following:
• Groups: to select a recipient from the Group list.
• Favorites: to select a recipient from the Favorites list.
• Contacts: to select a recipient from your Contacts list (valid
entries must have a wireless phone number or email address).
• Logs: to select a recipient from a list of recently sent
messages.
3. If adding a recipient from your Contacts, tap the
contact to place a checkmark then tap Done.
The contact will be placed in the recipient field.
Note: Delete any unnecessary members by tapping their
name/number in the recipient area and selecting Delete.
82
Note: For the Groups option, if the number of recipients is less
than 10, all members in the group will be added. You will
need to delete any unnecessary members in the list by
selecting the trash can icon and deleting unwanted
entries.
Note: Enter additional recipients by separating each entry with
a semicolon (;) then using the previous procedure.
4. Tap the Enter message field and use the on-screen
keypad to enter a message. For more information, refer
to “Entering Text” on page 42.
5. Add more recipients by tapping the recipient field.
6. Review your message and tap
(Send).
Note: If you exit a message before you send it, it will be
automatically saved as a draft.
Message Options
Options before composing a message
1. From the main Home screen, tap
(Messaging).
2. From the main Messaging menu (before composing a
message), press
(Menu) to reveal additional
messaging options:
• Search: allows you to search through all of your messages for
a certain word or string of words. Enter a search string in the
Messaging Search window then tap
on the keyboard.
• Delete threads: allows you to delete any message thread.
Select the messages to delete and a green checkmark will
appear next to the message. Tap Delete.
• Text templates: displays your available text message reply
templates. For more information, refer to “Text Templates”
on page 93.
• Settings: allows you to access Messaging settings. For more
information, refer to “Messaging Settings” on page 88.
Options while composing a message
(Messaging).
1. From the main Home screen, tap
2. From within an open message, press
reveal additional messaging options.
(Menu) to
Note: Available options will slightly differ between new
messages and messages composed within a thread.
• Draft messages: displays the draft messages folder and its
contents.
• Insert smiley: allows you to add insert smiley icons
images (emoticons).
• Locked messages: displays the locked messages folder and
its contents.
• Add text: allows you to copy text from your contacts, calendar,
or from a memo to add to your message. This is a convenient
feature for adding names, phone numbers, events, etc. to your
message. For more information, refer to “Adding
Additional Text” on page 85.
• Scheduled messages: displays the scheduled messages
folder and its contents.
• Spam messages: displays the spam messages folder and its
contents. For more information, refer to “Accessing Your
Spam Folder” on page 93.
• Preview (only in MMS): allows you to add preview the
MMS message prior to delivery.
Messaging
83
• Add to Contacts: allows you to add the recipient to your
Contacts list. This option only appears if the recipient is not
already in your Contacts list.
• Remove from spam numbers allows you to unregister a
number from the spam number list. This option only appears if
the number was previously registered as spam.
• View contact: allows you to see information on the recipient.
This option only appears if the recipient is in your Contacts list.
• Discard: allows you to delete the current message.
• Add slide: allows you to add a new page to a message.
• Remove slide: allows you to remove a recently added page
from a message.
• Add subject: allows you to enter a subject.
• Duration (5 secs) (only in MMS): allows you to change the
duration of the image slideshow.
• Layout (bottom) (only in MMS): allows you to change the
layout.
• Add recipients: allows you to enter additional recipients to the
message.
• Scheduling: allows you to assign the current message for
scheduled delivery at a designated time.
• Add to spam numbers: allows you to tag a number as spam
so that these messages can be directly delivered to your spam
folder.
84
Note: You must be logged into your Samsung account prior to
using the S Translator feature.
• Translate: launches a Translate popup menu. Here you can
both assign the sender’s original language and assign a target
language for the recipient (they will receive your message in the
designated language).
– Enable the translate feature then configure the available options
as desired. Tap OK to store the new settings.
Adding attachments to a message
To add an attachment to your message, tap
and select
one of the following options:
• Image: allows you to tap an existing image from your Gallery or
Samsung Link and add it to your message.
• Take a picture: allows you to temporarily exit the message, take
a photo with phone’s camera, and then add it to your message by
tapping Save.
• Video: allows you to choose an existing video from the Videos list,
then add it to your message.
• Record video: allows you to temporarily exit the message,
record a video clip using the phone’s camera, and then add it
to your message by tapping Save.
• Audio: allows you to choose an existing audio file from the
Audio list, then add it to your message by tapping the circle to
the right of the audio so that it turns green, then tapping Done.
• Record audio: allows you to temporarily exit the message and
record an audio clip using the phone’s microphone. It is then
automatically attached to the message.
• Calendar: allows you to add an event from your calendar. Select
the desired event and tap Done.
• Location: allows you to attach a thumbnail of a map showing
your location.
• Contacts: allows you to tap on an existing Address Book entry,
then add it to your message by tapping Done.
Adding Additional Text
You can copy text such as names, phone numbers, and
events from your Contacts, Calendar or a Memo.
1. While composing a message, press
(Menu) ➔ Add
text.
2. At the Add text screen, select one of the following:
• S Memo: allows you to insert text from an existing S Memo.
• Calendar: allows you to add the name, date, and time of a
calendar event to your message.
• Location: allows you to add an address and the link to the
location on Google Maps.
• Contacts: allows you to add the name and phone number of
any of your contacts to your message.
• S Memo: allows you to add an S Memo that you have created.
Messaging
85
• Text templates: allows you to add pre-defined phrases and
sentences. For more information, refer to “Text Templates”
on page 93. The information is added to your message.
Viewing New Received Messages
1. When you receive a new message, the new message
icon will appear at the top of your screen.
2. Open the Notification Bar and select the message. For
more information, refer to “Notification Bar” on page
39.
– or –
(Messaging)
From the main Home screen, tap
then tap the new message to view it.
The selected message appears in the display.
.
3. To play a multimedia message, tap
• To pause playback of the multimedia message, tap
Sent and received text and picture messages are grouped
into message threads. Threaded messages allow you to see
all the messages exchanged (similar to a chat program) and
displays a contact on the screen. Message threads are listed
in the order in which they were received, with the latest
message displayed at the top.
To access message thread options:
From the main Messaging screen, touch and hold the
message to display the following options:
• View contact: displays the Contact’s Overview page.
• Add to contacts: Adds a new number to your Contacts list.
This option is only displayed if the number in not already in your
Contacts list.
• Delete thread: deletes the currently selected message thread.
.
4. To scroll through the message (if additional text pages
have been added), touch the screen and in a single
motion, scroll up or down the page.
86
Message Threads
• Add to spam numbers: adds the current sender to a spam list.
ny new texts from this sender are automatically blocked.
To access additional Bubble options:
Touch and hold the message bubble within an active
message conversation to display the following options:
• Delete message: deletes any currently selected message
bubble from the thread.
• Copy message text: copies the currently selected message
bubble from the thread.
• Lock/Unlock message: locks or unlocks the currently selected
message bubble from being accidentally deleted.
• Forward: allows you to forward the currently selected message
bubble to an external recipient.
• Copy to SIM: copies the currently selected message bubble as
a single text message within the SIM card.
• View message details: displays details for the currently
selected message bubble.
Deleting Messages
Deleting a single message thread
1. From the main Home screen, tap
(Messaging).
2. Touch and hold a message, then tap Delete thread.
3. At the Delete prompt, tap OK to delete or Cancel to
cancel.
Deleting multiple message threads
1. From the main Home screen, tap
2. Press
(Messaging).
➔ Delete threads.
3. Tap each message you want to delete. A checkmark
will appear beside each message you select.
4. Tap Delete.
5. At the Delete prompt, tap OK to delete or Cancel to
cancel.
• Translate: translates the text from the currently selected
bubble into a desired language.
Messaging
87
Message Search
You can search through your messages by using the
Message Search feature.
(Messaging).
1. From the main Home screen, tap
2. Tap
(Menu) ➔ Search.
• Multimedia message limit: allows you to set a limit on how
many multimedia messages can be in one conversation.
Text message (SMS) settings
• Delivery reports: when this option is activated, the network
informs you whether or not your message was delivered.
3. Use the on-screen keypad to enter a word or phrase to
.
search for, then tap
• Manage SIM card messages: allows you to manage the
messages stored on the SIM card.
4. All messages that contain the search string you
entered are displayed.
• Message center: allows you to enter the number of your
message center where your messages reside while the system
is attempting to deliver them.
Messaging Settings
To configure the settings for text messages, multimedia
messages, Voice mails, and Push messages.
From the main Home screen, tap
(Menu) ➔ Settings.
(Messaging) ➔
The following Messaging settings are available within the
following available tabs:
General settings
• Delete old messages: deletes old messages when the limit is
reached, rather than having them overwritten.
• Text message limit: allows you to set a limit on how many text
messages can be in one conversation.
88
• Input mode: allows you to set the input mode for your text
messages. Choose from: GSM Alphabet, Unicode, or
Automatic.
Multimedia message (MMS) settings
• Delivery reports: when this option is activated, the network
informs you whether or not your message was delivered.
• Read reports: when this option is activated, your phone
receives a request for a read reply along with your message to
the recipient.
• Auto retrieve: allows the message system to automatically
retrieve messages.
• Roaming auto retrieve: allows the message system to
automatically retrieve while roaming.
• Creation mode: allows you to select the creation mode: Free,
Restricted, or Warning.
– Restricted: you can only create and submit messages with
content belonging to the Core MM Content Domain.
– Warning: the phone will warn you via pop up messages that
you are creating a multimedia message which does not fit the
Core MM Content Domain.
– Free: you may add any content to the message.
• MMS alert: when this option is activated, alerts you when the
messaging modes changes from an SMS (text) to MMS
(multimedia) mode.
Display
• Bubble style: allows you to choose from several bubble styles
for your messages. Bubbles are the rounded boxes that
surround each message.
• Background style: allows you to choose from several
background styles for your messages.
• Split view: when in Landscape mode, allows you to view both
the message list and the contents of the currently selected
message.
• Use the volume key: allows you to change the text size by
using the up or down volume keys.
Push message settings
• Push messages: when this option is activated, allows you to
receive push messages from the network.
• Service loading: allows you to set the type of service loading
notification. Choose from: Always, Prompt, or Never.
Notification settings
• Notifications: when this option is activated, allows you to see
message notifications on your status bar.
• Select ringtone: allows you to set the ringtone for your
message notifications.
• Vibrate: allows you to activate the vibration function associated
with message alerts.
• Message alert repetition: allows you to set the interval for new
message alerts. Choose from: Once, Every 2 minutes, or
Every 10 minutes.
Messaging
89
• Preview message: when enabled, allows you to view a brief
preview of new message text on the Status bar.
Emergency message settings
• Emergency alerts: allows you to configure emergency alert
settings. You can enable/disable those alert categories you
wish to receive. Choose from: Imminent extreme alert,
Imminent severe alert, and AMBER alerts.
Note: The Presidential alert can not be disabled.
• Emergency notification preview: allows you to play a sample
emergency alert tone. Tap Stop to cancel the playback.
Signature settings
• Add signature: when enabled, this feature allows you to create
a signature at the end of your outgoing text messages.
• Signature text: allows you to enter a desired signature for your
message.
Spam message settings
• Spam settings: when enabled, allows you to configure
available spam settings such as:
– Add to spam numbers: allows you to manually enter and
assign a phone number as being sent from a spam source.
90
– Add to spam phrases: allows you to assign a specific text
phrase as belonging to a spam message. Ex: Dear friend.
• Block unknown senders: when active, automatically blocks
incoming messages from unknown sources or blocked numbers.
Emergency Alert Configuration
This phone is designed to receive wireless emergency alerts
from the Commercial Mobile Alerting System (CMAS); which
may also be known as the Personal Localized Alerting
Network (PLAN). If your wireless provider has chosen to
participate in CMAS/PLAN, alerts are available while in the
provider's coverage area. If you travel outside your provider's
coverage area, wireless emergency alerts may not be
available. For more information, please contact your wireless
provider.
Emergency Alerts allows customers to receive
geographically-targeted messages. Alert messages are
provided by the US Department of Homeland Security and
will alert customers of imminent threats to their safety within
their area. There is no charge for receiving an Emergency
Alert message.
There are three types of Emergency Alerts:
• Alerts issued by the President
• Alerts involving imminent threats to safety of life
• AMBER Alerts (missing child alert)
Customers may choose not to receive Extreme Alerts, Severe
Alerts, and AMBER Alerts.
Important! Alerts issued by the President can not be disabled.
Assigning Messages as Spam
You can now assign either a phone number as spam or use a
key term or phrase. Any message assigned as spam is
automatically placed with your Spam messages folder.
To assign a phone number from Messages list as spam:
(Messaging).
1. From the main Home screen, tap
2. Touch and hold a message from a phone number.
3. Select Add to spam numbers and tap OK.
To disable Extreme, Severe, and AMBER Alerts:
1. From the main Home screen, tap
(Messaging).
2. Press
(Menu) ➔ Settings.
3. Scroll to the bottom and tap Emergency alerts.
4. All alerts are enabled by default (checkmark showing).
5. Tap on an alert option to disable the alert and remove
the checkmark.
To assign a phone number manually as spam:
1. From the main Home screen, tap
2. Press
(Messaging).
(Menu) and then tap Settings.
3. Locate and activate the Spam settings option.
• Spam settings: when enabled, allows you to configure
available spam settings.
4. Tap Add to spam numbers ➔
(Add).
• This function allows you to manually enter and assign a phone
number as being sent from a spam source.
Messaging
91
5. Tap the Number field to manually enter phone number.
– or –
Tap
to select from either your existing Logs or
Contacts.
4. Tap Add to spam phrases ➔
(Add).
• This function allows you to assign a specific text phrase as
belonging to a spam message. Ex: Dear friend.
5. Enter a term or word into the field.
6. Tap Save.
– or –
Tap Match criteria and select a parameter that must
match for the spam action to take effect. Choose from:
Same as, Starts with (ex: 800 or 888), Ends with, or
includes.
6. Tap Save.
To register unknown numbers as spam:
Some incoming messages might not be associated with
either a phone number or email address. These incoming
messages contain no information as their info is blocked by
the sender.
1. From the main Home screen, tap
(Messaging).
To register text phrases as spam:
2. Press
Some incoming messages might not be associated with a
phone number but rather an email address. In these cases,
the only way to block those messages, would be assign a
key used term or phrase to activate the Spam block. Ex:
“Dear friend”, “Stock Alert”, or “Act Now”.
1. From the main Home screen, tap
(Messaging).
3. Locate and activate the Spam settings option.
2. Press
(Menu) and then tap Settings.
3. Locate and activate the Spam settings option.
92
(Menu) and then tap Settings.
4. Tap Block unknown senders. A green check mark
indicates the feature is active.
• Block unknown senders: when active, automatically blocks
incoming messages from unknown sources or blocked
numbers.
If an incoming message is designated in coming from an
unknown sender, it is automatically assigned as spam and is
now located in your Spam folder.
Accessing Your Spam Folder
Any message assigned as spam is automatically placed with
your Spam messages folder.
(Messaging).
1. From the main Home screen, tap
2. Press
(Menu) and then tap Spam messages.
Text Templates
To create your own text template:
1. From the main Home screen, tap
2. From the Messaging list, press
tap Text templates.
3. Tap
(Messaging).
(Menu) and then
(Create text template).
4. Enter a new text string and tap Save.
This screen displays your available text message reply
templates. This is a readily accessible list of both default and
user-defined text snippets that can be used to quickly reply
to incoming messages.
1. From the main Home screen, tap
(Messaging).
2. From the Messaging list, press
tap Text templates.
(Menu) and then
3. Tap a message to immediately insert it into your
current message conversation.
Messaging
93
Using Email
Email enables you to review and create email using various
email services. You can also receive text message alerts
when you receive an important email.
There are currently two main types of email accounts on your
phone: Gmail, Internet-based email (Gmail, Yahoo, etc..), and
Microsoft Exchange (Corporate email or Outlook®).
To send and receive email messages through an ISP (Internet
Service Provider) account, or if you wish to use your device
to access your corporate email through a VPN (Virtual Private
Network), you will first need to set up an IMAP or POP
account.
Creating an Internet Email Account
1. From the Home screen, tap
(Email).
Your accounts screen displays with an Email setup
screen displayed.
2. Enter you email address in the Email address field.
3. Enter your password in the Password field.
4. If you want to see your password as it is being typed,
tap Show password to create a checkmark.
5. Tap Next.
6. At the Account options screen, tap any of the options
you would like.
7. Tap Next.
8. Enter a name for this email account (optional).
9. Tap Done.
Creating a Corporate Email Account
Use the following procedure to configure your phone to
synchronize with a corporate email account.
1. From the Home screen, tap
(Email).
Your accounts screen displays with an Email setup
screen displayed.
2. Enter you email address in the Email address field.
3. Enter your password in the Password field.
4. If you want to see your password as it is being typed,
tap Show password to create a checkmark.
5. If you want all of your emails sent from this email
account by default, tap the checkbox to create a
checkmark. This checkbox only appears if you have
previously set up an email account.
6. Tap Manual setup.
7. Tap the Microsoft Exchange ActiveSync field.
94
8. Enter all the Exchange server information, Domain,
User name and Password, then tap Next.
9. At the Activation prompt, tap OK.
The Account options screen is displayed.
10. Enter the desired information in the different fields,
then tap Next.
11. Enter an Account name for this account (Optional) and
tap Done.
Wait for the Inbox to synchronize before use.
12. Press
(Menu) ➔ Settings to change the account
settings.
Creating Additional Email Accounts
To create additional email accounts after setting up your first
account, follow these steps:
(Email).
1. From the Home screen, tap
4. Enter the information required to set up another
account. For more information, refer to “Creating an
Internet Email Account” on page 94.
Switching Between Email Accounts
1. From the Home screen, tap
(Email).
Your Email screen displays showing your emails from
the active account.
2. Tap the Inbox button
at the top of your screen.
Your Email accounts screen is displayed.
3. Tap the Email account Inbox you would like to switch
to. You can also select Combined inbox which will
display email messages from all accounts.
4. The new Email account is displayed.
Your Email screen displays showing your emails from
the active account.
2. Press
(Menu) ➔ Settings.
3. Tap Add account to add another email account.
Messaging
95
Section 6: Pictures and Videos
This section explains features related to the use of the
camera and camcorder on your phone. You can take
photographs and shoot video by using the built-in camera
functionality. Your 8 megapixel camera produces photos in
JPEG format.
Important! Do not take photos of people without their
permission.
Do not take photos in places where cameras are
not allowed.
Do not take photos in places where you may
interfere with another person’s privacy.
Using the Camera
Taking Photos
Taking pictures with your device’s built-in camera is as
simple as choosing a subject, pointing the camera, then
pressing the camera key.
Note: When taking a photo in direct sunlight or in bright
conditions, shadows may appear on the photo.
96
1. From the main Home screen, tap Camera
activate the camera mode.
to
2. Using the phone’s main display screen as a viewfinder,
adjust the image by aiming the camera at the subject.
3. Before you take a picture, use the Up and Down Volume
keys to zoom in or out. You can magnify the picture up
to x4 (400 percent).
– or –
Pinch the screen to zoom out or pinch outwards to
zoom in.
4. If desired, before taking the photo, you can tap
on-screen icons to access various camera options and
settings.
5. You can also tap the screen to move the focus to the
area you touch.
6. Press the Camera key ( ) until the shutter sounds.
(The picture is automatically stored within your
designated storage location. If no microSD is installed,
all pictures are stored on the Phone.)
Camera Modes
Camera Mode
Quick Settings
Front
Facing
Camera
Record
Video
Take
Picture
Change
Mode
Image
Viewer
(Gallery)
Viewfinder
Effects
7. While viewing a picture, after you have taken it, pinch
the screen outwards to zoom in or pinch the screen
inwards to zoom out.
You can magnify the picture up to x4.
8. Press
to return to the viewfinder.
There are many different camera modes that you can use to
help optimize your photos depending on the conditions and
your experience.
From the camera viewfinder, tap the Mode button MODE
to change the mode to one of the following:
– Auto: Automatically adjusts your camera to optimize color and
brightness. This is the default setting
– Beauty face: Use this to take photos with lightened faces for
gentler images.
– Best photo: Use this to take multiple photos in a short time,
and then choose the best photos among them. Press the
Shutter button to take multiple photos. When Gallery opens, tap
and hold thumbnails of photos to save, and then tap Done.
– Continuous shot: Use this to take pictures continuously at a
rate of 3 per second. You can take up to 20 continuous pictures
at a time.
Pictures and Videos
97
– Best face: Use this to take multiple group shots at the same
time and combine them to create the best possible image. Press
the Shutter button to take multiple photos. When Gallery opens,
tap the yellow frame on each face, and choose the best
individual face for the subject. After choosing a pose for each
individual, tap Done to merge the images into a single photo,
and tap Save.
– Sound & shot: Use this mode to enrich pictures by adding
background sounds for a few seconds. The background sound
is recorded for up to 9 seconds after taking the photo.
– Rich tone (HDR): Use this to take photos with richer colors and
contrasts.
– Panorama: Use this to take wide panoramic photos. Press the
Shutter button to take a photo, and then move the camera in
any direction. When the blue frame aligns with the preview
screen, the camera automatically takes another shot in the
panoramic sequence. To stop shooting, press the Shutter button
again.
– Night: Use this to take photos in low-light conditions, without
using the flash. Press the Shutter button to take multiple photos.
Photos are automatically merged into a single photo.
Quick Settings
Tap
at the top of the display to quickly change Camera
settings. Not all of the following options are available in both
still camera and video camera modes. The available options
vary by mode.
Configure Camera settings.
Activate or deactivate the flash.
Activate or deactivate the voice control to take
photos.
Set a timer.
Select a resolution for videos.
Activate or deactivate the sharing options.
– Sports: Use this to take fast action photos.
Hide Quick settings.
98
Camera and Camcorder Settings
This section describes the different settings that you can
configure on your camera. Not all of the following options are
available in both still camera and video camera modes. The
available options vary by mode.
1. From the viewfinder, tap
(Quick Settings) ➔
(Camera Settings).
2. The follow settings are located under the Camera,
Camcorder, and General tabs. The settings that are
displayed will depend on what camera mode you are
in.
Camera:
• Photo size: Select a resolution for photos. Use higher
resolution for higher quality. Higher resolution photos take up
more memory.
• Face detection: allows you to adjust the camera focus based
on face detection technology.
• Metering: allows you to set how the camera measures or
meters the light source: Center-weighted, Matrix, or Spot.
• ISO: determines how sensitive the light meter is on your digital
camera. Choose from Auto, 100, 200, 400, or 800. Use a
lower ISO number to make your camera less sensitive to light, a
higher ISO number to take photos with less light, or Auto to let
the camera automatically adjust the ISO for each of your shots.
• Anti-shake: compensates for camera movement.
• Save as: allows you to assign rich tone usage to an image.
Camcorder:
• Video size: Select a resolution for videos. Use higher resolution
for higher quality. Higher resolution videos take up more
memory.
Settings:
• GPS tag: attach a GPS location tag to the photo. To improve
GPS signals, avoid shooting in locations where the signal may
be obstructed, such as between buildings or in low-lying areas,
or in poor weather conditions. Your location may appear on
your photos when you upload them to the Internet. To avoid
this, deactivate the GPS tag setting.
• Review: set this option if you want to view each picture after
you take it. Select a time value.
Pictures and Videos
99
• Volume key: assigns a function to the volume key. Choose
from The zoom key, The camera key, or The record key.
• Timer: Use this for delayed-time shots. You can set the timer to
Off, 2 sec, 5 sec, or 10 sec.
• White balance: Select an appropriate white balance, so
images have a true-to-life colour range. The settings are
designed for specific lighting situations. These settings are
similar to the heat range for white-balance exposure in
professional cameras.
• Exposure value: allows you to adjust the brightness level by
moving the slider.
• Guidelines: Display viewfinder guides to help composition
when selecting subjects.
• Flash: activate or deactivate the flash.
• Voice control: activates/deactivates voice control feature that
allows you to verbally take a photo.
• Contextual filename: allows you to have your location added
as part of the filename. You must first activate GPS tag
described above.
• Storage: Select the memory location for storage.
• Shutter sound: Turn the shutter sound on or off.
100
• Reset: Reset the camera settings.
Viewing your Pictures
After you take a photo, you can access various options from
the Image Viewer. The Image Viewer uses your Gallery. For
more information, refer to “Gallery” on page 103.
Editing a Photo
You can edit your photos using the built-in Photo editor
application on your device. The photo editor application
provides basic editing functions for pictures that you take on
your phone. Along with basic image tuning like brightness,
contrast, and color it also provides a wide variety of effects
used for editing the picture.
1. From the Home screen, tap
(Apps) ➔
(Gallery).
2. Select a folder location and tap a file to open it.
3. With the image displayed, press
launch the Photo editor.
(Menu) ➔ Edit to
Note: To select the picture area, touch and hold the current
picture.
4. Select an image area by touching and holding the
image and then selecting an available option:
• Selection mode: provides several on-screen selection options
such as: Select area, Inverse selection, Selection size, and
Selection mode (Magnetic, Lasso, Brush, Round, and Square).
• Select all: select the entire area of the current image.
• Clipboard: copies the currently selected area to your device’s
clipboard.
5. Use the following editor controls to edit your picture:
Previous: lets you undo the current operation.
Crop: allows you to crop (cut-out) an area of a
photo.
Color: allows you to Auto adjust color, Brightness,
Contrast, Saturation, Adjust RGB, Temperature,
Exposure, and Hue of a photo.
Effects: allows you to add various effects to your
photo.
Portrait: allows you to apply various face
correction effects such as: Red-eye fix, Airbrush
face, Face brightness, Out-of-focus, Beauty face,
Face reshaping, or Spot healing.
Next: lets you redo the previous operation.
Sticker: allows you to place various pre-created
on-screen stickers atop your current image.
Cancel/Delete: exits the current photo editing
session.
Drawing: allows you to add draw directly on your
current picture by using either a brush/pen or
eraser.
Save: stores the currently edited photo.
Rotate: allows you to rotate a photo in all 4
directions. You can also mirror image a photo.
Frame: places a pre-created border style atop
your current image.
Pictures and Videos
101
(Menu) to access the following options:
6. Press
• Save as: allows you to rename your current image and save it
to your gallery.
• Select image: allows you to select a new image for editing.
• Take picture: allows you to activate the camera and take a
new image for editing.
• Share via: allows you to share your saved image to Add to
Dropbox, Bluetooth, ChatON, Email, Flipboard, Gmail, Google+,
Group Play, Hangouts, Messaging, Picasa, S Memo, or Wi-Fi
Direct.
• Set as: assigns the currently saved image as either a: Contact
photo, Home and lock screens, Home screen, or Lock screen.
Using the Camcorder
In addition to taking photos, the camera also doubles as a
camcorder that also allows you to record, view, and send
videos.
Note: The camera may not be able to properly record videos to
a memory card with a slow transfer speed.
Shooting Video
Tip: When shooting video in direct sunlight or in bright
conditions, it is recommended that you provide your
subject with sufficient light by having the light source
behind you.
1. From the main Home screen, tap Camera
activate the camera mode.
to
2. Using the camera’s main display screen as a
viewfinder, adjust the image by aiming the camcorder
at the subject.
3. Before you take a video, use the Volume control
buttons to zoom in or out. You can magnify the video up
to x4 (400 percent).
) to begin shooting video. The
4. Tap the Video key (
red light will blink while recording.
5. You can tap the screen to move the focus to the area
you touch.
6. To capture an image from the video while recording,
tap
. This feature is not available while the
anti-shake feature is activated.
102
7. Tap the Pause key (
) to stop the recording and save
the video file to your Camera folder.
8. Tap the Stop key ( ) to stop the recording and save
the video file to your Camera folder.
9. Once the file has been saved, tap the image viewer,
then tap
to play your video.
10. Press
to return to the viewer.
Viewing your Videos
After you take a video, you can access various options from
the Image Viewer. The Image Viewer uses your Gallery and
the Video player. For more information, refer to “Gallery” on
page 103. Also, see “Video” on page 151.
Gallery
The Gallery is where you view photos and play back videos.
For photos, you can also perform basic editing tasks, view a
slideshow, set photos as wallpaper or contact image, and
share as a picture message.
1. From the Home screen, tap
(Apps) ➔
(Gallery).
All of the Albums that hold your pictures and videos will
be displayed with folder name and number of files.
2. Tap an Album and thumbnails of the contents will be
displayed.
Note: If your device displays that the memory is full when you
access Gallery, delete some of the files by using My Files
or other file management applications and try again. For
more information, refer to “My Files” on page 134.
Pictures and Videos
103
Viewing Pictures
1. Within an album, tap a thumbnail to view a single
picture.
Note: If no control icons are displayed on the screen in
addition to the picture, tap anywhere on the screen to
display them.
Viewing Videos
Note: If no control icons are displayed on the screen in
addition to the picture, tap anywhere on the screen to
display them.
1. Tap a video to select it.
2. Tap
2. The following options are available at the top of the
screen:
• Change player
: allows you to change the device the
picture is displayed on if you are using AllShare/Samsung Link.
• Share via
: allows you to share the picture via ChatON,
Group Play, Add to Dropbox, Bluetooth, Email, Flipboard, Gmail,
Google+, Hangouts, Messaging, Picasa, S Memo, or Wi-Fi
Direct.
• Delete
• Camera
3. Press
: allows you to delete the picture.
: activates the camera.
(Menu) for additional options.
3. Press
to play the video.
(Menu) for additional options.
For video player controls, see “Video” on page 151.
Using S Beam to Share Pictures
This feature (when activated via NFC) allows you to beam
large files directly to another compatible device that is in
direct contact. These files can be larger, such as Videos, HD
pictures, and other large files.You can beam images and
videos from your gallery, music files from your Music, and
more.
1. From the Home screen, tap
(Apps) ➔ Settings ➔
(Connections tab).
2. If not already active, in a single motion touch and slide
.
the NFC slider to the right to turn it on
3. Tap S Beam and make sure the feature is turned on.
104
4. If not already active, in a single motion touch and slide
.
the S Beam slider to the right to turn it on
8. From the Touch to beam screen, tap the reduced image
preview to begin the transfer.
5. On the source device (containing the desired image or
(Gallery).
video), tap
(Apps) ➔
9. When prompted, separate the two devices. After a few
seconds (depending on file size) the recipient with then
see the transferred file displayed on their screen.
6. Locate and tap the selected image to open it in the
preview window.
Important! Neither device must be in Lock mode or displaying
the Lock screen. They must both be active and
unlocked. It is recommended that the target device
be on the Home screen.
7. Place the two active NFC-enabled devices back to back
to begin.
Note: If the Touch to beam screen does not appear on the
source device:
- Pull them apart
- Verify the image is visible in the preview window on
the source device (providing the file)
- Place them together again
To share multiple pictures via S Beam:
1. On the source device (containing the desired image or
(Gallery).
video), tap
(Apps) ➔
2. Locate the selected folder.
3. Touch and hold the first image and place a checkmark
on it and all desired images.
4. Place the two active NFC-enabled devices back to back
to begin.
5. From the Touch to beam screen, tap the reduced image
preview to begin the transfer.
6. When prompted, separate the two devices.
7. The picture(s) is transferred to the other device.
Pictures and Videos
105
Section 7: Applications
This section contains a description of each application that is
available in the Apps Menu, its function, and how to navigate
through that particular application. If the application is
already described in another section of this user manual,
then a cross reference to that particular section is provided.
Note: This manual only addresses applications that have been
loaded on your device as of the date of purchase.
Information concerning third party applications that you
may choose to download from the Google Play Store or
otherwise should be obtained from the application
provider directly and not from Samsung.
Application Icons
The Apps menu provides quick access to the items you use
most frequently.
The following table contains a description of each
application. If the application is already described in another
section of this user manual, then a cross reference to that
particular section is provided.
For information on navigating through the Apps icons, see
“Navigating Through the Application Menus” on page 29.
1. From the Home screen, tap
(Apps), then tap one of
the application icons.
2. Follow the on-screen instructions.
Tip: To open applications quickly, add the icons of frequentlyused applications to one of the Home screens. For details,
see “Customizing Your Home Screen” on page 34.
You can also add an application icon as a Primary
Shortcut that will display on all Home screens. If you add
an application as a primary shortcut, the application icon
will not be displayed in the Applications menu.
106
3. To return to the main Home screen, tap
(Home).
Tip: To open applications quickly, add the icons of frequentlyused applications to the Home screen or to the folders you
created. For details, see “Customizing Your Home Screen”
on page 34.
The applications that are available on your phone are listed
below.
Application Screen Menu Settings
When on the Apps screen, the following menu options are
available:
(Apps).
1. Press
(Home) and then tap
(Menu) and then select from the following
2. Press
options:
• Play Store: provides quick access to the Play Store.
• Edit: allows you to organize your current applications by moving
them around the screen, edit or delete existing Apps folders.
• Share apps: allows you to share information about selected
applications with external users.
• Hide applications: allows you to specify which current
applications are hidden from view in this menu. Once you have
selected the apps, tap Done.
• Show hidden applications: allows you to specify which
previously hidden applications are can be made visible again
for viewing in this menu. Once you have selected the apps, tap
Done.
3. Press
to return to the Home screen.
• Create folder: allows you to create an application folder where
you can better organize and group desired apps.
• Uninstall: allows you to uninstall a user-downloaded
application. Only those applications that are not default to the
device can be downloaded. Tap
to remove the selected
app.
• Downloaded applications: allows you to filter the view of apps
to only those applications that you have downloaded.
• View type: allows you to customize the way the Apps menu
listing is shown.
Applications
107
Accessing Recently-Used Apps
1. Press and hold
(Home) from any screen to open
the recently-used applications window.
(Home) and then tap
1. Press and hold
(Task manager).
(Home) and then tap
to go to the Task manager.
to go to Google Search.
2. From the Active applications tab, tap End to close
selected applications.
– or –
– or –
Tap
– or –
Tap
to delete the record of all recently used
applications.
108
Press and hold
(End all)
– or –
2. Tap an icon to open the selected application.
– or –
Tap
Shutting Down an Currently Active Application
Tap End all to close all background running
applications.
AppStore
The metroPCS AppStore offers Games, apps to personalize
the device, applications, and more.
Note: You must have a metroPCS account to use the AppStore
application.
Metro charges for some items offered at the AppStore.
Always verify whether the item is free or there is a
charge associated.
1. From the Home screen, tap
(AppStore).
(Apps) ➔
2. Select an item to download and follow the on-screen
prompts to get started.
Calculator
With this feature, you can use the phone as a calculator. The
calculator provides the basic arithmetic functions; addition,
subtraction, multiplication, and division. The Calculator also
keeps a history of recent calculations.
1. From the Home screen, tap
(Apps) ➔
(Calculator).
2. Enter the first number using the on-screen numeric
keys.
3. Enter the operation for your calculation by tapping the
corresponding on-screen arithmetic function key.
4. Enter the second number.
5. To view the result, tap equals (=).
located at the
6. To view calculator history, tap
top of the calculator buttons. A history of your past
again to display
calculations is displayed. Tap
the calculator keypad.
7. To clear the calculator history, press
Clear history.
(Menu) ➔
8. To enable the screen input for one-handed operation,
(Menu) ➔ One-handed operation on.
press
• Tap the on-screen arrow to change the location of
the keypad for use with either right-handed or
left-handed usage.
9. Turn your phone sideways to the landscape position to
display the scientific calculator.
Applications
109
Calendar
With the Calendar feature, you can consult the calendar by
day, week, or month, create events, and set an alarm to act
as a reminder, if necessary.
To access the Calendar:
1. From the Home screen, tap
.
(Apps) ➔ Calendar
2. The following tabs are available on the right side of the
display:
• Year: displays the Year view.
• Month: displays the Month view.
• Week: displays the Week view.
• Delete: allows you to delete All events, All events before today,
or an individual event.
• Search: allows you to search within your current events.
• Sync: allows you to synchronize your calendar with one or all of
your accounts. This option only appears when an account has
been opened.
• Calendars: displays various information such as My calendars,
My task, your linked accounts, and Contact’s birthdays.
• Settings: displays a list of configurable settings.
• Day: displays the Day view.
Camera
• List: displays the List view.
Use your 13.0 megapixel camera feature to produce photos in a
JPEG format. Your phone also functions as a Camcorder to take
videos. For more information, refer to “Using the Camera” on
page 96.
• Task: allows you to search for tasks.
3. Tap
event.
(Create event) to create a new Calendar
4. Tap Today to display the current date indicated by a
blue box.
110
5. Press
(Menu) and select one of the following
options:
• Go to: displays a specific date.
ChatON
Provides a global mobile communication service where you
can chat with more than 2 buddies via a group chat, In this
service you can send pictures, videos, animation messages
(Scribbles), audio, Contacts, Calendar entries, and Location
information. Create special animated messages for your
friends using handwritten messages, text, photos,
background images and music.
1. From the Home screen, tap
(Apps) ➔
(ChatON).
2. Log in to the service and follow the on-screen
instructions.
For more information, visit: https://web.samsungchaton.com.
5. Choose to receive the verification code via either SMS
(text message) or Voice (answering machine call) to
your device.
Note: If you opt to receive the verification code via SMS, this
information is sent directly to your device. Once
received, the Verification field is automatically filled in.
6. Enter the verification code and tap Next.
7. From the Contact sync screen, decide if you wish to
include SIM contacts to your buddies list and tap OK.
8. Enter your real name and tap Done.
Registering with the Service
1. Confirm you have already logged in to your Samsung
account.
2. From the Home screen, tap
(ChatON).
4. Select a country code, enter your current phone
number to register with the service, and tap Register.
(Apps) ➔
9. Tap Sign in to log into your Samsung account
– or –
Tap Not now to continue without logging in.
3. If prompted to connect via a mobile network, tap
Connect.
Applications
111
Adding Your First Chat On Buddy
1. From the ChatON application screen, tap
(Add
buddy) and choose a search method.
• Suggestions: provides a list of suggested buddies that you
might know.
• Tell friends: to send current buddies a download link so that
they can then install ChatON.
• Phone number: to search by Country code and phone number.
• Search by ID: to search by using a known Samsung account
ID.
2. Select a country code if it differs from yours.
3. Enter the information and tap
(Search). Once the
recipient is matched, their entry appears in the Results
area.
4. Tap
(Add) and confirm your new buddy appears
in the Buddies tab.
Note: For more information, press
General ➔ Help.
(Settings) and tap
Using ChatON for Chatting
1. From the ChatON application screen, tap the Buddies
tab.
2. Select a buddy by tapping the Chat image to initiate
your chat.
3. Enter your message using the on-screen text entry
method.
4. Tap Send.
To reply to a ChatON message:
1. While the chat session is active, tap the Enter message
field and then type your reply message.
2. Compose your reply.
Your texts are colored Blue and your buddy’s messages
are white.
3. Tap Send to deliver your reply.
Deleting a single message bubble
1. From the ChatON application screen, launch a chat
session to reveal the message string.
2. Touch and hold a message bubble, then select Delete.
112
Chrome
The Google Chrome app allows you to use the Google
Chrome web browser on your phone.
1. From the Home screen, tap
(Apps) ➔
(Chrome).
2. Read the Google Chrome Terms of Service and tap
Accept and Continue.
3. If you have an existing Chrome account, tap Sign in to
bring your open tabs, bookmarks, and omnibox data
from your computer to your phone, otherwise tap No
thanks.
4. Follow the on-screen instructions to use Google
Chrome.
Clock
The Clock application allows you to access alarms, view the
World Clock, set a stopwatch, and use a timer.
Alarm
This feature allows you to set an alarm to ring at a specific
time.
1. From the Home screen, tap
(Apps) ➔
(Clock) ➔ Alarm ➔
(Create alarm).
The following options display:
• Time: tap
(Up) or
(Down) to set the new time for the
alarm to sound. Tap AM or PM.
• Alarm repeat: use this option to set the repeating status for the
alarm by tapping on the days that you want the alarm to sound.
Tap the Repeat weekly checkbox to have the alarm repeat
weekly.
• Alarm type: sets the way in which the alarm sounds when
activated (Melody, Vibration, Vibration and melody, and
Briefing).
• Alarm tone: sets the sound file which is played when the alarm
is activated. Select an option or tap Add for additional options.
• Alarm volume: drag the slider to adjust the alarm’s volume.
Applications
113
• More: displays the following additional options:
– Location alarm: when activated, the alarm only sounds
when you are at a specific location. Touch and slide the
slider to the right to turn it on
then follow the onscreen instructions to enter a location.
– Snooze: use this option to set a Duration (3, 5, 10, 15, or 30
Minutes) and Snooze repeat (1, 2, 3, 5, or 10 times).
to activate.
Tap the ON/OFF slider
– Smart alarm: tracks body movements and calculates the
best time for sounding the alarm. Place the phone
somewhere on your bed then the phone's movement sensor
(also known as accelerometer) is sensitive enough to work
from any part of the bed. Set the Interval and the Tone. Tap
the ON/OFF slider
to activate.
– Name: allows you to use a specific name for the alarm. The
name will appear on the display when the alarm activates.
2. Tap Save to store the alarm details.
114
Turning Off an Alarm
To stop an alarm when it sounds, touch and sweep the
icon to the right.
Setting the Snooze Feature
To activate the Snooze feature after an alarm sounds,
touch and sweep the ZZ icon to the left. Snooze must
first be set in the alarm settings. For more information,
refer to “Alarm” on page 113.
Deleting Alarms
To delete an alarm:
1. From the Home screen, tap
(Clock) ➔ Alarm ➔
(Apps) ➔
(Menu) ➔ Delete.
2. Tap the alarm or alarms you wish to delete. A green
checkmark will appear next to each selection. Tap
Select all to delete all alarms.
3. Tap Delete.
World Clock
World Clock allows you to view the time of day or night in
other parts of the world. World Clock displays time in
hundreds of different cities, within all 24 time zones around
the world.
1. From the Home screen, tap
(Apps) ➔
(Clock) ➔ World clock. The clock for your time
zone is displayed.
2. Tap Add city to add another city to the World Clock.
3. Scroll through the list of cities to find the city you want
to add, or tap the Search bar and use the keypad to
enter a city to search for.
4. Tap the city you want to add. The clock for that city will
display.
5. To set Daylight Savings time, press and hold a city,
then tap DST settings.
Deleting a World Clock Entry
1. From the Home screen, tap
(Apps) ➔
(Clock) ➔ World Clock ➔
(Menu) ➔ Delete.
2. Place a check mark alongside the city clocks you wish
to delete.
3. Tap Delete.
Stopwatch
You can use this option to measure intervals of time.
1. From the Home screen, tap
(Apps) ➔
(Clock) ➔ Stopwatch.
2. Tap Start to start the stopwatch and tap Lap to mark a
unit of time per lap.
3. Tap Stop to stop the stopwatch.
4. Tap Restart to continue or tap Reset to erase all times
recorded.
6. Select Automatic, Off, or 1 hour.
7. If Daylight Savings Time is selected, a sun symbol on
the World Clock listing will appear.
Applications
115
Timer
You can use this option to set a countdown timer. Use a timer
to count down to an event based on a preset time length
(hours, minutes, and seconds).
1. From the Home screen, tap
(Apps) ➔
(Clock) ➔ Timer.
2. The Minutes field is highlighted and set to 1 minute.
Use the keypad to set the number of minutes you want.
3. Tap the Hours field to set hours if desired. As you tap
different fields, they will become highlighted.
4. Tap the Seconds field to set seconds.
5. Tap Start to begin the timer and tap Stop to pause the
timer.
6. After stopping, tap Restart to continue or tap Reset to
set the timer back to the original setting.
Desk clock
You can use the Desk clock when you have a desk dock and
you want your phone to display the time, day, date, location,
and weather conditions when it is docked.
1. From the Home screen, tap
(Apps) ➔
(Clock) ➔ Desk clock.
The default Desk clock is displayed.
2. Tap
to display the Desk clock in full-screen mode.
3. To make changes, tap
(Menu) ➔ Settings.
4. The following options are displayed while in full-screen
mode:
• Hide status bar: when this is checked, the status bar is hidden
from view.
• Wallpaper: tap to select Desk clock wallpaper from Default,
Gallery, or Same as home screen.
• Calendar: when this is checked, the calendar is displayed. Tap
to uncheck.
• Weather: when this is activated, the location, temperature, and
weather condition is displayed. Touch and slide the slider to the
right to turn it on
.
116
• Dock: allows you to set your Dock settings such as Dock
sound, Audio output mode, Desk home screen display,
Automatic unlock, and Audio output.
Contacts
You can manage your daily contacts by storing their name
and number in your Address Book. Address Book entries can
be sorted by name, entry, or group.
For more information, refer to “Contacts and Your Address
Book” on page 66.
Downloads
Provides quick access to tabs containing a list of your current
downloaded files (Internet and Other).
1. From the Home screen, tap
(Apps) ➔
(Downloads).
All of your downloads are listed.
Dropbox
Works to provide access to your desktop files directly from
your device. This applications allows you to bring your files
with you when you're on the go, edit files in your Dropbox
from your device, upload photos and videos to Dropbox, and
share your selected files freely with family and friends.
The in-device application works in conjunction with a partner
program placed on a target computer using an active Internet
connection.
Dropbox creates a folder that automatically synchronizes its
contents across all of your connected devices on your
account. Update a file to your Dropbox on your computer, and
its automatically updated to the same folder on your other
devices.
Download the Desktop application
2. Tap an available file and select it for use.
1. Use your computer’s browser to navigate to:
http://www.dropbox.com/.
3. Choose an available action such as Share via, Delete,
Sort by size/date, or Clear list.
2. Follow the on-screen setup and installation instructions
on your target computer containing the desired files.
Applications
117
Important! The computer application must be installed on the
computer containing the desired files. This
computer must have an active Internet connection.
Note: It might be necessary to configure your router’s firewall
settings to allow this application to gain access to the
Internet.
Accessing Dropbox on your Device
1. From the Home screen, tap
(Apps) ➔
(Dropbox) ➔ Start.
2. Tap Sign in, enter your current account credentials, and
tap Sign in.
– or –
Tap Sign up for Dropbox and follow the on-screen
instructions to register for a new account.
3. Follow the on-screen instructions.
4. Initially, you will need to configure your Camera Upload
parameters. Choose from Wi-Fi only or Wi-Fi or data
plan.
• Tap Turn on Camera Upload after making your selection.
Caution! Enabling this feature can incur data charges
(depending on your plan) if the Wi-Fi or data plan is
selected.
(Access Dropbox) at the top of the application
5. Tap
window to access the files and folders you area
currently sharing from your computer.
118
Manually uploading a Picture to Dropbox
1. From the Home screen, tap
(Camera).
(Apps) ➔
2. After the image is taken, tap the Image Viewer box at
the bottom right. This previews the current image.
3. Tap the image to reveal the image options at the top of
the screen.
➔
(Add to Dropbox) select a folder
4. Tap
location and tap Add
Note: If your share folder is located on your computer, you will
momentarily receive an on-screen popup notifying you
that a new image was uploaded to your shared Dropbox
folder.
Email
Email enables you to review and create email using various
email services. You can also receive message alerts when
you receive an important email. For more information, refer
to “Using Email” on page 94.
Flipboard
This application creates a personalized digital magazine out
of everything being shared with you. Access news stories,
personal feeds and other related material. Flip through your
Facebook newsfeed, tweets from your Twitter account,
photos from friends and much more.
1. From the Home screen, tap
(Apps) ➔
(Flipboard).
2. Tap Tap to sign in to sign into your previously created
Flipboard account.
– or –
Swipe up on the Flipboard screen, and select the
desired category.
3. Tap Build Your Flipboard to build your Flipboard.
4. Follow the on-screen instructions to use Flipboard.
Applications
119
Gallery
Signing into Your Google Account
The Gallery is where you view photos and play back videos.
For photos, you can also perform basic editing tasks, view a
slideshow, set photos as wallpaper or contact image, and
share as a picture message. For more information, refer to
“Gallery” on page 103.
Gmail
Google Mail (Gmail) is a Web-based email service. Gmail is
configured when you first set up your phone. Depending on
your synchronization settings, Gmail can automatically
synchronize with your Gmail account.
Creating a New Google Account
™
You should create a Google Account when you first use
your device in order to fully utilize the functionality. This
account provides access to several device features such as
Gmail™, Hangouts™, and the Google Play Store™
applications. Before you are able to access Google
applications, you must enter your account information. These
applications sync between your device and your online
Google account.
1. Launch an application that requires a Google account
(such as Play Store or Gmail).
2. Click Existing.
3. Tap the Email and Password fields and enter your
information.
4. Tap
(Sign in). Your device communicates with the
Google servers to confirm your information.
5. If prompted, you can enable the option to stay up to
date on news and offers, then tap OK.
Creating a Gmail Message
1. From the Home screen, tap
(Gmail).
(Apps) ➔
2. From the Gmail Inbox, tap
at the bottom of the
screen to create a new message.
3. Enter the recipients Email address in the To field.
Separate multiple recipient email addresses with a
comma.
(Menu) and select Add Cc/Bcc to add a carbon
4. Tap
or blind copy.
5. Enter the subject of this message in the Subject field.
120
6. Tap the Compose email field and begin composing your
message.
7. Tap
to send.
Google
The Google Search application is the same on-screen
Internet search engine that is on the Google Search Bar on
your main Home screen. For more information, refer to
“Google Search Bar” on page 26.
Use Google Search to search the Web. Google Now® (a part
of the Google application) recognizes a user’s repeated
actions performed on the device (including access of
common locations, repeated calendar appointments, search
queries, etc.). This information is then used to display more
relevant information to the user in the form of “cards”. These
scrollable on-screen cards are displayed when the Google
Now application is launched.
These cards are not manually added.
The service uses your GPS, Google Search, and usage
information to generate these cards automatically.
From the Home screen, tap
(Apps) ➔
(Google) and enter the search text.
Tip: Press and hold
Now).
(Home) and then tap
(Google
– or –
Tap
on the Google Search bar and say the search
information.
To initially set up Google Now:
1. From the Home screen, tap
(Google).
(Apps) ➔
2. Follow the on-screen instructions to review the
available information.
3. When prompted, agree to launch the application. Some
initial on-screen “cards” are shown. A default is the
Weather card that provides updated weather
information in your area.
Applications
121
Google Settings
To configure the Google Now settings:
1. From the Home screen, tap
(Google).
2. Press
(Apps) ➔
(Menu) and select Settings.
3. Access each desired Settings page and configure it as
desired.
When these condition are met, new card information will
begin to appear in the Google Now list of cards.
Note: Google Now will recognize searches and display them
on your device, even if that search took place on your
home computer or on another device. These searches
are linked into your Google Account.
122
As Google has become more intertwined with other
applications, this menu provides a quick and ready access
point to configure preferences for Google+, Maps & Latitude,
Locations, etc. You can also use the Search function to
initiate a Google Search from this menu.
1. From the Home screen, tap
(Apps) ➔
(Google Settings) and select an on-screen option.
2. Select one of the available on-screen options.
3. Follow the on-screen prompts.
Google +
Group Play
Google+ makes messaging and sharing with your friends a
lot easier. You can set up Circles of friends, visit the Stream
to get updates from your Circles, use Messenger for fast
messaging with everyone in your Circles, or use Instant
Upload to automatically upload videos and photos to your
own private album on Google+.
1. Sign on to your Google account. For more information,
refer to “Creating a New Google Account” on page 15.
2. From the Home screen, tap
(Google+).
(Apps) ➔
Group Play allows you to share pictures, music, and
documents in real-time with your friends. You can create a
group from your device or join other groups.
1. From the Home screen, tap
(Apps) ➔
(Group Play).
2. Read the on-screen Disclaimer information and tap
Agree to continue.
3. Follow the on-screen tutorials.
3. Select the account you want to use to sign in to
Google+.
– or –
Tap Add account to create another account.
4. Follow the on-screen instructions to use Google+.
5. Visit www.google.com/mobile/+/ for more information.
Applications
123
Creating a group
If you have media you want to share, create a group for other
users to join to and then share/collaborate with what you are
sharing.
The creator of the group is the leader and it the source of the
shared file. All other joined members can then interact with
the file being shared.
1. Connect to an active Wireless Access Point and confirm
your other participants are also connected to this same
Wi-Fi.
2. From within the Group Play application, tap the
Set group password field to enable the function which
requires users to enter a password prior to connecting
to your new group.
3. Tap Create group. If previously selected, enter your
group password and tap OK. Mobile AP is enabled.
4. Tap one of the media items listed under the Share and
play content heading.
5. Tap to select the items you want to share (indicated by
a checkmark), then tap Done or OK.
124
6. Have your friends sign onto Group Play from their
devices (see below) and they can view your media
using you as a Mobile AP.
Joining a group
A joiner is the participant of an already created group. You
can only view and interact with media shared by the leader
of an existing group.
1. Connect to an active Wireless Access Point and confirm
your connection is this same Wi-Fi as the group leader.
2. From within the Group Play application, tap Join group.
Your device then scans for available groups for you to
join.
3. Select a group to join. Once connected, you can then
select the shared content and interact with your
group’s shared media.
(Menu) and select Help for additional
4. Press
information.
Hangouts
Previously known as Google Talk™, is an updated place to
hangout, share photos, and even video calls. This is a free
application for instant messaging offered by Google.
Conversation logs are automatically saved to a Chats area in
your Gmail account. This allows you to search a chat log and
store them in your Gmail accounts.
Note: The first time you use Hangouts, you will need to
download the updated application from the Play Store.
When the Play Store page displays, tap Update. For more
information, refer to “Play Store” on page 138.
1. Log on to your Google account if you have not already
done so. For more information, refer to “Creating a
New Google Account” on page 15.
2. From the Home screen, tap
(Hangouts).
(Apps) ➔
3. The first time you access Hangouts, tap Confirm to
confirm your mobile number. If the number is not
correct, tap Edit Number to change it.
(Menu) ➔ Help for more information on
5. Press
using Hangouts.
Help
Provides access to built-in Help information.
1. From the Home screen, tap
(Apps) ➔
(Help).
2. Select an on-screen topics for more information:
• New features: provides help on all of the new features and
applications such as Air view, Motion, Smart screen, Story
Album, and Group Play.
• Basics: provides basic information on using your device.
• Applications: provides information on how to use basic
applications like Contacts, Email, S Memo, Internet, Camera,
etc.
• Settings: provides information on settings for Wi-Fi, Bluetooth,
Ringtone, Power saving mode, NFC, and Screen Mirroring.
• Online help: provides more detailed online help for additional
questions you may have.
• Available accessories: provides information about available
accessories.
4. Begin using Hangouts.
Applications
125
Internet
Entering a URL
The Internet application is your access to the mobile web.
This section explains how to navigate the browser and
introduces you to the basic features.
To access the browser:
From the Home screen, tap
(Browser).
You can access a website quickly by entering the URL.
Websites are optimized for viewing on your phone.
To enter a URL and go to a particular website:
(Apps) ➔
From the homepage tap the URL field at the top of the
screen, enter the URL and tap
.
Search the Internet
Navigating with the Browser
1. To select an item, tap an entry.
2. To scroll through a website, sweep the screen with
your finger in an up or down motion.
To perform an Internet search using keywords:
1. From within the Google search application, tap the
Google search field, enter the keyword(s) to search
using the on-screen keypad.
3. Sweep the screen left to right to move laterally across
a web page.
2. Tap the entry from the list of search results that are
displayed.
4. To return to a previous page, press
3. Tap a link to view the website.
5. To move forward to a web page, press
.
.
Browser Options
126
From any web page, press
browser options.
(Menu) to access your
Adding and Deleting Windows
To add a new window:
1. From your browser window, tap
(New window).
Going Incognito
(Window) ➔
2. A new browser window displays.
Note: The number of currently open windows is displayed at
the bottom of the Windows screen.
3. Scroll across the screen to view the currently active
windows and tap an entry to launch the selected
Internet window.
To delete an existing window:
1. From your browser window, tap
(Windows).
2. Scroll across the available windows and locate your
target window.
at the top right corner of the web page
3. Tap
thumbnail to delete the window.
The incognito feature allows you to view Internet sites
outside of normal browsing. Pages viewed in this incognito
window won’t appear within your browser history or search
history, and no traces (such as cookies) are left on your
device.
Note: Any downloaded files will be preserved and will stay on
your device after you exit the incognito mode.
To add a new incognito window:
1. From your browser, press
mode.
(Menu) ➔ Incognito
2. At the information prompt, tap OK.
3. A new browser window displays.
To exit from the incognito window:
1. From your browser window, tap
(Windows).
2. Scroll across the available windows and locate the
incognito window. The incognito icon
appears in
the upper-left of the new browser window while you
are in this mode.
Applications
127
next to the incognito listing to delete this
3. Tap
window.
Using Bookmarks
While navigating a website, you can bookmark a site to
quickly and easily access it at a future time. The URLs
(website addresses) of the bookmarked sites are displayed in
the Bookmarks page. From the Bookmarks page you can
also view your Most visited websites and view your History.
1. From the Home webpage, tap
(Bookmarks).
The Bookmarks page is displayed.
2. Press
(Menu) to display the Bookmark options.
Local
Local is an application that uses Google Maps and your
location to help you find Restaurants, Cafes, Bars,
Attractions, and other businesses. You can also add your own
locations.
1. From the Home screen, tap
(Apps) ➔
(Local).
2. Tap on one of the business categories to search for a
particular business.
All of the business categories that are close to you will
be displayed.
3. Tap on a business that you want to see the details for.
4. The business details such as address, phone, website,
and location are displayed. You can also see reviews
from around the web and from Google users.
128
Maps
Depending on your location, you can view basic, custom, and
satellite maps and local business information, including
locations, contact information, and driving directions. You
can also post public messages about a location and track
your friends.
Important! Before using Google Maps you must have an active
data (3G/4G/LTE) or Wi-Fi connection. The Maps
application does not cover every country or city.
Enabling a Location Source
Before you use Google Maps and find your location or search
for places of interest, you must enable a location source. To
enable the location source you must enable the wireless
network, or enable the GPS satellites.
1. From the Home screen, tap
(Apps) ➔ Settings ➔
(More tab) ➔ Location services.
More
2. Tap Use GPS satellites to enable the GPS satellite.
3. Tap Use wireless networks to allow apps to use data
from sources such as Wi-Fi and mobile networks to
provide a better approximation of your current location.
4. Tap My places to enable the storage of your favorite
locations.
To receive better GPS signals, avoid using your device in the
following conditions:
• inside a building or between buildings
• in a tunnel or underground passage
• in poor weather
• around high-voltage or electromagnetic fields
• in a vehicle with tinted windows
Using Maps
1. From the Home screen, tap
(Apps) ➔
(Maps).
A map will display with your location in the very center.
2. Follow the on-screen instructions to use the Maps
application.
Note: Selecting Use GPS satellites allows you to locate places
of interest at the street-level. However, this also requires
a clear view of the sky and uses more battery power.
Applications
129
Messaging
This application allows you to use the Short Message Service
(SMS) to send and receive short text messages to and from
other mobile phones.
You can also use the Multi Media Service (MMS) to create
multimedia messages to send and receive from other mobile
phones.
You can send and receive different types of messages. For
more information, refer to “Messaging” on page 81.
Messenger
Messenger allows you to bring groups of friends together into
a simple group conversation. When you get a new
conversation in Messenger, Google+ sends an update to your
device.
Note: When this application is accessed, Hangouts is
displayed.
1. Sign on to your Google account.
2. From the Home screen, tap
(Messenger).
– or –
(Apps) ➔
From the Google+ application, select Messenger.
3. Select the account you want to use to sign in to
Google+.
– or –
Tap Add account to create another account.
4. When prompted, follow the on-screen procedures to
configure the Sync contacts parameters.
130
5. When prompted, configure the photo backup
parameters as desired and tap Done.
6. Tap
from the upper-left of the screen and
select from an available list of features such as: Home,
People, Communities, Hangouts, etc..
To create a new message:
1. Tap
from the upper-left of the screen and
select Hangouts.
2. Select an entry/contact and tap Message to start a new
message.
3. In the bottom Send a message field, enter a message
then tap
(Send).
MetroZONE
Enjoy all of your available updates in a single place.
MetroZONE recommends content, information, and
applications within a single location.
1. From the Home screen, tap
(Apps) ➔
(metroZONE). The service connects to the
network.
2. Follow the on-screen instructions.
Mobile Hotspot
Provides access to the Mobile HotSpot menu where you can
use either the USB tethering or portable HotSpot functionality.
1. From the Home screen, tap
(Apps) ➔
(Mobile Hotspot).
2. Activate the desired connection method.
For more information, refer to “Mobile Hotspot” on page
171.
Applications
131
Music
Press and hold to fast-forward the song. Tap to
go to next song.
Volume control and sound effects.
Music is an application that can play music files. Music
supports files with extensions AAC, AAC+, eAAC+, MP3,
WMA, 3GP, MP4, and M4A. Launching Music allows you to
navigate through your music library, play songs, and create
playlists (music files bigger than 300 KB are displayed).
Volume control showing volume muted.
Plays the entire song list once.
Playing Music
1. From the Home screen, tap
(Music).
Replays the current list when the list ends.
(Apps) ➔
Repeats the currently playing song.
Shuffles the current list of songs randomly.
2. Tap a library category at the top of the screen (Songs,
Playlists, Albums, Artists, Music square, or Folders) to
view the available music files.
Songs play in order and are not shuffled.
Lists the current playlist songs.
3. Scroll through the list of songs and tap an entry to
begin playback.
Displays the current song in the player window.
Assign the current song as a Favorite.
4. The following Music controls are available:
Streams the current music file to another device
via Samsung Link.
Pause the song.
Start the song after pausing.
Press and hold to rewind the song. Tap to go to
previous song.
132
(Menu) ➔ Settings to modify your Music
5. Press
settings.
6. Press
(Menu) to access additional options.
Creating a Playlist
Removing Music from a Playlist
Playlists are used to assign songs to a list of preferred media
which can then be grouped into a list for later playback.
These Playlists can be created via either the handset’s Music
options menu or from within a 3rd party music application
(such as Windows Media Player) and then downloaded to the
handset.
1. From the Home screen, tap
(Apps) ➔
(Music).
2. Tap the Playlists tab.
3. Press
(Menu) ➔ Create playlist.
4. Type a name for this playlist in the field and tap OK.
Adding Music to a Playlist
To add files to the playlist:
1. From the Home screen, tap
(Music).
2. Tap the Playlists tab.
3. Tap the playlist name in which to delete music.
4. Press
(Menu) ➔ Remove.
5. Tap the checkbox to the left of each track you want to
remove from this playlist, or tap Select all to remove all
the music tracks from this playlist, then tap Remove.
Editing a Playlist
Besides adding and removing music files in a playlist, you
can also rename the playlist.
(Apps) ➔
2. Tap the Playlists tab.
3. Tap the playlist name in which to add music.
4. Tap
To remove music files from a playlist:
1. From the Home screen, tap
(Apps) ➔
(Music).
(Add music).
5. Tap a music file, or tap Select all to add all the music
tracks to this playlist then tap OK.
To edit a playlist:
1. From the Home screen, tap
(Music).
(Apps) ➔
2. Tap Playlists.
3. Press
(Menu) ➔ Edit title.
4. Tap a playlist name to edit.
5. Enter a new name for the playlist then tap OK.
Applications
133
For information on downloading music for your phone, see
“Play Music” on page 137.
My Files
My Files allows you to manage your sounds, images, videos,
bluetooth files, Android files, and other memory card data in
one convenient location.
1. From the Home screen, tap
(Apps) ➔
(My Files) ➔ All files.
2. Tap Device storage to see the contents of your internal
SD card.
3. The following folders may display:
• Alarms: this folder contains any alarm files you may have.
• Android: the Android folder stores files that are used in Android
applications.
• Application: this folder contains app info for S Memo.
• Bluetooth: this folder stores files sent via a Bluetooth device.
• DCIM: this is the default location for pictures and videos taken
by the device. Tap DCIM ➔ Camera to view the picture or
video files. For more information, refer to “Viewing Pictures”
on page 104. Also, see “Viewing Videos” on page 104.
• Download: this folder contains downloads you have made.
134
• Movies: this folder contains your Video and Movie files.
• Music: this folder contains your Music files.
• Notifications: this folder contains all of the notifications you
have received.
• Pictures: this folder contains your photos.
• Podcasts: this folder contains all of your podcasts.
• Ringtones: this folder contains any ringtones you have
purchased.
• S Memo: this folder contains all the S Memos you have written.
Note: Different folders may appear depending on how your
phone is configured.
4. If you have an external SD card inserted, tap SD
memory card to see the contents of your external SD
card (memory card).
myMetro
Navigation
Use myMetro to view your account balance, make payments,
view your rate plan and features, and access your account
settings.
Note: Wi-Fi connection must be disabled prior to use, this
application requires use of a mobile network connection.
1. From the Home screen, tap
(myMetro).
(Apps) ➔
2. Tap
(Options) to choose from one of the following
options:
• BILL & PAYMENTS: allows you to pay your bill, add funds to
your MetroConnect (MC) account, create an eWallet, or read
explanations about billing and payments.
• RATE PLAN & FEATURES: allows you to reset your voicemail
password, and alter your E911 Address.
• TOOLS: provides available metro tools for customer use.
Navigation is an internet-connected GPS navigation system
with voice guidance. You can type or speak your destination.
Note: For voice-guided navigation, you need to install text-tospeech support from the Play Store.
To receive better GPS signals, avoid using your device in the
following conditions:
• inside a building or between buildings
• in a tunnel or underground passage
• in poor weather
• around high-voltage or electromagnetic fields
• in a vehicle with tinted windows
Launching Navigation
1. From the Home screen, tap
(Navigation).
(Apps) ➔
2. If prompted, read the Navigation information page and
tap Accept to continue or Don’t accept to exit.
3. Select a method of transportation (such as by car,
Metro, Bicycle, or Walking).
Applications
135
4. Enter a destination and follow the on-screen
instructions to refine your directions.
Phone
The Phone application allows you to access the dialer
keypad, call logs, and favorites. For more information, refer
to “Call Functions” on page 49.
Play Books
With Google Play Books, you can find more than 3 million
free e-books and hundreds of thousands more to buy in the
eBookstore.
1. From the Home screen, tap
(Apps) ➔
(Play Books).
2. Log on to your Google account. For more information,
refer to “Creating a New Google Account” on page 15.
3. Follow the on-screen instructions for using the Play
Books application.
Play Games
This application takes you directly to the Play Store Games
area from where you can make purchases.
1. From the Home screen, tap
(Play Games).
(Apps) ➔
2. Accept the Mobile terms of service for Google+ by
tapping Accept.
3. Select from an available on-screen option.
Play Magazines
With Google Play Magazines, you can subscribe to your
favorite magazines and have them available to read on your
phone at any time or any place.
1. From the Home screen, tap
(Apps) ➔
(Play Magazines).
2. Log on to your Google account if you have not already
done so. For more information, refer to “Creating a
New Google Account” on page 15.
3. At the Welcome! display, tap the shop icon
browse the full catalog.
to
4. Read the Google Play Terms of Service and tap Accept.
136
5. Sweep the screen to the left or right to view
Categories, Featured, Top Selling, and New Arrivals.
6. Tap a magazine to see more information and
subscribe.
7. Follow the on-screen instructions to subscribe to a
magazine.
Play Movies & TV
With Google Play Movies & TV, you can rent thousands of
different movies and television shows. You can watch
instantly, or download your movie or show for offline viewing
at a later time.
1. From the Home screen, tap
(Apps) ➔
(Play Movies & TV).
2. Log on to your Google account if you have not already
done so. A list of videos sorted on the SD card displays
in the Video list.
3. Following the on-screen instructions for renting and
viewing movies.
4. Tap the My Movies tab to view movies you have rented.
5. Tap the My TV Shows tab to view shows you have
rented.
6. Tap the Shop tab to access the shopping marketplace.
7. Press
(Menu) for additional options.
Play Music
With Google Play Music, you can play music that you have
added to your music file as well as any music you copied
from your PC. While offline, you can listen to music you have
copied from your PC.
1. From the Home screen, tap
(Apps) ➔
(Play Music).
The Music app searches both your online library and
your device’s internal storage for music and playlists;
this can take from a few seconds to several minutes,
depending on the amount of new music added since
you last opened the application.
2. If prompted to join the service, select either Not now or
Try it FREE.
3. Follow the on-screen log in screens.
4. Return to the Library screen from most other screens
in the Music application by tapping the Music
application icon
(Music notification icon) at the
top-left of the Application bar.
Applications
137
Searching for Music in Your Library
1. From within the Play Music application, tap
(Search) to search through your available songs.
2. Type the name of an artist, album, song, or playlist.
Matching songs are displayed in a list below the search
box.
3. Tap a matching song to play it, tap a matching album,
artist or playlist to view a list of its’ songs.
Tab Options
There are various options available from the various tabs:
Play Store provides access to downloadable applications and
games to install on your phone. Play Store also allows you to
provide feedback and comments about an application, or flag
an application that might be incompatible with your phone.
Before using the Play Store you must have a Google Account.
For more information, refer to “Gmail” on page 120.
1. From the main Home screen, tap Play Store
.
2. Sign in to your Google account.
3. The first time you sign in, the Play Store Terms of
Service will be displayed. Tap Accept to continue or
Decline to exit.
From within the My Library area, select one of the
following tabs and tap
(alongside the entry name)
to access an available option.
• GENRES: Add to queue.
4. Tap Apps, or Games to download or purchase games or
applications. You can also download updates to
existing applications.
• ARTISTS: Start instant mix or Shop for artist.
5. Follow on the on-screen instructions.
• ALBUMS: Start instant mix, Add to queue, Keep on device, Add
to playlist, Go to artist, or Shop this artist.
• SONGS: Start instant mix, Add to queue, Add to playlist, Go to
artist, Go to album, Delete, or Shop this artist.
138
Play Store
Rhapsody
Provides access to a subscriber-based digital music service
that allows you to listen music at any time from anywhere.
1. From the Home screen, tap
(Apps) ➔
(Rhapsody).
2. Follow the on-screen instructions to register or log into
an existing account.
Tap
to start a new memo in text mode with the
keypad displayed or tap
to start a new memo in
drawing mode using your finger or a compatible
on-screen writing tool. You can change back and forth
in a memo to add text with the keypad and the pen.
Toolbar
S Memo
The S Memo application allows you to create memos using
the keypad, your finger, or both. You can add images, voice
recordings, and text all in one place.
Writing area
Creating a New Memo
1. From the Home screen, tap
(S Memo).
(Apps) ➔
2. Tap an existing Memo to open it then tap the screen to
enter edit mode.
– or –
Add Page
Show/Hide
Additional
Options
Keyboard
Applications
139
The icons that you see displayed on the screen are described
in the following table:
Changes the view mode.
Provides access to a quick selection bar. Choose from:
Take picture, Images, Clipboard, Maps, and Clip art.
These elements can be used within the memo.
Changes to the edit mode.
Add an additional page to the memo.
Allows you to draw with a stylus or your finger. Tap
again to access the Pen settings.
3. When you are finished creating your memo, tap Save
on the top menu bar.
Displays the keypad to you can add text.
4. Press
Eraser tool allows you to erase marks and drawings.
Undo the last action.
Redo the last action that was undone.
Make a voice recording to add to the memo. This option
is not available in free-format drawing mode.
Hide the additional text options.
Show the additional text options.
140
(Menu) to access additional options.
S Translator
With the S Translator you can easily translate words and
phrases into many different languages.
1. Sign in with your Samsung Account if you have not
already done so. For more information, refer to
“Creating a Samsung Account” on page 14.
2. From the Home screen, tap
(S Translator).
(Apps) ➔
3. At the S Translator screen, tap the top language bar
and enter your language.
4. Tap the language bar at the bottom of the screen to
select the language that you would like to translate to.
5. Enter text into the upper box and tap
.
It will be translated into the language of the upper box.
7. Press
(Menu) for additional options.
S Voice
With the S Voice application you can use your voice to
perform operations that you would normally have to do by
hand such as dialing a phone number, texting a message,
playing music, etc.
1. From the Home screen, tap
(Apps) ➔
(S Voice).
2. Read the Samsung Disclaimer then tap Confirm to
continue.
3. Read the Vlingo Terms of Service then tap Agree to
continue.
– or –
Enter text into the lower box and tap
6. Tap either of the Speak buttons at the bottom of the
screen to translate using either language by using your
voice. The translation will appear automatically in the
appropriate box.
.
It will be translated into the language of the lower box.
4. Read the information on the About S Voice screen, then
tap Next.
5. Read the information on the Say what you want screen,
then tap Next.
Applications
141
6. Read the information on the Wake up S Voice screen,
then tap Next.
7. Read the information on the Edit what you said screen,
then tap Next.
8. Read the information on the Help screen, then tap
Finish.
9. At the S Voice screen, tap
to wake up S voice.
or say “Hi Galaxy”
10. Speak into the phone and follow the on-screen
instructions.
Example 1:
• I want to find the best pizza online.
• Tap
and say “Find me the best Pizza”. This launches
an Internet search.
Example 2:
• I want to go to Cambridge.
• Tap
and say “Navigate to Cambridge”. This launches
the Map application and indicates where this is in relation to
your current position.
11. Press
142
(Menu) for additional options.
Samsung Apps
With Samsung Apps, you can download hundred of
applications from a variety of categories.
1. Sign on to your Samsung account if you have not
already done so.
2. From the Home screen, tap
(Samsung Apps).
(Apps) ➔
3. If prompted, read the Disclaimer, Terms and conditions,
and Privacy policy and tap Accept.
4. Follow the on-screen instructions.
5. Press
(Menu) ➔ Help for additional information.
Samsung Hub
Samsung Hub makes it easy to find, sample, and purchase
movies, TV shows, books, games, and music, in one userfriendly location. With hundreds of titles available,
entertaining your family on-the-go has never been easier.
You can rent or purchase your favorite content and watch
from any location. Samsung Hub is your gateway to mobile
entertainment.
You must have an active Samsung Account to purchase and
rent content via Samsung Hub.
Note: Samsung Hub usage is based on service availability.
Important! You must be using an active Wi-Fi/4G/LTE
connection to preview and download a media file.
The internal memory acts as a storage location for
your downloaded rental or purchase.
Important! The Samsung account manages the access
information (username/password) to several
applications, such as Samsung Link, Chat On, and
Samsung Hub.
Creating a New Samsung Hub Account
Before you can rent or buy media, you must first create an
account. Enter the required information.
1. Log in to your Samsung account if you have not already
done so.
2. From the Home screen, tap
(Samsung Hub).
(Apps) ➔
3. When prompted to connect via mobile networks, select
either Cancel or Connect.
4. If notified your Samsung account is not yet active or
verified, tap OK. You must be signed in to your
Samsung account to use the application’s various
features.
Tip: In some cases it might be necessary to sign in to your
Samsung account via the application.
Press
and then select Sign in.
5. Press
(Menu) ➔ Help for additional information.
Applications
143
Using Samsung Hub
The main Samsung Hub screen provides an overview of all
the available categories on one page such as: Music, Video,
Books, and Games. The overview page also displays recently
added media that you can rent or purchase.
1. From the Home screen, tap
(Apps) ➔
(Samsung Hub).
• The OVERVIEW screen (landing page) displays an main access
for all available categories and recently available content for
purchase or rental.
2. Scroll across the screen to select from the following
available pages:
• MUSIC: displays featured Music content available for purchase/
stream from the Music store & Radio. This page also allows you
to search for new content, or navigate directly to the Music
store page by clicking on the "Music” link at the top of the
page.
• VIDEO: displays featured film and TV content available for
purchase/rent from the video store. This page also allows you
to search for new content, or navigate directly to the Movie &
TV store page by clicking the "Video" link a the top of the page.
144
• BOOKS: displays featured Book content available for purchase
from the Book store. This page also allows you to search for
new content, or navigate directly to the Book store page by
clicking the "Books" link a the top of the page.
• GAMES: displays featured Game content available from the
Game store. This page also allows you to search for new
content, or navigate directly to the Game store page by clicking
the "Games" link a the top of the page.
3. To purchase or view featured content in more detail,
tap on any content (Thumbnail or text) to navigate to
the product detail page.
4. Depending on the content, you can either purchase,
rent, or stream the content directly from the product
detail page.
5. Choose a payment method, then follow the on-screen
instructions.
Samsung Hub Notices
• Any media item (Media Content) may be rented or purchased after
you create an account in Samsung Hub.
• Media Content that is purchased and downloaded may be viewed
concurrently on up to five (5) devices with Samsung Hub (or “the
service”) that are also registered to the same account.
• You may remove a device from your account no more than once
every 90 days.
• You may remove Media Content from a device as many times as
you’d like. You will have the ability to re-download the Media
Content later subject to content re-download availability and
content provider permissions.
• You may need network coverage to access Media Content you
have acquired through the Service.
• You can use 3G, 4G, or Wi-Fi connectivity to download Media
Content.
• Unlike purchased Media Content, rented Media Content will be
viewable on only 1 device in your account at a time.
• Media Content is downloaded and saved to your authorized
device's SD card. No SD Card included out of box.
• Your Media Content may pause/stop or not download in networks
where there is a weak signal.
• You may begin watching downloaded Media Content as soon as a)
license acquisition has occurred and b) sufficient amount of the
Media Content has been buffered.
• You must finish watching Media Content within the time limit set
out for each piece of content (which may be as short as 24
consecutive hours).
• Stopping, pausing or restarting rented Media Content does not
extend the available viewing time.
• In no event will rented Media Content be available for a period
of more than thirty (30) days (or shorter on a title-by-title basis)
after the Media Content has been rented (e.g., if you begin
viewing rented Media Content on the 29th day after the rental
transaction, but do not finish viewing the entire title, that rented
Media Content may not be available for the entire twenty-four
(24) consecutive hour period if such period would extend the
viewable time beyond the thirty (30) day rental window).
• Unless otherwise restricted by the Content Providers, you can
download Media Content to your TV using HDMI connections;
otherwise, you cannot play Media Content downloaded from your
mobile device output. (4/1/2013)
Applications
145
Samsung Link
Group Play
A subset feature of Samsung Link, this
allows you to mirror photos and
multimedia presentations with other
members of your current Wi-Fi
group. Users must be on the same
Wi-Fi and provide an access code to
join the group.
AllShare Cast
(with Hub
accessory)
This feature functions with an
external AllShareCast Hub to fully
mirror what is currently displayed on
your device to the external TV.
This application wirelessly synchronizes your Samsung
mobile phone with your TV, streams content and even keeps
tabs on who calls or sends text messages with real-time,
on-screen monitoring. Samsung’s Samsung Link makes
staying connected easy.
Allows users to share their in-device media content with
other external devices using DLNA certified™ (Digital Living
Network Alliance) Devices. These external devices must also
be DLNA-compliant. Wi-Fi capability can be provided to TVs
via a digital multimedia streamer.
AllShare/Samsung Link Definitions:
Samsung Link/
This new feature builds on the
AllShare Play
previous AllShare Play functionality. It
includes features such as Web storage
integration and social networking
integration. This is a Web service
that requires using a Samsung account.
Important! You must first connect both of your communicating
devices to the same Wi-Fi and be using an
active/registered Samsung account prior to using
this application.
The Samsung account manages the access information
(username/password) to several applications, such as
Samsung Link.
146
Important! You must first connect both of your communicating
devices to the same Wi-Fi. For more information,
refer to “Wi-Fi Settings” on page 176.
1. From the Home screen, tap
(Samsung Link).
(Apps) ➔
2. If prompted with an on-screen notification about no
Wi-Fi detected, tap Cancel (to continue by using your
network connection) or Connect to continue.
3. Tap Sign in.
4. If prompted to log into your Samsung account, tap Sign
in and follow the on-screen instructions.
6. Scroll across the application screen to view either
MY RECENT CONTENT or DEVICES & STORAGE.The
DEVICES & STORAGE list contains two separate
streaming media options:
• Registered devices allows you to stream/share selected
multimedia content from your device to DLNA compliant device
connected to the same Wireless Access Point.
• Registered storage: allows you to receive and playback media
stored externally (server, laptop, etc.) directly on your device by
allowing you to add a Web storage service for streaming
content.
Note: If the main screen still shows a Sign in box, close the
application and restart it.
5. Follow the on-screen prompts.
Applications
147
Configuring Samsung Link Settings
The Samsung Link™ application must first be configured
prior to its initial use. You must setup parameters such as
connected Wi-Fi, Items to share, source server address, and
external device acceptance rights.
1. From the Home screen, tap
(Apps) ➔
(Samsung Link) ➔ DEVICES & STORAGE tab.
(Menu) and then tap Settings and configure
2. Press
the following settings as desired:
• Registered storage: allows you to add a Web storage location.
Without a storage service/location added, you will not be able
to use Samsung Link.
• My device: allows you to alter the device name.
• Save to: allows you to save your media to your internal phone
memory or to an SD card.
• Auto upload: allows you to enable automatic upload of images
from your device to those storage locations specified within the
Web storage list. Move the slider to the on position to activate
the feature.
148
• Video optimization: allows you to setup the video quality for
streamed video content. Move the slider to the on position to
activate the feature.
• Password lock: allows you to restrict access to Samsung Link
by requiring a user enter the currently active and associated
Samsung account password. Move the slider to the on position
to activate the feature.
• My account: displays Samsung account information.
• Customer support: displays Customer FAQ information.
• About this service: displays application information.
Setting Up Web Storage
Web storage services allow you to use storage space to store
your files and share them on the “Cloud”.
Note: If you are using another Web storage service, log into
that service first before using Samsung Link.
1. From the Home screen, tap
(Samsung Link).
(Apps) ➔
Note: When adding storage, an N Drive is added.
2. If not already signed into your Cloud storage, tap
(Register storage) ➔ Sign in to your desired service.
Choose from: SugarSync, Dropbox, or SkyDrive.
– or –
4. Once the process is successfully completed, the Web
storage icon or name appears in the Web storage area
of the main screen.
5. From the main screen, select a connected device and
then tap on the media that you would like to share.
• A file with
in the upper-left indicates it is stored remotely
on a Web storage location. Selecting this media causes your
device to access the file currently stored on your services’
servers.
To de-register Web storage service:
1. From the Samsung Link application, press
and then tap Settings ➔ Registered storage.
(Menu)
2. Select Deregister.
3. Select a current storage service and tap OK.
(Menu) and then tap Settings ➔ Registered
Presss
(Register storage).
storage ➔
3. Follow the on-screen instructions to register or log into
your cloud service.
Applications
149
Sharing Media via Samsung Link to a Target
Device
Important! Make sure all communicating devices are
connected to the same Wi-Fi.
1. Launch AllShare Play/Samsung Link on the target
device (such as an Internet TV, Samsung Tablet, etc.).
2. From the Home screen, tap
(Samsung Link).
(Apps) ➔
5. Tap an available on-screen file, image, or video to
place a green check mark alongside it.
6. Tap
(Stream to connected devices) and select an
available target device to begin streaming.
7. On a target device (ex: Internet TV) select the
on-screen Allow button to continue.
Note: At this stage your device is requesting access to share
media with the external source.
8.
Note: You must be signed in to your Samsung Account before
you can use this feature.
3. Tap DEVICES & STORAGE and select your device name
from the Registered devices area.
4. Tap an available category tab (Pictures, Music, Video,
or Files) and select a file.
• A file with
in the upper-left indicates it is stored remotely
on a Web storage location. Selecting this media causes your
device to access the file currently stored on your services’
servers.
150
Confirm
(Samsung Link Controller enabled)
appears in the Notification area at the top of the device
to indicate you are using your device as the media
source.
Settings
This app navigates to the sound and phone settings for your
phone. It includes such settings as: display, security,
memory, and any extra settings associated with your phone.
For more information, refer to “Changing Your Settings” on
page 175.
Story Album
With Story Album, you can create a digital Album of your
story in media. Special moments will be on a timeline, and if
you wish, you can have your album published as a hard copy.
1. From the Home screen, tap
(Apps) ➔
(Story Album).
2. Read the introductory information and tap Next.
3. Tap Start to begin your Story Album.
4. Follow the on-screen instructions.
5. Press
(Menu) ➔ Help for additional information.
TripAdvisor
With the TripAdvisor, you can plan and have your perfect trip.
With over 75 million reviews and opinions by travelers, it is
easy to find the best hotels, restaurants, and fun things to do.
1. From the Home screen, tap
(Apps) ➔
(TripAdvisor).
2. Sign in with your Samsung Account if you have not
already done so.
Video
The Video application plays video files stored on your phone
or microSD card.
(Video).
1. From the Home screen, tap
(Apps) ➔
All videos that you have on your phone and memory
card will be displayed.
2. Tap the video that you want to play.
The video will begin to play.
3. The following video controls are available:
Pause the video.
Start the video after being paused.
Press and hold to rewind the video. Tap to
go to previous video.
Press and hold to fast-forward the video.
Tap to go to next video.
Volume control.
3. Follow the on-screen instructions to use TripAdvisor.
4. Press
(Menu) for additional options.
Applications
151
PIP (Picture In Picture) view. The video will
be played in a small window so you can use
your phone for other purposes while watching
the video. Double-tap screen to return to
previous size.
Original size view. The video will be played in
its original size.
Full-screen in ratio view. The video is
enlarged as much as possible without
becoming distorted.
View mode.
Full-screen view. The entire screen is used,
which may cause some minor distortion.
Streams the video to another device via
Samsung Link.
Note: The screen view icons are a three-way toggle. The icon
that is displayed, is the mode that will appear after the
icon is tapped.
4. Press
152
(Menu) for additional options.
Sharing Videos
1. From the Home screen, tap
(Apps) ➔
(Video).
After a few seconds, each on-screen video begins to
cycle through a preview of the first five seconds of the
clip.
2. Press
(Menu) and then tap Share via.
3. Select either individual videos or tap Select all ➔ Done
to complete the process or Cancel to quit.
4. Select a sharing option. Choose from: Add to Dropbox,
Bluetooth, ChatON, Email, Gmail, Google+, Messaging,
Picasa, Wi-Fi Direct, or YouTube.
Visual Voicemail
Visual Voicemail enables users to view a list of people who
left a voicemail message, and listen to the any message they
want without being limited to chronological order.
1. From the Home screen, tap
(Apps) ➔
(Visual Voicemail).
2. Read the on-screen information and tap Next.
Note: You must subscribe to the Visual Voicemail service to
use this feature. Charges may apply. Please contact your
service provider for further details.
3. Tap an on-screen voicemail message to play it back.
To check Visual Voicemail messages:
1. From the Home screen, tap
(Visual Voicemail).
(Apps) ➔
2. Tap the voicemail message you want to play.
3. Tap
(Play).
To delete Visual Voicemail messages:
1. From the Home screen, tap
(Visual Voicemail).
(Apps) ➔
2. Tap the voicemail message you want to delete.
3. Tap
(Delete) ➔ OK.
Voice Recorder
The Voice Recorder allows you to record an audio file up to
one minute long and then immediately share it using Wi-Fi
Direct, Messaging, Gmail, or via Bluetooth. Recording time
will vary based on the available memory within the phone.
1. From the Home screen, tap
(Apps) ➔
(Voice Recorder).
2. To start recording, tap Record
microphone.
and speak into the
Applications
153
3. During the recording process you can either tap Stop
to
to stop and save the recording or Pause
temporarily halt the recording. After pausing, tap
Record
to resume recording. Once the audio
recording has stopped, the message is automatically
to cancel the recording
saved. Tap Cancel
without saving.
to display a list of all your voice
4. Tap List
recordings. Tap a voice recording to play it.
5. On the top-right corner of the display, is the recording
and
quality icon. Tap to toggle between Normal
High
quality recording.
6. Press
154
(Menu) for additional options.
Voice Search
The Google Voice Search application allows you to search the
web using only your voice.
1. From the Home screen, tap
(Apps) ➔
(Voice Search).
2. When prompted, speak into the built-in microphone.
• Use the on-screen options to find a matching search
term.
VPN Client
Initial Configuration
This is a full-featured VPN Client that provides support for the
latest IPSec VPN standards and provides interoperability with
support for all major VPN Gateways.
1. From the Home screen, tap
1. Sign into your Samsung account.
2. From the Home screen, tap
(WatchON).
(Apps) ➔
(Apps) ➔
(VPN Client).
2. Follow the on-screen instructions to configure the VPN
Client.
• Options include: Add VPN Connection or My VPN Connections.
WatchON
With the WatchON application, you can use your phone as a
remote control for your TV.
Important! Before initiating use, verify you have an active
Internet connection available (either mobile
network or Wi-Fi connection).
Note: Before beginning your initial WatchON application setup,
confirm your TV is turned off.
Note: If you are not connected to an active Wi-Fi, you may be
prompted to continue the set up process via a mobile
network. Click Connect to proceed.
3. Tap Select country or region then choose a country.
4. Enter your current zip code and tap Done. This zip code
must correspond to the location of your desired TV and
set top box.
5. From the Find your TV service screen, select a service
provider from the available channel listing.
6. From the Personalize screen, you can either follow the
on-screen prompts to personalize your desired content
or tap Skip to continue without customizing your
content.
7. Read the on-screen Peel agreement and tap Agree to
complete the set up process.
Applications
155
Customizing Your Remote
1. From the top of the main screen, tap
Control) ➔ Set Up Now.
(Remote
2. From the Select your TV Brand screen, tap your TV’s
manufacturer name.
• If you have a brand of TV not listed or you are using a projector,
select from one of the following two options. Choose from
either Show other brands or I have a home projector.
3. Aim your device at the TV and tap
(Power) to
confirm the set up process completed successfully and
the correct TV IR codes were selected.
Note: The process of the initial TV activation can take up to 10
seconds. Please do not press the button again.
4. If the TV turned on, tap Yes.
– or –
If the TV did not turn on after tapping
waiting 10 seconds, tap No or Retry.
156
(Power) and
5. From the Select your channel source screen, select the
entry that corresponds to your current channel control
method:
• Set-top Box: selected when changing channels is done via a
receiver box. Channels are not changed via the TV remote but
rather through the receiver/box.
• My xxx TV: selected when a signal is fed directly into the TV
and no box is used. Channels are changed directly on the TV by
using the TV remote and not a box’s remote.
Note: Try matching your current channel selection method.
6. Select the Satellite Box Brand from the available list.
• If your brand does not appear in the list, tap Other Satellite
Box Brands and follow the on-screen instructions.
Important! You must configure your set top box for IR
communication with your device. If you do not
select More Info below and follow the on-screen
instructions you may not be able to properly use
the application.
7. When prompted to Enable IR, tap More info to learn
how to configure your set top box to receive and
respond to IR controls.
8. Once configured, tap the on-screen Channel button to
confirm functionality. Tap an on-screen confirmation
option.
9. Only after completing the IR setup process and
(Menu).
programming your box, press
Note: This IR programming of your set top box is a one-time
process and once successful should not need to be
repeated.
Using WatchON
To change channels:
1. Sign into your Samsung account.
2. From the Home screen, tap
(WatchON).
(Apps) ➔
3. From the top of the main screen, tap
(Remote
Control). This launches an on-screen remote control.
• Easy remote: provides the most common used control
features. Scroll down to view additional functions.
4. In a single motion touch and drag up from the
bottom-right of the screen to access additional remote
tabs Choose from one of the following:
• TV: provides access to control functions specific to your TV.
• [Set top box]: displays customized control specific to your
configured set top box. Ex: satellite dish remote control
functions.
5. From the remote screen press
(Menu) and then
tap
(Change room) to choose from different
receivers/boxes in different rooms. Ex: Living Room
box, Bedroom box, etc.
6. Press
(Menu) to return to the main menu.
Locating your favorite programming:
1. Sign into your Samsung account.
2. From the Home screen, tap
(WatchON).
(Apps) ➔
3. From the main screen tap
(Combined View) to
reveal available media categories.
Applications
157
Personalize WatchON
4. Select an available category.
– or –
Tap Channel Guide to display on your TV an on-screen
listing of available set top box shows.
5. For additional information on the WatchON application,
(Menu) and then select Help.
press
WatchOn Settings
1. From the Home screen, tap
(WatchON).
(Apps) ➔
(Menu) and then select an available on2. Press
screen option:
• Change room: allows you to select a previously configured
room.
• Edit channels: allows you to add or remove channels from
your custom list. Press and hold a channel number to update
the channel number.
• Settings: provides access to the Samsung WatchOn settings
menu.
• About: displays on-screen information about the application.
• Help: displays on-screen help information.
158
You can personalize your application to do things such as
show content only from your selected media categories, or
add an additional room’s set top box.
To configure your Just for you settings:
The Just for you option displays available content matching
your activated media categories. These categories can be
configured during your initial set up or at any later time.
1. Sign into your Samsung account.
2. From the Home screen, tap
(WatchON).
(Apps) ➔
3. From the main screen tap
Just for you.
(Combined View) ➔
4. From the On TV tab, press
Settings.
(Menu) and then select
5. Access parameters such as Basic info, Genres and
Sports to then configure and enable those parameters
you would like to show in the Just for you tab.
YouTube
To add a new room:
Your device can be used to control boxes/receivers from
several rooms. You could go from controlling your set top box
in your living room and then move into your bedroom to do
the same.
1. Sign into your Samsung account.
2. From the Home screen, tap
(WatchON).
3. From the On TV tab, press
Settings ➔ Add room.
(Apps) ➔
(Menu) and then select
YouTube™ is a video sharing website on which users can
upload and share videos. The site is used to display a wide
variety of user-generated video content, including movie
clips, TV clips, and music videos, as well as video content
such as video blogging, informational shorts and other
original videos.
Note: YouTube is a data-intensive feature. It is recommended
that you upgrade to a large data plan to avoid additional
data charges.
4. Name the new room and tap Next.
5. Enter your current zip code and tap Done. This zip code
must correspond to the location of your desired TV and
set top box.
6. Follow steps 4-10 starting on page 155 to complete
the process.
1. From the Home screen, tap
(YouTube).
(Apps) ➔
2. At the You Tube introduction screen, tap OK.
to search for specific videos,
3. Tap the search field
scroll down to browse through the main page
thumbnails, or scroll to the bottom to explore additional
options.
4. To view a video, tap an available preview thumbnail or
tap the title link.
5. Press
(Menu) for additional options.
Applications
159
Note: Preloading YouTube videos will use some of your
device’s storage space and may result in additional
charges if your Wi-Fi plan is not unlimited.
• Connected TVs
– Allows you to pair your device to a wireless TV running a
YouTube application. Options include Add a TV and Edit TVs.
• Search
To configure YouTube Settings:
searches from showing up in the YouTube search box.
– Never remember history allows you to force YouTube to never
– High quality on mobile, when enabled, allows you to start all
– SafeSearch filtering allows you to configure block settings for
videos in high quality mode while you are connected to a mobile
network.
videos containing restricted content. This option blocks these
videos from appearing within your search results. Choose from:
Don’t filter, Moderate, or Strict.
– Caption font size allows you to set the font size used by
on-screen captions. Choose from: Small, Medium, Large, or
Huge.
– Uploads specifies network preferences for uploads.
– Content localization allows you to prioritize channels and
videos from a specific country or region.
– Improve YouTube allows you to anonymously send YouTube
information to help improve the application.
160
– Clear search history allows you to clear previous YouTube
Press
(Menu) and then tap Settings and configure
the following parameters:
• General
store search history information.
• Preloading
– Preload subscriptions allows you to preload (or go get videos
while on Wi-Fi and charging) your subscription videos.
– Preload watch later allows you to enable the preload function
on selected videos so you can watch them later. Read the data
usage information and tap OK to accept the terms.
Note: Preloading YouTube videos will use some of your
device’s storage space and may result in additional
charges if your Wi-Fi plan is not unlimited.
• About
– Help provides answers to most YouTube questions.
– Feedback allows you to provide user feedback to YouTube.
– Google Mobile Terms of Service
– YouTube Terms of Service
– Google Mobile Privacy Policy
– YouTube Privacy Policy
– Open source licenses
– App version displays the software version for the current
YouTube application.
To watch a high quality video:
Press
(Menu) and then tap Settings ➔ General ➔
High quality on mobile.
Applications
161
Section 8: Connections
This section describes the various connections your phone
can make including accessing Wi-Fi, Bluetooth, and
Connecting your PC.
Wi-Fi
About Wi-Fi
Wi-Fi (short for "wireless fidelity"and sometimes referred to
as wifi) is a term used for certain types of Wireless Local
Area Networks (WLAN). These device types use an 802.11
wireless specification to transmit and receive wireless data.
Wi-Fi communication requires access to an existing and
accessible Wireless Access Point (WAP). These WAPs can
either be Open (unsecured) as within most Hot Spots, or
Secured (requiring knowledge of the Router name and
password).
For more information, refer to “WPS Push Button” on page
177.
Turning Wi-Fi On
By default, your device’s Wi-Fi feature is turned off. Turning
Wi-Fi on makes your device able to discover and connect to
compatible in-range WAPs.
1. From the Home screen, tap
(Apps) ➔ Settings ➔
(Connections tab) ➔ Wi-Fi.
2. Tap the ON/OFF slider, located to the right of the Wi-Fi
field, to turn Wi-Fi ON
.
Connect to a Wi-Fi Network
1. From the Home screen, tap
(Apps) ➔ Settings ➔
(Connections tab) ➔ Wi-Fi.
The network names and security settings (Open
network or Secured with WEP) of detected Wi-Fi
networks are displayed in the Wi-Fi networks section.
2. Tap the network you want to connect to.
For more information, refer to “WPS PIN Entry” on page 178.
Note: When you select an open network, you will be
automatically connected to the network.
3. Enter a wireless password if necessary.
162
Manually add your new network connection
Turning Wi-Fi Off
1. From the Home screen, tap
(Apps) ➔ Settings ➔
(Connections tab) ➔ Wi-Fi.
1. From the Home screen, tap
(Apps) ➔ Settings ➔
(Connections tab) ➔ Wi-Fi.
2. Tap Add Wi-Fi network.
2. Tap the ON/OFF slider, located to the right of the Wi-Fi
field, to turn Wi-Fi OFF
.
3. Enter the Network SSID. This is the name of your
Wireless Access Point.
4. Tap the Security field and select a security option. This
must match the current security setting on your target
WAP.
5. If secured, you will also need to enter your WAP’s
password.
6. Tap Show advanced options, if you need to add
advanced options such as Proxy settings, IP settings,
or Key management.
Note: Use of wireless data connections such as Wi-Fi and
Bluetooth can cause an added drain to your battery and
reduce your use times.
Manually Scan for a Wi-Fi Network
1. From the Home screen, tap
(Apps) ➔ Settings ➔
(Connections tab) ➔ Wi-Fi.
2. Tap Scan.
All available Wi-Fi networks are displayed.
7. Tap Connect to store the new information and connect
to your target WAP.
Note: The next time your device connects to a previously
accessed or secured wireless network, you are not
prompted to enter the WAP key again, unless you reset
your device back to its factory default settings.
Connections
163
Wi-Fi Status Indicators
The following icons show your Wi-Fi connection status at a
glance:
Displays when Wi-Fi is connected, active, and
communicating with a Wireless Access Point
(WAP).
Displays when there is a Wi-Fi access point
available but you are not connected to it. May also
display if there is a communication issue with the
target Wireless Access Point (WAP).
Displays when connected to another device using
Wi-Fi Direct. For more information, refer to “Wi-Fi
Direct” on page 165.
Wi-Fi Advanced Settings
The Advanced Wi-Fi menu allows you to set up many of your
device’s advanced Wi-Fi services.
1. From the Home screen, tap
(Apps) ➔ Settings ➔
(Connections tab) ➔ Wi-Fi.
2. Press
(Menu) ➔ Advanced.
The following options are available:
• Network notification: alerts you when a new WAP is available.
• Passpoint: allows you to connect to passpoint-enabled Wi-Fi
Access Points automatically. Touch and slide the slider to the
right to turn it on
.
• Keep Wi-Fi on during sleep: allows you to specify when to
disconnect from Wi-Fi.
• Auto network switch: allows you to be automatically
connected to an Wi-Fi Hotspot as soon as your phone detects
it.
• MAC address: view your device’s MAC address, required
when connecting to some secured networks (not configurable).
• IP address: view your device’s IP address.
164
Wi-Fi Direct
Wi-Fi Direct allows device-to-device connections so you can
transfer large amounts of data over a Wi-Fi connection.
Note: See your service plan for applicable charges for Wi-Fi
Direct.
1. From the Home screen, tap
(Apps) ➔ Settings ➔
(Connections tab) ➔ Wi-Fi.
2. Tap the ON/OFF slider, located to the right of the Wi-Fi
field, to turn Wi-Fi ON
.
3. At the bottom of the Wi-Fi screen, tap the Wi-Fi Direct
button.
4. Repeat steps 1 - 3 on the other device you want to
connect with. The steps on a different model of phone,
may be different.
5. On your phone, tap Scan.
The device scans for other Wi-Fi Direct devices.
6. Once the device you want to connect to is displayed,
tap on it.
8. Once connected, the other device will show as
Connected in your list of Wi-Fi Direct devices and the
icon will display at the top of your screen.
9. For additional information about Wi-Fi Direct, press
(Menu) ➔ Help.
Sharing Information with Connected Device
To share Videos, Photos, or other information with the
connected device:
1. View the information that you want to share. For
example, if you want to share a photo, find the photo in
your camera viewer or My Files folder, then tap the
Share, Share via, or Send via option.
2. Tap the Wi-Fi Direct option.
3. Tap the connected device name. For example,
Android_XXX.
4. Tap Done.
5. The file is transferred and the other device will receive
a screen notification that a Wi-Fi file has been
received. The file can be found in My Files ➔ All files
➔ Device storage in the ShareViaWifi folder.
7. The other device has 2 minutes to tap Accept for the
connection to be made.
Connections
165
Note: Depending on the other device model, the prompts and
shared folder information may differ.
NFC
NFC (Near Field Communication) allows data exchange when
you touch your device with another compatible device. This
is used for applications such as S Beam and Android Beam.
To activate NFC on your device, see “NFC” on page 188.
Bluetooth
About Bluetooth
Bluetooth is a short-range communications technology that
allows you to connect wirelessly to a number of Bluetooth
devices, such as headsets and hands-free car kits, and
Bluetooth-enabled handhelds, computers, printers, and
wireless devices. The Bluetooth communication range is
usually up to approximately 30 feet.
Turning Bluetooth On and Off
To turn Bluetooth on:
1. From the Home screen, tap
(Connections tab).
(Apps) ➔ Settings ➔
2. Tap the ON/OFF slider, located to the right of the
Bluetooth field, to turn Bluetooth ON
.
When active,
appears within the Status area.
To turn Bluetooth off:
1. From the Home screen, tap
(Connections tab).
(Apps) ➔ Settings ➔
2. Tap the ON/OFF slider, located to the right of the
Bluetooth field, to turn Bluetooth OFF
.
Bluetooth Status Indicators
The following icons show your Bluetooth connection status
at a glance:
Displays when Bluetooth is active.
Displays when Bluetooth is connected (paired) and
communicating.
166
Bluetooth Settings
The Bluetooth settings menu allows you to set up many of
the characteristics of your device’s Bluetooth service,
including:
• Entering or changing the name your device uses for Bluetooth
communication and description
• Setting your device’s visibility (or “discoverability”) for other
Bluetooth devices
2. Select a time that you would like your device visibility
to time-out.
To show received files:
To access the Bluetooth Settings menu:
1. From the Home screen, tap
(Apps) ➔ Settings ➔
(Connections tab).
2. Verify your Bluetooth is ON
To make your device visible:
1. From the Bluetooth settings page, press
(Menu) ➔
Visibility timeout.
• Making your device visible allows it to be detected by other
devices for pairing and communication.
.
3. Tap Bluetooth.
To change your Bluetooth name:
1. From the Home screen, tap
(Apps) ➔ Settings ➔
(More tab) ➔ About device ➔ Device name.
More
From the Bluetooth settings page, press
Received files.
(Menu) ➔
A list of all files received from Bluetooth is displayed.
To scan for Bluetooth devices:
1. Verify your Bluetooth is active.
2. From the Bluetooth settings page, tap Scan to search
for visible external Bluetooth-compatible devices such
as headsets, devices, printers, and computers.
2. Use the keyboard to modify your device name and tap
OK.
Connections
167
Pairing Bluetooth Devices
The Bluetooth pairing process allows you to establish trusted
connections between your device and another Bluetooth
device. When you pair devices, they share a passkey,
allowing for fast, secure connections while bypassing the
discovery and authentication process.
To pair your device with another Bluetooth device:
1. Verify your Bluetooth is active.
2. Tap Scan. Your device will display a list of discovered
in-range Bluetooth devices.
3. Tap a device from the list to initiate pairing.
4. Enter the passkey or PIN code, if needed, and tap OK.
5. The external device will then have to also accept the
connection and enter your device’s PIN code.
Once successfully paired to an external device,
appears within the Status area.
Note: Due to different specifications and features of other
Bluetooth-compatible devices, display and operations
may be different, and functions such as transfer or
exchange may not be possible with all Bluetooth
compatible devices.
168
Note: Pairing between two Bluetooth devices is a one-time
process. Once a pairing has been created, the devices
will continue to recognize their partnership and
exchange information without having to re-enter a
passcode again.
Disconnecting a paired device
Disconnecting a paired device breaks the connection
between the device and your phone, but retains the
knowledge of the pairing. At a later point when you wish to
reconnect the device, there is no need to setup the
connection information again.
1. Verify your Bluetooth is active.
2. From the Bluetooth settings page, tap the previously
paired device (from the bottom of the page).
3. Tap OK to confirm disconnection.
Note: Disconnections are manually done but often occur
automatically if the paired device goes out of range of
your phone or it is powered off.
Deleting a paired device (unpair)
Deleting a device from your list removes its “connection
record” and upon reconnection would require that you reenter all the previous pairing information.
1. Verify your Bluetooth is active.
2. From the Bluetooth settings page, tap
next to the
previously paired device. This opens the connected
device’s menu options.
3. Tap Unpair to delete the paired device.
4. Tap Rename to change the name of the paired device.
5. Tap Call audio to enable or disable call audio from the
paired device.
6. Tap Media audio to enable or disable media audio from
the paired device.
Sending Contacts via Bluetooth
Depending on your paired devices’ settings and capabilities,
you may be able to send pictures, Contact information, or
other items using a Bluetooth connection.
Note: Prior to using this feature, Bluetooth must first be
enabled, and the recipient’s device must be visible.
1. Verify your Bluetooth is active.
2. From the Home screen, tap
3. Press
(Contacts).
(Menu) ➔ Share namecard via.
4. Tap each contact that you would like to send via
Bluetooth. A green checkmark will appear next to each
entry you select.
5. Tap Done.
6. Tap Bluetooth.
7. Select the paired device to send the contacts to.
Note: The external Bluetooth device must be visible and
communicating for the pairing to be successful.
Connections
169
8. A Bluetooth share notification will appear in your
notifications list.
PC Connections
You can connect your device to a PC using your PC data
cable using various USB connection modes.
Storage: allows you to use the onboard storage capacity of
the phone to store and upload files. This option allows your
computer to detect the phone as a removable storage drive.
Kies: allows you to manage music, movies and photos. You
can also backup precious contacts and calendars, download
apps and podcasts and automatically upgrade device
firmware. Kies conveniently syncs your life across all your
devices.
Note: To sync your device to your PC, it is highly
recommended that you install Samsung Kies which is
available at http://www.samsung.com/kies (for Windows/
Mac).
Note: If you are a Windows XP user, ensure that you have
Windows XP Service Pack 3 or higher installed on your
computer. Also, ensure that you have Samsung Kies 2.0
or Windows Media Player 10 or higher installed on your
computer.
Connecting as a Storage Device
You can connect your device to a PC as a removable disk and
access the file directory. If you insert a memory card in the
device, you can also access the files directory from the
memory card by using the device as a memory card reader.
Note: The file directory of the memory card displays as a
removable disk, separate from the internal memory.
1. Connect the USB cable to the device and connect the
cable to the computer. After a few seconds, a pop-up
window displays on the PC when connected.
2. On the PC pop-up, click Open device to view files.
3. Copy files from the PC to the memory card.
170
Mobile Hotspot
This feature allows you to turn your device into a Wi-Fi
Hotspot. The feature works best when used in conjunction
with 4G/LTE data services (although 3G service can also be
used).
The Mobile Hotspot connectivity is a wireless version of this
same functionality and allows you to provide Internet
connectivity to multiple devices.
Important! The Mobile Hotspot service can not be active at the
same time as Wi-Fi. Please close your Wi-Fi
connection prior to launching this service.
Note: You must have a tethering plan on your account in order
to use the Mobile Hotspot. You cannot use data on the
device while using Mobile Hotspot.
To activate the Mobile Hotspot service:
1. From the Home screen, tap
(Apps) ➔ Settings ➔
(Connections tab) ➔ More networks ➔ Tethering
and Mobile Hotspot.
2. In a single motion touch and slide the Mobile Hotspot
slider to the right to turn it on.
3. Edit the Network SSID name and then write it down.
4. Enable the Broadcast network name (SSID) field if you
would like to broadcast your SSID name to nearby
devices.
5. Verify the Security field is set to WPA2 PSK.
6. Enter a new password then write it down.
– Additional options include Show password and Show advanced
options.
7. Tap Save to store the new settings.
8. Confirm the Mobile HotSpot active icon
at the top of the screen.
appears
Note: By default, prior to the initial setup process, the
connection is unsecure. It is recommended you create
your own password prior to your initial connection.
Connections
171
Note: The Mobile Hotspot drains your device’s battery at a
much faster rate than when using any other feature
combination. The best way to keep using the device as a
Hotspot is to have it connected to a power supply.
To change the Mobile Hotspot password:
1. From the Home screen, tap
(Apps) ➔ Settings ➔
(Connections tab) ➔ More networks ➔ Tethering
and Mobile Hotspot.
2. Tap the Mobile Hotspot field and then select Configure.
To connect to the Mobile Hotspot:
1. Enable Wi-Fi (wireless) functionality on your target
device (laptop, media device, etc.).
2. Scan for Wi-Fi networks from the external device and
select your device’s Mobile Hotspot name from the
network list.
• The SSID name for your device’s hotspot is determined by what
you entered into the Network SSID field.
• You can change the name by tapping Configure ➔ Network
SSID and changing the entry.
3. Select this Hotspot and follow your on-screen
instructions to complete the connection.
4. Launch your Web browser to confirm you have an
Internet connection.
172
3. Tap the Security field and select WPA2 PSK.
4. With security enabled, delete the previous password
and enter a new one into the Password field.
Important! The more complex the password, the harder it will
be for intruders to break your security. It is
recommended that you not use names, birthdays,
or other personal information.
5. Tap Save to store the new settings.
To manage connected devices:
This feature allows you to provide MAC filtering on your
device. This is similar to a “VIP list” where only device on the
list are allowed access.
1. From the Home screen, tap
(Apps) ➔
(Mobile Hotspot).
2. Tap Allowed devices.
3. Tap
(Add new device) to add devices to the
allowed for connection list.
4. Enter the Device name and Mac address.
5. Tap OK to save the new device.
USB Tethering
This option allows you to share your device’s mobile data
connection via a direct USB connection between your device
and a single computer. The Mobile HotSpot connectivity is a
wireless version of this same functionality and allows you to
provide Internet connectivity to multiple devices.
Note: You can not mount your device’s microSD card to your
computer while using the USB tethering feature.
If additional software or USB drivers are required,
navigate to: http://www.samsung.com/us/support/
downloads.
Connections
173
To connect using USB Tethering:
1. From the Home screen, tap
(Apps) ➔ Settings ➔
(Connections tab) ➔ More networks ➔ Tethering
and Mobile Hotspot.
To disconnect tethering:
1. From the Home screen, tap
(Apps) ➔ Settings ➔
(Connections tab) ➔ More networks ➔ Tethering
and Mobile Hotspot.
2. Plug in the USB cable between your computer and your
device.
2. Tap USB tethering from the Tethering menu to remove
the check mark and deactivate the feature.
3. Tap USB tethering from the Tethering menu. This places
a green check mark next to the entry and activates the
feature. A Tethering or HotSpot active notification
briefly appears on the screen.
Look for the Tethering active icon
in the Status
bar area of the screen.
3. Remove the USB cable from the device.
4. Read the on-screen notification regarding data use and
tap OK.
174
Section 9: Changing Your Settings
This section explains the settings used for customizing your
device.
Accessing Settings
From any Home screen, tap
(Settings).
– or –
From any Home screen, press
(Apps) ➔
(Menu) ➔ Settings.
Settings Tabs
The Settings are divided into 4 main groups. When the
Settings screen displays, the following 4 tabs are located at
the top of the screen:
Connections:
This tab allows you to see all of settings related to
the connection of your device to external sources.
Features include: Wi-Fi, Bluetooth, Data usage,
More networks (Airplane mode, Mobile networks,
Tethering and Mobile Hotspot, VPN, and
Wi-Fi Calling), NFC, S Beam, Nearby devices, Screen
Mirroring, and Kies via Wi-Fi.
My device
My device:
This tab provides access to device configuration
and customization features. Features include:
Lock screen, Display, LED indicator, Sound, Home
screen mode, Call, Blocking mode, Driving mode,
Power saving mode, Accessory, Accessibility,
One-handed operation, Language and input,
Motions and gestures, Smart screen, Air view, and
Voice control.
Accounts:
This tab provides both the ability to create and
modify your accounts (example; Samsung account,
Email, Google account, etc.), Cloud, and access
Backup and reset features.
Changing Your Settings
175
More
More:
This tab provides access to the remaining set of
device settings not listed under the other three tabs.
These include Location services, Security,
Application manager, Battery, Storage, Date and
time, and About device.
Note: The settings for your device are described below in the
order that they appear within the Settings menu. Options
under the Connections tab are listed first, followed by
My device, Accounts, and More settings.
Wi-Fi Settings
This section describes the Wi-Fi settings. For information on
how to use Wi-Fi, see “Wi-Fi” on page 162.
Activating Wi-Fi
1. From the Home screen, tap
(Apps) ➔ Settings ➔
(Connections tab) ➔ Wi-Fi.
2. Tap the ON/OFF slider, located to the right of the Wi-Fi
field, to turn Wi-Fi ON
.
176
3. Tap Scan to scan for available Wi-Fi networks. For more
information, refer to “Connect to a Wi-Fi Network” on
page 162.
Activating Wi-Fi Direct
Wi-Fi Direct allows device-to-device connections so you can
transfer large amounts of data over a Wi-Fi connection.
1. From the Home screen, tap
(Apps) ➔ Settings ➔
(Connections tab) ➔ Wi-Fi.
2. At the bottom of the Wi-Fi screen, tap the Wi-Fi Direct
button.
For more information, refer to “Wi-Fi Direct” on page
165.
Advanced Wi-Fi Settings
The advanced Wi-Fi settings allow you to set up and manage
wireless access points.
1. From the Home screen, tap
(Apps) ➔ Settings ➔
(Connections tab) ➔ Wi-Fi.
2. Press
(Menu) ➔ Advanced.
The following options are available:
WPS Push Button
The WPS (Wi-Fi Protected Setup) feature (sometimes
associated with a physical or on-screen button on most
WAPs) allows you to pair your device and WAP without the
need for entering a passcode. This process is similar to Wi-Fi
Direct pairing.
In this case, once the WPS feature is active on your WAP,
your device can then detect it and then immediately pair to it.
• Network notification: alerts you when a new WAP is available.
• Passpoint: allows you to connect to passpoint-enabled Wi-Fi
Access Points automatically. Touch and slide the slider to the
right to turn it on.
• Keep Wi-Fi on during sleep: allows you to specify when to
disconnect from Wi-Fi.
• Auto network switch: allows you to be automatically
connected to an Wi-Fi Hotspot as soon as your phone detects
it.
• MAC address: view your device’s MAC address, required
when connecting to some secured networks (not configurable).
• IP address: view your device’s IP address.
Note: WPS-capable routers appear in the Wi-Fi list of available
devices with the term (WPS available) below their name.
To pair your device using WPS:
1. Follow the WPS activation instructions specific to your
Wireless Access Point.
2. From the Home screen, tap
(Apps) ➔ Settings ➔
(Connections tab) ➔ Wi-Fi.
3. Press
(Menu) then tap WPS push button.
4. Once the connection is complete, confirm the external
router now appears in the Wi-Fi list as connected.
Changing Your Settings
177
WPS PIN Entry
If a WPS Push Button does not work, there is an alternative
WPS connection method where you would use a device
generated PIN number to establish the connection. This
number is then entered into your WAP’s WPS client PIN field
to complete the connection.
To pair your device using WPS PIN:
1. From the Home screen, tap
(Apps) ➔ Settings ➔
(Connections tab) ➔ Wi-Fi.
2. Press
(Menu) then tap WPS PIN entry.
3. Write down the generate PIN number and enter it into
your Wi-Fi Router’s client PIN field.
• Once the connection is complete, confirm the
external router now appears in the Wi-Fi list as
connected.
Bluetooth settings
In this menu you can activate Bluetooth, view or assign a
device name, activate your phone so other Bluetooth devices
can discover it, or scan for other, available Bluetooth devices
with which to pair.
Activating Bluetooth
1. From the Home screen, tap
(Connections tab).
(Apps) ➔ Settings ➔
2. Tap the ON/OFF slider, located to the right of the
Bluetooth field, to turn Bluetooth ON
.
The Bluetooth icon
is displayed on the status bar.
Additional Bluetooth Settings
When Bluetooth is on, additional settings are available.
1. From the Home screen, tap
(Apps) ➔ Settings ➔
(Connections tab) ➔ Bluetooth.
2. Tap Scan to scan for nearby discoverable devices. After
searching, tap a device to pair with it. For more
information, refer to “Pairing Bluetooth Devices” on
page 168.
178
3. Press
(Menu) and select a Bluetooth setting to
configure:
• Visibility timeout: Use this setting to control when to
automatically turn off the Discoverable option: 2 minutes,
5 minutes, 1 hour, or Never timeout.
• Received files: Shows the list of files received by using
Bluetooth.
4. Tap the checkbox next to the device name to remove
the checkmark if you do not want your phone visible to
other Bluetooth devices.
Changing the Device Name
1. From the Home screen, tap
(Apps) ➔ Settings ➔
(More tab) ➔ About device.
More
2. Tap the Device name field and use the on-screen
keyboard to edit the current device name.
3. Tap
to erase the current device name and enter
a new name for this device using the keyboard.
4. Tap OK to confirm your setting.
Data Usage
From this screen you can view your Mobile data usage and
turn your Mobile data capability On or Off.
1. From the Home screen, tap
(Apps) ➔ Settings ➔
(Connections tab) ➔ Data usage.
2. Tap Mobile data to create a checkmark and turn Mobile
data usage on.
3. Tap Set mobile data limit to create a checkmark and
allow a data limit to be set.
4. Touch and drag the red limit bar to the GB limit that you
desire.
5. Tap the Data usage cycle drop-down menu and select a
date.
The data usage displays as a visual (chart) and also
displays a list of each application with a breakdown of
how much data was used per application.
Note: Data is measured by your device. Your service provider
may account for data usage differently.
Changing Your Settings
179
(Menu) to display additional options. Tap to
6. Press
activate.
• Data roaming: enables data roaming on your device.
• Restrict background data: restricts some apps and services
from working unless you are connected to a Wi-Fi network.
• Auto sync data: allows your accounts to automatically sync
• Show Wi-Fi usage: displays a Wi-Fi tab that shows Wi-Fi
usage.
Airplane mode
Airplane mode allows you to use many of your phone’s
features, such as Camera, Games, and more, when you are
in an airplane or in any other area where making or receiving
calls or data is prohibited.
Important! When your phone is in Airplane Mode, it cannot
send or receive any calls or access online
information or applications.
• Mobile hotspots: displays available mobile hotspots.
More networks
This option displays additional Connectivity information.
From the Home screen, tap
(Apps) ➔ Settings ➔
(Connections tab) ➔ More networks.
Options display for Airplane mode, Mobile networks,
Tethering and portable hotspots, VPN, and Wi-Fi
Calling.
180
1. From the Home screen, tap
(Apps) ➔ Settings ➔
(Connections tab) ➔ More networks.
2. Tap the Airplane mode checkbox to create a checkmark
and activate the feature.
3. At the Turn on airplane mode prompt, tap OK.
The Airplane mode icon
your screen.
is displayed at the top of
Mobile Networks
Before you use applications such as Google Maps and find
your location or search for places of interest, you must
enable the Mobile networks options.
Mobile data
To enable data access over the mobile network, this option
must be selected. It is set on by default.
1. From the main Settings page, tap Connections tab ➔
More networks ➔ Mobile networks.
2. Tap Mobile data to create a checkmark and activate the
feature.
Data roaming
Data roaming allows you to connect to your service
provider’s partner networks and access data services when
you are out of your service providers area of coverage.
1. From the main Settings page, tap Connections tab ➔
More networks ➔ Mobile networks.
2. Tap Data roaming to create a checkmark and activate
the feature.
Access Point Names
To use Wi-Fi you need access to a wireless access point
(hotspot).
1. From the main Settings page, tap Connections tab ➔
More networks ➔ Mobile networks.
2. Tap Access Point Names.
A list of the Access Point names display. The active
access point displays a green, filled circle to the right
of the name.
Changing Your Settings
181
Network mode
You can configure your device to either automatically select
the LTE option (LTE/WCDMA/GSM (auto connect) [by default]),
WCDMA/GSM (auto connect), GSM only, or WCDMA only.
From the main Settings page, tap Connections tab ➔
More networks ➔ Mobile networks ➔ Network mode.
• LTE/WCDMA/GSM (auto connect) is the default network
mode option. This selection allows the device to choose the
fastest connection from among the available connection
speeds, including LTE.
• WCDMA/GSM (auto connect) allows you to exclude the LTE
network and choose from only 4G, 3G, and 2G networks.
• WCDMA only restricts your connection to only the 3G network.
• GSM only restricts your connection to only the 2G network.
Using the LTE Network Option
To confirm you are always using the fastest possible
connection, the device has an automatic detection method
where it finds both the fastest and most stable connection/
communication method from among this selected set
(LTE/4G/3G/2G).
1. From the main Settings page, tap Connections tab ➔
More networks ➔ Mobile networks ➔ Network mode.
2. Tap LTE/WCDMA/GSM (auto connect). A selection
indicator displays next to this option to show that it is
active.
Using the WCDMA/GSM Option
If you wish to not use LTE but still require a fast connection
using the standard 3G/2G network speed, follow these
instructions to connect to these network types.
1. From the main Settings page, tap Connections tab ➔
More networks ➔ Mobile networks ➔ Network mode.
2. Tap WCDMA/GSM (auto connect). A selection indicator
displays next to this option to show that it is active.
182
Using the WCDMA - 3G Only Network
This option uses a 3G connection only.
1. From the main Settings page, tap Connections tab ➔
More networks ➔ Mobile networks ➔ Network mode.
2. Tap WCDMA only. A check mark displays next to this
option to indicate that it is active. Connecting to 3G
networks slows the data transfer speed and time.
Using the 2G - GSM Only Network
If you are not using applications that require a faster network
speed (any application that accesses the network or uses a
browser), using the 2G only (WCDMA) network saves battery
life.
1. From the main Settings page, tap Connections tab ➔
More networks ➔ Mobile networks ➔ Network mode.
2. Tap GSM only. A check mark displays next to this option
to indicate that it is active. Connecting to 2G networks
slows the data transfer speed and time.
Network Operators
Using this feature you can view the current network
connection. You can also scan and select a network operator
manually, or set the network selection to Automatic.
1. From the main Settings page, tap Connections tab ➔
More networks ➔ Mobile networks.
2. Tap Network operators. The current network connection
displays at the bottom of the list.
Important! You must deactivate data service prior to searching
for an available network.
3. Tap Search now to manually search for a network.
4. Tap Select automatically to automatically select a
network connection.
Note: Connecting to 2G networks slows the data transfer
speed and time.
Changing Your Settings
183
Default setup options
Your phone default is set to Automatic (to automatically
search for an available network. You can set this option to
Manual to select a network each time you connect.
1. From the main Settings page, tap Connections tab ➔
More networks ➔ Mobile networks ➔ Network
operators.
2. Tap Default setup.
3. Tap Automatic to allow the device to automatically
select a network.
– or –
4. Tap Manual to locate and connect to a network
manually.
Tethering and Mobile Hotspot
This option allows you to share your phones’s mobile data
connection via USB or as a portable Wi-Fi hotspot.
For more information, refer to “Mobile Hotspot” on page
171.
For more information, refer to “USB Tethering” on page 173.
VPN settings
The VPN settings menu allows you to set up and manage
Virtual Private Networks (VPNs).
Note: Before using VPN, you must first set up a screen unlock
PIN or password. For more information, refer to “Lock
Screen Settings” on page 191.
Adding a Basic VPN
Before you add a VPN you must determine which VPN
protocol to use: PPTP (Point-to-Point Tunneling Protocol),
L2TP(Layer 2 Tunneling Protocol)/IPSec PSK (Pre-shared key
based L2TP/IPSec), L2TP/IPSec RSA (Public key based L2TP/
IPSec), IPSec Xauth (Cross authentication) PSK, IPSec Xauth
RSA, or IPSec Hybrid (authentication) RSA.
1. Before using VPN, you must first set up a screen unlock
PIN or password. For more information, refer to “Lock
Screen Settings” on page 191.
2. From the Home screen, tap
(Apps) ➔ Settings ➔
(Connections tab) ➔ More networks ➔ VPN.
3. Tap
(Add).
4. Enter a name for the VPN network in the Name field.
184
5. Select a VPN type from the Type drop-down menu. The
options are:
• PPTP (Point-to-Point Tunneling Protocol)
• L2TP/IPSec PSK (Layer 2 Tunneling Protocol / Internet Protocol
Security Pre-Shared Key)
• L2TP/IPSec RSA
• IPSec Xauth PSK
• IPSec Xauth RSA
• IPSec Hybrid RSA
6. Enter the Server address and any other required fields
that are dependent upon the Type you entered
previously.
7. Tap the Show advanced options check box to display
additional VPN options.
8. Tap Save to save your VPN settings.
Wi-Fi Calling
Wi-Fi Calling is a free feature for metroPCS customers using
this phone with the new SIM card. Wi-Fi Calling is an
excellent solution for coverage issues in and around the
home or wherever cellular coverage is limited. Minutes used
while connected to the Wi-Fi network count against available
rate plan minutes.
The benefits of Wi-Fi Calling include the following:
• Wi-Fi Calling provides a coverage option to improve upon your
current in-home coverage experience
• Wi-Fi Calling works anywhere there is a Wi-Fi signal available
Important! A new micro SIM card must be installed within the
device prior to using this feature. Wi-Fi must first
be active and communicating prior to launching
Wi-Fi Calling.
Note: This feature is active by default. If you are in an active
Wi-Fi call and go out of range of your Wi-Fi, the call will
be dropped.
Changing Your Settings
185
Note: To avoid international data roaming fees when using
Wi-Fi calling when outside the United States, the Data
Roaming feature on your device must be turned off.
Note: With certain rate plans, minutes used while connected
to the Wi-Fi network count against available rate plan
minutes.
Important! If you are not using a new ISIM card, you will
receive an Error: ERxx Invalid SIM message. You
must be using a new ISIM card to use this feature.
Activating Wi-Fi Calling
1. Ensure that the Wi-Fi connected icon
displays on
the Status Bar.
• If prompted with an on-screen “Did you know your phone can
make calls over Wi-Fi” popup, tap Learn and follow the
remaining on-screen instructions. Tap Next ➔ Done.
2. From the main Settings page, tap Connections tab ➔
More networks.
3. Locate the Wi-Fi Calling field and in a single motion tap
the slider so that it changes to the ON position
.
4. If
(Missing 911 Address) displays in the Status
Bar, follow these steps to provide 911 an address for
emergency situations:
• Log into your account and edit your customer profile
information.
• Enter your emergency location information and complete the
online registration.
5. From the main Settings page, tap Connections tab ➔
More networks ➔ Wi-Fi Calling.
186
6. Tap Connection Preferences and select a preference for
use by the Wi-Fi Calling feature:
• Wi-Fi Preferred: Wi-Fi network is preferred over cellular
network when making calls. Calling requires you to stay in the
Wi-Fi range.
• Cellular Network Preferred: The cellular network is preferred
over a Wi-Fi network when making calls.
• Never use Cellular Network: Use only Wi-Fi for calls.
Do not use Cellular Network, even if available.
Launching Wi-Fi Calling
Note: Verify you are currently connected to a Wireless Access
Point.
1. Ensure that the Wi-Fi connected icon displays on the
status bar.
2. Confirm
Status Bar.
(Wi-Fi Calling Ready) displays in the
7. Tap OK to save the setting.
3. Use the phone Dialer, Logs, or Contacts list to make a
call.
8. From the main Settings page, tap Connections tab ➔
More networks.
4. Go to the dialer and make a call. Make sure
(Wi-Fi Calling in use) appears during the call.
9. Tap Wi-Fi Calling slider to toggle off the feature, then
tap it again to reactivate the feature and re-register
your device with the metroPCS Network.
10. Confirm
Status Bar.
(Wi-Fi Calling Ready) displays in the
Changing Your Settings
187
When Action
Then
Displays on the You are connected to the
screen status network and can make Wi-Fi
calls.
bar.
Displays on the The Wi-Fi Calling feature is
screen status active and in use within an
active call.
bar.
Does not display You are charged normal
on the screen calling rate minutes.
status bar.
Displays on the There is an error in the use or
screen status 911 registration of the Wi-Fi
Calling feature.
bar.
While Wi-Fi Calling mode is active, the call button shows a
Wi-Fi indicator
.
When Wi-Fi Calling is disabled, the call button goes back to
show normal operation
.
188
NFC
NFC (Near Field Communication) allows data exchange when
you touch your device with another compatible device. This
is used for applications such as Android Beam and S Beam.
To activate NFC:
1. From the Home screen, tap
(Apps) ➔ Settings ➔
(Connections tab) ➔ NFC.
2. Tap the ON/OFF slider, located to the right of the NFC
field, to turn NFC ON
.
Android Beam
When Android Beam is activated, you can beam app content
to another NFC-capable device by holding the devices close
together. You can beam browser pages, YouTube videos,
contacts, and more.
1. From the Home screen, tap
(Apps) ➔ Settings ➔
(Connections tab) ➔ NFC ➔ Android Beam.
2. Tap the OFF / ON icon to turn Android Beam ON.
3. Touch the back of your device with another
NFC-capable device and the content is transferred.
S Beam
Nearby devices
When S Beam is activated, you can beam files to another
NFC-capable device by holding the devices close together.
You can beam images and videos from your Gallery, music
files from your Music app, and more.
1. From the Home screen, tap
(Apps) ➔ Settings ➔
(Connections tab) ➔ S Beam.
2. Tap the OFF / ON icon to turn S Beam on
.
3. Touch the back of your device with another
NFC-capable device and the content is transferred.
This option allows you to share your media files with nearby
devices using DLNA and connected to the same Wi-Fi.
1. Connect to a Wi-Fi network. For more information, refer
to “Activating Wi-Fi” on page 176.
2. From the Home screen, tap
(Apps) ➔ Settings ➔
(Connections tab) ➔ Nearby devices.
3. Tap the File sharing checkbox to create a checkmark
and activate File sharing.
4. Verify
screen.
(Nearby devices) appears at the top of the
5. At the Nearby devices prompt, tap OK.
6. Tap Shared contents, then check the media you would
like to share. Tap OK.
7. Tap Allowed devices list, then select the connected
devices you would like to allow.
8. Tap Not-allowed devices list, then select the connected
devices you would like to not allow.
9. Tap Download to, then select the destination of any
downloaded (shared) content. Choose from USB
storage (Device) or SD card.
Changing Your Settings
189
10. Tap Upload from other devices, then select the actions
you’ll take when you upload content from other
devices. Choose from either Always accept, Always
ask, or Always reject.
Screen Mirroring
The Screen Mirroring feature allows you to share the media
files on your device screen with an HDMI device such as an
HDMI TV.
Note: This feature requires the optional AllShare Cast dongle
which is available as an accessory. See your Customer
Service Representative for more information.
1. From the Home screen, tap
(Apps) ➔ Settings ➔
(Connections tab) ➔ Screen Mirroring.
2. Connect the AllShare Cast dongle to the HDMI device
using an HDMI A-to-A cable.
3. In a single motion touch and slide the Screen Mirroring
slider to the right to turn it on. The slider color indicates
the activation status.
4. Press
(Menu) ➔ Help for information on using
Screen Mirroring.
190
Note: This feature allows a connection between your device
and the optional AllShare Cast Hub, via a shared Wi-Fi
Direct connection. The AllShare Cast Hub then allows
the communicating TV to mirror what is being shown on
the device's display.
Kies via Wi-Fi
Kies via Wi-Fi allows you to sync your PC wirelessly with your
device provided they are both on the same Wi-Fi network.
You can view and share videos, photos, music, ringtones,
and more.
1. From your PC, download the Samsung Kies application
if you don’t already have it. You can find it at
www.samsung.com.
2. From your PC, launch the Samsung Kies application.
3. From your PC, connect to a Wi-Fi network.
4. From the Home screen, tap
(Apps) ➔ Settings ➔
(Connections tab) ➔ Kies via Wi-Fi.
5. From your device, connect to the same Wi-Fi network
that your PC is connected to if you have not already
done so. For more information, refer to “Connect to a
Wi-Fi Network” on page 162.
Lock Screen Settings
Choose settings for unlocking your screen. For more
information about using the lock and unlock features, see
“Locking and Unlocking the Touch Screen” on page 13.
Screen Lock
1. From the Home screen, tap
(Apps) ➔ Settings ➔
(My device tab) ➔ Lock screen.
My device
2. Tap Screen lock for these options then follow the onscreen instructions to set up your Screen lock:
• Swipe: Swipe the screen to unlock it.
• Face unlock: Look at your phone to unlock it.
• Face and voice: Look at your phone and speak to unlock.
• Pattern: A screen unlock pattern is a touch gesture you create
and use to unlock your device. Follow the prompts to create or
change your screen unlock pattern.
• PIN: Select a PIN to use for unlocking the screen.
• None: No pattern, PIN, or password is required. The screen will
never lock.
Lock screen options
Activate or deactivates various Unlock screen functions.
Note: The Lock screen options will differ depending on what
type of Screen Lock you have selected in step 2.
1. From the Home screen, tap
(Apps) ➔ Settings ➔
(My device tab) ➔ Lock screen.
My device
2. The following options are available depending on the
Screen Lock type that you have selected:
Swipe options
• Multiple widgets allows you to display multiple widgets on
your lock screen. Appears as an options after a lock mode is
enabled.
• Lock screen widgets allows you to lock the widgets that are
displayed on your home screens.
• Shortcuts sets shortcuts to appear at the bottom of the Lock
screen. Touch and slide the slider to the right to turn it on
.
• Password: Create a password for unlocking the screen.
Changing Your Settings
191
• Unlock effect sets the effect you receive when unlocking the
phone. You can select: None, Ripple effect, or Light effect.
• Help text shows help information on the Lock screen.
• Wake up in lock screen requires that you say a command to
wake-up your phone.
• Make pattern visible allows you to see the pattern as you
draw it.
• Set wake-up command designates your wake-up
commands. Tap Set wake-up command and follow the onscreen prompts to create a new verbal command.
• Lock automatically allows you to set a time-out for lock
screen.
Face unlock options
• Lock screen widgets allows you to lock the widgets that are
displayed on your home screens.
• Improve facial recognition allows you to improve your
device’s face matching capability by capturing your face in
different lighting, with or without glasses, and bearded or
clean-shaven. Follow the on-screen instructions.
• Presence check requires that you blink when using the Face
unlock feature. This will increase the security of the feature.
• Lock automatically allows you to set a time-out for lock
screen.
• Lock instantly with power key allows you to lock the screen
by pressing
.
192
Pattern options
• Lock screen widgets allows you to lock the widgets that are
displayed on your home screens.
• Lock instantly with power key allows you to lock the screen
by pressing
.
PIN and Password options
• Lock screen widgets allows you to lock the widgets that are
displayed on your home screens.
• Lock automatically allows you to set a time-out for lock
screen.
• Lock instantly with power key allows you to lock the screen
by pressing
.
What If I Forget my Pattern?
If you forget your device's lock pattern, you can unlock your
device or reset it using your Google™ Account credentials.
When you enter the wrong unlock pattern too many times,
you should see an option at the bottom of the screen that
says Forgot pattern? Follow these steps to use either your PIN
or email address.
Important! You can only enter an incorrect lock pattern 5 times
before the device is locked.
Important! If you are unsuccessful in retrieving your lock
pattern or unlocking your device, please contact
customer care for assistance.
To unlock your device with a PIN code:
1. Tap Backup PIN (located at the bottom of the screen).
2. Scroll down and tap the Type PIN code field and use the
on-screen keypad to enter the backup PIN code you
setup when you created your lock pattern.
3. Tap Done.
4. If you have forgotten your current pattern, tap Pattern
from the Screen unlock settings menu and follow the
procedures to create a new pattern.
To unlock your device using your Google account:
1. Tap Forgot pattern? (located at the bottom of the
screen).
2. Tap the Username (email) and Password fields, use the
on-screen keyboard to enter your Google Account
credentials, and tap Sign in to complete the login
process.
3. If you have forgotten your Google Account credentials,
visit the Google website to recover them. If you still
cannot get your Google Account credentials, contact
your wireless carrier for additional options.
Changing Your Settings
193
Display Settings
In this menu, you can change various settings for the display.
From the Home screen, tap
(Apps) ➔ Settings ➔
(My device tab) ➔ Display.
My device
The following options display:
• Wallpaper: allows you to set the Wallpaper for your Home
screen, Lock screen, or both. For more information, refer to
“Changing the Wallpaper” on page 37.
• Notification panel: allows you to set the brightness of your
notification panel and also select the quick setting buttons that
you want to display at the top of the notification panel. For more
information, refer to “Notification Bar” on page 39.
• Multi window: tap this option to enable/disable the automatic
Multi window feature.
• Screen mode: allows you to select from several different color
modes.
• Brightness: configures the LCD Brightness levels. Tap
Automatic brightness to allow the phone to self-adjust or drag
the slider and tap OK.
• Auto rotate screen: allows you to switch the display orientation
automatically when you rotate the phone.
194
• Screen timeout: adjusts the delay time before the screen
automatically turns off. Selections are: 15 seconds,
30 seconds, 1 minute, 2 minutes, 5 minutes, 10 minutes,
and 30 minutes.
• Daydream: allows you to control what your screen does when
your device is docked or sleeping. Tap the OFF / ON icon next
to Daydream to turn it on
. Follow the on-screen
instructions.
• Font style: allows you to set the font style that your phone will
use. You can also tap Get fonts online to choose from a wider
selection.
• Font size: allows you to select which size of font is displayed.
• Increase legibility: allows you to enhance the clarity of the
text.
• Touch key light duration: allows you to adjust the delay before
the Touch key light automatically turns off.
• Show battery percentage: allows you to see the battery
charge percentage next to the battery charge icon at the top of
the display.
• Edit after screen capture: allows you to go edit a screen
immediately after taking a screen capture.
LED indicator
This option allows you to turn on your LED lights for charging,
missed events, and incoming notifications. The light will turn
on by default unless you turn them off.
1. From the Home screen, tap
(Apps) ➔ Settings ➔
(My device tab) ➔ LED indicator.
My device
2. Tap the following LED indicator options to turn them on
or off:
• Charging: LED lights up when the device is connected to the
charger.
• Low battery: LED lights up when the battery level is low.
• Notifications: LED lights up when you have missed calls,
messages, or application events.
• Voice recording: LED lights up when you are recording voice.
The LED only lights up when the screen is off.
Sound Settings
From this menu you can control the sounds on the phone.
From the Home screen, tap
(Apps) ➔ Settings ➔
(My device tab) ➔ Sound.
My device
The following options display:
Volume
The Volume option allows you to change the volume for all
phone sounds in one easy location.
1. From the Home screen, tap
➔ Settings ➔
My device ➔ Sound ➔ Volume.
My device
2. Touch and drag the slider to adjust the sound volume
for Music, video, games and other media, Ringtone,
Notifications, and System.
3. Tap OK.
Changing Your Settings
195
Vibration intensity
Vibration intensity allows you to select how intense the
vibration is for different options.
1. From the Home screen, tap
(Apps) ➔ Settings ➔
(My device tab) ➔ Sound ➔ Vibration intensity.
My device
2. Touch and drag the slider to adjust the Vibration
intensity for Incoming call, Notification, and Haptic
feedback.
3. Tap OK.
Ringtones
This option allows you to set the ringtone.
1. From the Home screen, tap
(Apps) ➔ Settings ➔
(My device tab) ➔ Sound.
My device
2. Tap Ringtones.
3. Tap a ringtone and tap OK.
– or –
Tap Add to select a file from your music files.
196
Vibrations
This option allows you to set your phone to vibrate and ring.
1. From the Home screen, tap
(Apps) ➔ Settings ➔
(My device tab) ➔ Sound.
My device
2. Tap Vibrations.
3. Select a vibration pattern and tap OK.
– or –
Tap Create and follow the on-screen instructions to
create your own vibration.
Default notification sound
This option allows you to set the default ringtone that will
sound for notifications and alarms.
1. From the Home screen, tap
(Apps) ➔ Settings ➔
(My device tab) ➔ Sound.
My device
2. Tap Default notification sound.
3. Tap a ringtone and tap OK.
Vibrate when ringing
This option allows you to enable your phone to vibrate
whenever it rings.
1. From the Home screen, tap
(Apps) ➔ Settings ➔
(My device tab) ➔ Sound.
My device
2. Tap Vibrate when ringing to create a checkmark and
enable the feature.
System Tone Settings
The System tone settings are used when you use the dialing
pad, make a screen selection, lock your screen, or tap the
screen.
1. From the Home screen, tap
(Apps) ➔ Settings ➔
(My device tab) ➔ Sound.
My device
2. Tap any of the following options to create a checkmark
and activate the feature:
• Dialing keypad tone: makes a sound when you tap a key on
the keyboard.
• Touch sounds: makes a sound when you touch the screen.
• Screen lock sound: makes a sound when your screen is
locked or unlocked.
• Haptic feedback: makes a vibration when you tap soft keys
and on certain UI interactions.
Adapt sound
The Adapt sound feature allows you to customize your call
sounds.
1. From the Home screen, tap
(Apps) ➔ Settings ➔
(My device tab) ➔ Sound ➔ Adapt sound.
My device
2. Read the instructions and tap Start.
3. Follow the on-screen instructions to set up your
personal call sound.
Home screen mode
Home screen mode allows you to set your display to the
conventional layout of Standard mode or provide an easier
user experience for the first-time smartphone users using
Easy mode.
1. From the Home screen, tap
(Apps) ➔ Settings ➔
(My device tab) ➔ Home screen mode.
My device
2. Select one of the following options:
• Standard mode: provides conventional layout for the apps and
widgets on your home screens.
Changing Your Settings
197
• Easy mode: provides easier user experience for first-time
smartphone users on the home screens.
3. Tap Apply.
Call Settings
From the Home screen, tap
(Apps) ➔ Settings ➔
(My device tab) ➔ Call.
– or –
My device
From the Home screen, tap
➔ Call settings.
to manually add numbers to the Reject list.
5. Tap Unavailable, to create a checkmark and
automatically reject all calls that are not in your
Contacts list.
Set rejection messages
To access the Call settings menu:
4. Tap
(Phone) ➔
(Menu)
Call rejection
1. From the Home screen, tap
(Apps) ➔ Settings ➔
(My device tab) ➔ Call ➔ Call rejection.
1. From the Home screen, tap
(Apps) ➔ Settings ➔
(My device tab) ➔ Call ➔ Set up call rejection
messages.
My device
2. Tap
– or –
to manually add a reject message.
Tap one of the pre-written messages to be displayed
when you want the call to be rejected. You can edit the
message if desired.
My device
2. Tap Auto reject mode and tap one of the following
options:
• Off: to turn Auto reject mode off.
• All numbers: to reject all calls.
• Auto reject numbers: to reject all calls in your Reject list.
3. Tap Auto reject list.
198
3. Tap Save to save the reject message.
Answering/ending calls
1. From the Home screen, tap
(Apps) ➔ Settings ➔
(My device tab) ➔ Call ➔ Answering/ending
calls.
My device
Call alerts
1. From the Home screen, tap
(Apps) ➔ Settings ➔
(My device tab) ➔ Call ➔ Call alerts.
My device
2. The following options are available:
• The home key answers calls: Tap this option to be able to
accept incoming calls by pressing the Home key.
2. Tap the following options to create a checkmark and
activate the features:
• Answer vibration: enables your phone to vibrate when the
called party answers the phone.
• Voice control: Tap this option to be able to accept incoming
calls by using your voice.
• Call-end vibration: enables your phone to vibrate when the
call ends.
• The power key ends calls: This option will allow you to end a
call by pressing the power key without turning off the screen.
• Call connect tone: plays a tone when a call is connected.
Turn off screen during calls
This option turns on the proximity sensor during calls so that
your phone will know to turn the screen off to save power.
From the Home screen, tap
(Apps) ➔ Settings ➔
(My device tab) ➔ Call ➔ Turn off screen during
calls to create a checkmark and enable the feature.
• Minute minder: beeps twice every minute that you are on a
call.
• Call end tone: plays a tone when a call is ended.
• Alerts during calls: turns on alarm and message notifications
during a call.
My device
Changing Your Settings
199
Call accessories
1. From the Home screen, tap
(Apps) ➔ Settings ➔
(My device tab)➔ Call ➔ Call accessories.
My device
2. The following options are available:
• Automatic answering: configures the device to automatically
answer and incoming call when a headset is detected.
• Automatic answering timer: configures the time delay before
the device automatically accepts the incoming call.
• Outgoing call conditions: allows you to make calls even when
the device is locked.
Wi-Fi Calling
Wi-Fi Calling is a free feature for metroPCS customers using
this device with the new SIM card. Wi-Fi Calling is an
excellent solution for coverage issues in and around the
home or wherever cellular coverage is limited. Minutes used
while connected to the Wi-Fi network count against available
rate plan minutes.
From the Home screen, tap
(Apps) ➔ Settings ➔
(My device tab)➔ Call ➔ Wi-Fi Calling.
My device
For more information, refer to “Wi-Fi Calling” on page 185.
Additional settings
1. From the Home screen, tap
(Apps) ➔ Settings ➔
(My device tab) ➔ Call ➔ Additional settings.
My device
2. Tap one of the following options:
• Caller ID: allows you to choose how your Caller ID will be
displayed. Select Network default, Hide number, or Show
number.
• Call forwarding: allows you to forward your calls to another
number.
• Auto area code: allows you to automatically prepend a specific
area code to all outbound calls.
200
• Call barring: blocks specific types of calls (All outgoing calls,
International calls, etc..)
• Call waiting: the network service informs you when someone
is trying to reach you during another call. Tap to activate.
• Auto redial: automatically redials the last number if the call
was either cut off or was unable to connect. Tap to activate.
• Fixed dialing numbers: allows you to restrict outgoing calls to
a limited set of phone numbers.
Call Waiting Settings
The Call Waiting feature allows you to answer an incoming
call while you have a call in progress, if this service is
supported by the network, and you must first activate the
Call Waiting feature:
From the Home screen, tap
(Apps) ➔ Settings ➔
(My device tab) ➔ Call ➔ Additional settings ➔
Call waiting.
• You are notified of an incoming call by a call waiting
tone.
My device
Call Forwarding Settings
1. From the Home screen, tap
(Apps) ➔ Settings ➔
(My device tab) ➔ Call ➔ Additional settings ➔
Call forwarding.
My device
2. Tap one of the following options:
• Always forward: allows you to forward all voice calls.
• Forward when busy allows you to forward voice calls to a
designated number instead of your voice mail number if you
are on another phone call.
• Forward when unanswered: allows you to forward voice calls
to a designated number instead of your voicemail number
when there is no answer on your phone. You can also select
the amount of time that the phone delays before forwarding.
• Forward when unreachable: allows you to forward voice calls
to a designated number instead of your voicemail number
when you are not in an area covered by your service provider or
when your phone is switched off.
Changing Your Settings
201
Using Fixed Dialing Numbers
Enabling FDN
1. From the Home screen, tap
(Apps) ➔ Settings ➔
(My device tab) ➔ Call ➔ Additional settings ➔
Fixed dialing numbers.
My device
Changing the PIN2 Code
1. From the Home screen, tap
(Apps) ➔ Settings ➔
(My device tab) ➔ Call ➔ Additional settings ➔
Fixed dialing numbers.
My device
2. Tap Change PIN2.
2. Tap Turn on FDN.
3. At the prompt, enter your old PIN2 code.
3. At the prompt, enter your PIN2 code and tap OK.
4. At the prompt, enter a new PIN2 code.
FDN is enabled.
4. To enable FDN after it has been disabled, tap Turn off
FDN, enter your PIN2 code and tap OK.
Important! Not all SIM cards use a PIN2 code. If your SIM card
does not, this menu does not display.
The PIN2 code is provided by your carrier. Entering
an incorrect PIN2 code could cause the phone to
lock. Contact customer service for assistance.
202
5. Confirm your PIN2 code.
Managing the FDN List
When this feature is enabled, you can make calls only to
phone numbers stored in the FDN list on the SIM card.
Note: Before you can manage an FDN list a list must be
created.
1. From the Home screen, tap
(Apps) ➔ Settings ➔
(My device tab) ➔ Call ➔ Additional settings ➔
Fixed dialing numbers.
My device
2. Tap FDN list.
3. A list of all existing FDN numbers will be displayed.
Personalize call sound
This option allows you to personalize the sounds you hear
during a call with and without earphones.
1. From the Home screen, tap
(Apps) ➔ Settings ➔
(My device tab) ➔ Call ➔ Personalize call
sound.
My device
2. At the Personalize call sound display, tap one of the
following options:
• In-call sound EQ: the In-call sound equalizer allows you to set
your call sound during calls. Select from Off, Soft sound, Clear
sound, Adapt Sound left, or Adapt Sound right.
• Adapt sound: allows you to customize your sounds. Follow the
on-screen instructions to set up your personal call sound.
Ringtones and keypad tones
1. From the Home screen, tap
(Apps) ➔ Settings ➔
(My device tab) ➔ Call ➔ Ringtones and keypad
tones.
My device
2. Tap Ringtones, select a ringtone, and tap OK.
3. Tap Vibrations, select a vibration type, and tap OK.
4. Tap Vibrate when ringing to create a checkmark if you
want your phone to vibrate when a call is incoming.
5.
Noise reduction
This option helps to suppress background noise from your
side during a call.
From the Home screen, tap
(Apps) ➔ Settings ➔
(My device tab) ➔ Call ➔ Noise reduction to
create a checkmark and enable the feature.
My device
Tap Keypad tones to create a checkmark if you want
tones to play when the keypad is pressed.
Changing Your Settings
203
Increase volume in pocket
This option increases the ringtone volume when the device is
in a pocket or a bag. It uses the proximity sensor to detect its
location.
From the Home screen, tap
(Apps) ➔ Settings ➔
(My device tab) ➔ Call ➔ Increase volume in
pocket to create a checkmark and enable the feature.
My device
Voicemail service
1. From the Home screen, tap
(Apps) ➔ Settings ➔
(My device tab) ➔ Call ➔ Voicemail Service.
My device
Voicemail service provided by your carrier is the
default.
2. Tap My carrier to remove the carrier Voicemail service.
Voicemail settings
You can view or modify your voicemail number from this
menu.
1. From the Home screen, tap
(Apps) ➔ Settings ➔
(My device tab) ➔ Call ➔ Voicemail settings.
My device
2. Tap the Voice mail number field, backspace to erase the
digits, and enter a new voicemail number using the
keypad, then tap OK.
3. Tap OK.
Sound
You can select a unique ringtone for Voicemail alerts.
1. From the Home screen, tap
(Apps) ➔ Settings ➔
(My device tab) ➔ Call ➔ Sound.
My device
2. Tap a ringtone to hear it played.
3.
204
Select a ringtone and tap OK.
Vibrate
This option allows you select vibration settings for Voicemail
alerts.
1. From the Home screen, tap
(Apps) ➔ Settings ➔
(My device tab) ➔ Call.
My device
2. Tap Vibrate to create a checkmark and activate the
Vibrate feature.
TTY Mode
A TTY (also known as a TDD or Text Telephone) is a
telecommunications device that allows people who are deaf,
hard of hearing, or who have speech or language disabilities,
to communicate by telephone.
2. Tap TTY Full, TTY HCO, or TTY VCO. A green checkmark
will appear. Tap TTY Off to turn it off.
Hearing aids
This option allows you to turn on Hearing aid compatibility on
your device.
1. From the Home screen, tap
(Apps) ➔ Settings ➔
(My device tab) ➔ Call.
My device
2. Tap Hearing aids to create a checkmark and enable the
Hearing aid compatibility feature.
Your phone is compatible with select TTY devices. Please
check with the manufacturer of your TTY device to ensure
that it is compatible with digital cell phones.
Your phone and TTY device will connect via a special cable
that plugs into your phone’s headset jack. If this cable was
not provided with your TTY device, contact your TTY device
manufacturer to purchase the connector cable.
1. From the Home screen, tap
(Apps) ➔ Settings ➔
(My device tab) ➔ Call ➔ TTY mode.
My device
Changing Your Settings
205
Blocking Mode
When Blocking mode is enabled, notifications for selected
features will be disabled. You will only receive notifications of
incoming calls from people on your allowed list.
1. From the Home screen, tap
(Apps) ➔ Settings ➔
(My device tab) ➔ Blocking mode.
My device
2. In a single motion touch and slide the Blocking mode
slider to the right to turn it on
.
Confirm that the Blocking mode active icon
appears in the Status bar.
3. Place a green checkmark adjacent to those features
you would like to enable. Choose from: Block incoming
calls, Turn off notifications, Turn off alarm and timer,
and Turn off LED indicator.
4. Configure a timeframe for these features to be active.
Remove the checkmark from the Always field to
configure the From and To time fields.
5. Tap Allowed contacts to assign those contacts that are
exempted from these rules. Choose from None, All
contacts, Favorites, or Custom. Allowed contacts will
then appear in the Allowed contact list.
206
Driving Mode
When Driving mode is enabled, incoming calls and
notifications will be read out automatically.
1. From the Home screen, tap
(Apps) ➔ Settings ➔
(My device tab) ➔ Driving mode.
My device
2. Tap the OFF / ON icon next to Driving mode to the right
to turn it on
.
Confirm that the Driving mode active icon
appears in the Status bar.
All incoming calls and notifications will be read out
automatically.
Note: You can disable Driving mode by saying “Driving mode
off” while in S voice, or by accessing the Settings menu
and sliding the Driver mode slider to the off position
or by using the Notification panel.
Power saving mode
Power saving mode allows you to manage your phone to
conserve power.
1. From the Home screen, tap
(Apps) ➔ Settings ➔
(My device tab) ➔ Power saving mode.
My device
Accessory Settings
This menu allows you to select the Audio output mode when
using a car or desk dock.
1. From the Home screen, tap
(Apps) ➔ Settings ➔
(My device tab) ➔ Accessory.
My device
2. Tap the OFF / ON icon next to Power saving mode to turn
Power saving mode on
.
2. Tap Dock sound to play sounds when inserting or
removing the phone from the dock.
3. Tap the following options to create a checkmark and
conserve power:
• CPU power saving: allows you to limit the maximum
performance of the CPU.
3. Tap Audio output mode to use the external dock
speakers when the phone is docked.
• Screen power saving: allows you to lower the screen power
level.
• Turn off haptic feedback: allows you to turn off vibration when
you tap or touch the screen.
4. Tap Learn about Power saving mode to learn about
various ways to conserve battery power.
4. Tap Desk home screen display to display the desk home
screen whenever the phone is docked.
5. Tap Automatic unlock if you are using a phone cover
and you want your phone to unlock when you open the
cover.
6. Tap Audio output to set your Audio output to Stereo or
Surround.
Changing Your Settings
207
Accessibility
Accessibility services are special features to make using the
device easier for those with certain physical disabilities. Use
the Accessibility settings to activate these services.
Note: You can download accessibility applications from Play
Store and manage their use here.
1. From the Home screen, tap
(Apps) ➔ Settings ➔
(My device tab) ➔ Accessibility.
• Answering/ending calls: accept incoming calls by pressing
the home key or end calls using the power key.
• Show shortcut: allow the accessibility shortcut under the
device options to be used by pressing and holding the power
key.
• Manage accessibility: save and update your accessibility
settings or share them with another device. You can export your
settings, import a previously saved file, or share your file with
another device.
My device
2. The following options are available:
• Auto rotate screen: automatically rotate the screen from
landscape to portrait when you rotate your phone.
• TalkBack: activate the TalkBack feature.
Note: TalkBack, when installed and enabled, speaks feedback
to help blind and low-vision users.
• Screen timeout: timeout the accessibility feature after a
defined amount of time.
• Lock automatically: to lock the screen automatically after a
selected amount of time.
Note: The Lock automatically function is only available if your
device is already using the screen lock feature.
• Speak passwords: reads out password information.
208
Important! TalkBack can collect all of the text you enter,
except passwords, including personal data and
credit card numbers. It may also log your user
interface interactions with the device.
• Font size: change the size of the fonts used on the device
within menus, options, etc. Choose from: Tiny, Small, Normal,
Large, or Huge.
• Magnification gestures: use exaggerated gestures such as
triple-tapping, double pinching, and dragging two fingers
across the screen.
• Negative colors: reverse the display of on-screen colors from
White text on a Black background to Black text on a White
background.
• Color adjustment: allows you to adjust the display colors if
you are color blind and have difficulty reading the display
because of the colors. Touch and slide the slider to the right to
turn it on. Follow the on-screen instructions.
• Accessibility shortcut: allows you to quickly enable
accessibility features in 2 quick steps. Touch and slide the
slider to the right to turn it on. Follow the on-screen
instructions.
• Text-to-speech options: allows you to adjust your text-tospeech settings. For more information, refer to “Speech
Settings” on page 214.
• Enhance web accessibility: allows apps to install scripts
from Google that make their Web content more accessible. Tap
Allow.
• Sound balance: allows you to use the slider to set the Left
and Right balance when using a stereo device.
• Mono audio: allows you to enable stereo audio to be
compressed into a single mono audio stream for use with a
single earbud/earphone.
• Turn off all sounds: allows you to mute every sound made by
the device during taps, selections, notifications, etc.
• Flash notification: allows you to set your camera light to blink
whenever you receive a notification.
• Assistant menu: allows you to improve the device
accessibility for users with reduced dexterity. Touch and slide
the slider to the right to turn it on. Follow the on-screen
instructions.
• Press and hold delay: allows you to select a time interval for
this action. Choose from: Short, Medium, or Long.
• Interaction control: allows you to enable or disable motions
and screen timeout. You can also block areas of the screen
from touch interaction. Touch and slide the slider to the right to
turn it on
. Follow the on-screen instructions.
Changing Your Settings
209
One-handed operation
The one-handed operation settings help you to use your
phone keypads easily with only one hand.
1. From the Home screen, tap
(Apps) ➔ Settings ➔
(My device tab) ➔ One-handed operation.
My device
2. The following options are available:
• Keypad and in-call buttons: allows you to adjust the position
of the dialing keypad and in-call buttons to the left or the right
to make it easier to use with one hand.
• Calculator: allows you to adjust the position of the calculator
keypad to the left or the right to make it easier to use with one
hand.
• Unlock pattern: allows you to adjust the scale of the unlock
pattern for use with one hand.
• Learn about one-handed operation: provides more
information about using one-handed operation.
Language and input
This menu allows you to configure the language in which to
display the menus. You can also set on-screen keyboard
options.
Language
You can change the language used by your device by
following these steps:
1. From the Home screen, tap
(Apps) ➔ Settings ➔
(My device tab) ➔ Language and input ➔
Language.
My device
2. Tap a language from the list.
Keyboards and Input Methods
You can change the keyboard used by your device by
following these steps:
1. From the Home screen, tap
(Apps) ➔ Settings ➔
(My device tab) ➔ Language and input.
My device
2. Tap Default and select a keyboard.
Select Samsung keyboard or Swype.
3. Tap Set up input methods.
icon next to the input method that you
4. Tap the
would like to configure the settings for.
210
5. Based on your selection of input method, the
appropriate settings will appear and are explained
below.
Google voice typing settings
From this menu you can set Google Voice typing options.
1. From the Home screen, tap
(Apps) ➔ Settings ➔
(My device tab) ➔ Language and input.
My device
2. Tap the
icon next to Google voice typing.
3. The following options are available:
• Choose input languages: tap on a language that you want to
input. Select Automatic to use the local language or select a
language from the list.
• Block offensive words: tap to create a checkmark and enable
the blocking of recognized offensive words from the results of
your voice-input Google typing.
• Download offline speech recognition: Enables voice input
while offline.
Samsung Keyboard settings
From this menu you can set Samsung keyboard options.
1. From the Home screen, tap
(Apps) ➔ Settings ➔
(My device tab) ➔ Language and input.
My device
icon next to Samsung keyboard.
2. Tap the
• Alphabets allows you to choose a keyboard configuration
when you are entering letters (Qwerty keyboard [default] or 3x4
keyboard).
• Numbers and symbols allows you to choose a keyboard
configuration when you are entering numbers or symbols
(Qwerty keyboard [default] or 3x4 keyboard).
• Input languages sets the input language. Tap a language from
the available list. The keyboard is updated to the selected
language.
• Predictive text enables predictive text entry mode. This must
be enabled to gain access to the advanced settings. Touch and
hold to access the advanced settings. Touch and slide the slider
to the right to turn it on
.
• SwiftKey Flow allows you to type words by swiping between
on-screen keys.
Changing Your Settings
211
• Cursor control allows you to move the cursor by sliding your
finger across the keyboard.
• Key-tap vibration enables vibration feedback when you tap an
on-screen key.
• Key-tap sound enables auditory feedback when you tap an
on-screen key.
• Handwriting enables the device to recognize on-screen
handwriting and convert it to text.
• Advanced displays the following advanced options:
– Auto capitalization automatically capitalizes the first letter of
the first word in each sentence (standard English style).
– Auto spacing automatically inserts spaces between words.
– Auto punctuate automatically inserts a full stop in a sentence
by tapping the space bar twice when using the on-screen
QWERTY keyboard.
– Character preview provides an automatic preview of the
current character selection within the text string. This is helpful
when multiple characters are available within one key.
• Help displays more information on using the Samsung
keyboard.
212
• Reset settings resets the keyboard settings back to their
original configuration.
Predictive Text Settings
From this menu you can set Predictive Text settings.
1. From the Home screen, tap
(Apps) ➔ Settings ➔
(My device tab) ➔ Language and input.
My device
2. Tap the
3.
icon next to Samsung keyboard.
Tap the ON/OFF slider, located to the right of the
Predictive text field, to turn it ON
.
4. Tap Predictive text.
5. The following options are available:
• Personalized data: allows you to use personal language that
you have added to make your prediction results better.
• Learn from Facebook: allows you to login to your Facebook
account so your phone can learn your Facebook style.
• Learn from Gmail: allows you to login to your Gmail account so
your phone can learn your Gmail style.
• Learn from Twitter: allows you to login to your Twitter account
so your phone can learn your Twitter style.
• Learn from Messaging: allows your device to learn from your
Messages.
• Learn from Contacts: allows your device to learn from your
Contacts.
• Show complete trace: once enabled, sets wether or not to
display the complete Swype path.
• Clear remote data: deletes anonymous data that is stored on
the personalization server.
• Auto-capitalization: automatically capitalizes the first letter of
a sentence.
• Clear personal data: removes all personalized data that you
have entered.
• Auto-spacing: automatically inserts a space between words.
When you finish a word, just lift your finger or stylus and start
the next word.
• Privacy policy: click the link to read the privacy policy. Follow
the on-screen instructions.
Swype Keypad Settings
To configure Swype settings:
1. From the Home screen, tap
(Apps) ➔ Settings ➔
(My device tab) ➔ Language and input.
My device
2. Tap the
icon next to Swype.
3. Tap Settings on the left side of the screen to alter these
settings:
• Vibrate on keypress: activates a vibration sensation as you
enter text using the keypad.
• Sound on keypress: turns on sounds generated by the Swype
application.
• Pop-up on keypress: displays the character above the key
when typing.
• Next word prediction: once enabled, predicts the next word in
your text string based on your current text entries.
• Show Voice key: once enabled, displays the Voice icon on
your Swype keyboard so you can use the Voice input option.
4. Tap My Words on the left side of the screen to access
the following options:
• Backup & Sync: allows you to backup your Swype dictionary
and sync your Swype dictionary across multiple devices.
• Living Language: when enabled, this feature automatically
updates your Swype dictionary with popular new words.
• Social integration: allows you to learn information from your
Facebook, Twitter, and Gmail accounts to help you while using
Swype.
Changing Your Settings
213
• Edit my dictionary: allows you to edit your personal Swype
dictionary.
• Clear language data: deletes all of your personal language
data, including your words.
• Contribute usage data: when enabled, allows the Nuance®
application to collect usage data for better word predictions.
• Cellular data: when enabled, activates cellular data usage by
the Swype application so it can receive program updates,
language downloads, and other related features via your
existing data connection.
5. Tap Languages on the left side of the screen to activate
and select the current text input language. Default
language is English. Touch Download languages, to
download additional languages.
6. Tap Gestures on the left side of the screen to view
helpful information on using gestures while using
Swype.
7. Tap Help on the left side of the screen to see the
following options:
• How to Swype: provides tips on how to learn to use Swype.
214
• Show helpful tips: once enabled, displays helpful tips and
hints as you are using Swype.
• Version: displays the software version information.
8. Tap Updates on the left side of the screen to download
any new Swype updates. If an update is available, it
will display under the updates heading. If no updates
are displayed, then check back later to see any
available updates.
Speech Settings
This menu allows you to set the speech settings for Voice
input.
1. From the Home screen, tap
(Apps) ➔ Settings ➔
(My device tab) ➔ Language and input.
My device
2. Tap Voice search to configure the following:
• Language: choose a language for your voice input.
• Speech output: Sets whether you will use speech output
always or only when using hands-free.
• Block offensive words: enable or disable blocking of
recognized offensive words from the results of your voice-input
Google searches.
• Hotword detection: enable to being able to launch voice
search by saying the word “Google”.
• Download offline speech recognition: enables voice input
while offline.
• Personalized recognition: enables the improvement of
speech recognition accuracy.
• Google Account dashboard: allows you to manage your
collected data.
• Bluetooth headset: records audio through a connected
Bluetooth headset.
5. Scroll down to the General section to access the
following options:
• Speech rate: Set the speed at which the text is spoken.
• Listen to an example: Play a sample of speech synthesis
(available if voice data is installed).
Pointer speed
This option sets your Pointer speed for your mouse or
trackpad when you are using a keyboard dock accessory.
1. From the Home screen, tap
(Apps) ➔ Settings ➔
(My device tab) ➔ Language and input.
My device
3. Tap Text-to-speech options and select Samsung text-tospeech engine or Google Text-to-speech Engine.
2. Tap Pointer speed then drag the slider to the right to go
faster or to the left to go slower.
4. Tap
next to the preferred TTS engine configure the
following settings:
• Language: allows you to set the language for spoken text.
3. Tap OK to save your setting.
• Settings for Google Text-to-speech Engine: allows you to
view Open Source Licenses.
• Settings for Samsung text-to-speech engine allows you to
view Open Source Licenses.
• Install voice data: allows you to install voice data for speech
synthesis.
Changing Your Settings
215
Motions and Gestures
The Motions and Gestures settings allow you to set up
various Motion activation services. For more information on
using gestures, see “Using Motions and Gestures” on
page 26.
From the Home screen, tap
(Apps) ➔ Settings ➔
(My device tab) ➔ Motions and gestures.
My device
Motion
Motion allows you to control your device by performing
natural movements.
1. From the Motions and gestures screen, tap Motion.
2. Tap the ON/OFF icon
to activate Motion.
at the top of your screen
3. The following options are available:
• Direct call: Once enabled, the device will dial the currently
displayed on-screen Contact entry as soon as you place the
device to your ear. Tap the ON/OFF icon
to turn it on.
• Smart alert: Once enabled, pickup the device to be alerted and
notified of you have missed any calls or messages. Tap the ON/
OFF icon
to turn it on.
216
• Zoom: Once enabled, you must be on a screen where content
can be zoomed. In a single motion, touch and hold two points
on the display then tilt the tilt the device back and forth to zoom
in or out. Tap the ON/OFF icon
to turn it on.
• Move an icon: Once enable, you can move an icon to another
page by holding the icon, then moving the device to the left or
right. Tap the ON/OFF icon
to turn it on.
• Browse an image: Once enabled, touch and hold a desired
on-screen image to pan around it. Move the device left or right
to pan vertically or up and down to pan horizontally. Tap the ON/
OFF icon
to turn it on.
• Mute/pause: Once enabled, mute incoming calls and any
playing sounds by turning the device display down on a
surface. Tap the ON/OFF icon
to turn it on.
Palm motion
Gyroscope calibration
Palm motion allows you to control your device by touching
your screen with the palm of your hand.
1. From the Motions and gestures screen, tap Palm
motion.
2. Tap the ON/OFF icon
to activate Palm motion.
at the top of your screen
3. The following options are available:
• Capture screen: Once enabled, you can capture any
on-screen information swiping across the screen. In a single
motion, press the side of your hand on the screen and swipe
form left to right. The image is then copied to the clipboard. Tap
the ON/OFF icon
to turn it on.
• Mute/pause: Once enabled, you can pause any on-screen
video or mute any current sound by simply covering the screen
with your hand. Once you remove your hand from the screen,
the device goes back to normal by either continuing to play the
current video or unmuting the current sound. Tap the ON/OFF
icon
to turn it on.
Gyroscope calibration allows you to calibrate motion
correctly using the device’s built-in gyroscope.
1. From the Motions and gestures screen, tap Gyroscope
calibration.
2. Place your device on a flat surface.
3. Tap Calibrate.
4. When finished, Calibrated will appear on your screen.
Tap
to return to the previous screen.
Smart screen
The Smart screen options allow you to customize your
screen settings to make the screen more responsive and
easier to use.
1. From the Home screen, tap
(Apps) ➔ Settings ➔
(My device tab) ➔ Smart screen.
My device
2. Tap any of the following options to create a checkmark
and activate the features:
• Smart stay: disables the screen timeout if your phone detects
that your face is watching the screen.
Changing Your Settings
217
Air view
With the Air view feature, you can hover your finger over the
screen and Air view features will be displayed. For example,
you can hover your finger over a scheduled item in your
calendar to see more details.
1. From the Home screen, tap
(Apps) ➔ Settings ➔
(My device tab) ➔ Air view.
My device
2. Tap the ON/OFF icon
to activate Air view.
at the top of your screen
• Webpage magnifier: allows you to see magnified links on
webpages when you hover your finger over them.
• Sound and haptic feedback: allows you to play sound and
feel vibration when you hover your finger over Air view items.
Voice control
The Voice control settings allow you to set up voice
commands to control your device.
1. From the Home screen, tap
(Apps) ➔ Settings ➔
(My device tab) ➔ Voice control.
My device
3. The following options are available. Tap an option to
create a checkmark and activate the feature.
• Information preview: allows you to see information previews,
extended text, and enlarged images when you hover your
finger over the screen.
• Progress preview: allows you to preview a scene or show
elapsed time when you hover your finger over the progress bar
while watching a video.
• Speed dial preview: allows you to see the contacts and their
speed dial numbers when you hover your finger over them in
your contacts list.
218
2. Tap the ON/OFF icon
to activate Voice control.
at the top of your screen
3. The following options are available. Tap an option to
create a checkmark and activate the feature.
• Incoming calls: allows you to answer or reject calls using the
commands Answer and Reject.
• Alarm: allows you to stop or snooze an alarm by using the
commands Stop and Snooze.
• Camera: allows you to take pictures using the voice
commands Capture, Shoot, Smile, or Cheese.
• Music: allows you to control your Music app using the voice
commands Next, Previous, Play, Pause, Volume up, and
Volume down.
Note: If you set the alert type for calls or alarms to vibration,
voice control will not be available.
Add Account
This menu allows you to set up, manage, and synchronize
accounts, including your Google and email accounts.
Adding an Account
1. From the Home screen, tap
(Apps) ➔ Settings ➔
(Accounts tab) ➔ Add account.
2. Tap one of the account types.
3. Use the keyboard and follow the prompts to enter your
credentials and set up the account.
Removing an Account
Important! Removing an account also deletes all of its
messages, contacts, and other data from the
device.
1. From the Home screen, tap
(Accounts tab).
(Apps) ➔ Settings ➔
2. Tap the account which is located in the My accounts
section.
3. Tap the account name.
4. At the bottom of the screen, tap Remove account, then
tap Remove account at the prompt to remove the
account and delete all its messages, contacts, and
other data.
A green circle will appear next to the account type once
you have created an account. Your account will also be
displayed in the My accounts section of the main
Accounts menu.
Changing Your Settings
219
Synchronizing Accounts
Select the items you want to synchronize on your account
such as Books, Calendar, Contacts, and more.
1. From the Home screen, tap
(Apps) ➔ Settings ➔
(Accounts tab).
2. Tap the account which is located in the My accounts
section.
3. Select the account name from the top of the screen.
4. Tap Sync now to synchronize your account or only tap
the Sync items that you want to synchronize.
5. Tap Cancel sync to stop the synchronization.
6. Tap Account settings to access your account settings.
7. Tap Storage usage to see your storage usage for
different applications.
Cloud
This feature allows you to use your external cloud storage
solution to both synchronize your device to your Samsung
account and then backup that local content to the cloud.
Your device comes with a built-in Cloud storage solution
known as Dropbox.
Important! This feature requires an active Wi-Fi connection
prior to use.
1. Log into your Samsung account and verify it is active.
2. Log into your external cloud storage solution. In our
case we are using a Dropbox account. For more
information, refer to “Dropbox” on page 117.
3. From the Home screen, tap
(Apps) ➔ Settings ➔
(Accounts tab) ➔ Cloud.
4. Confirm your Samsung account appears at the top of
the screen.
5. Tap Storage usage to display an overview of your total
used space.
220
6. Tap Sync settings, select which device parameters will
be synched, and tap Sync now. Choose from: Sync
Calendar, Sync Contacts, Sync Internet, and Sync
Scrapbook.
Back up and reset
7. Tap Backup or Restore to launch the feature.
• Backup: manually loads up the currently selected categories
and backs up the data to your cloud storage location. Tap
Backup to begin the manual backup process.
Back Up My Data
• Restore: allows you to retrieve your previously backed up data
from your Samsung account and then download it to your
device.
8. Tap Link Dropbox account ➔ Allow to now link your
active Dropbox account.
The Back up and reset settings allow you to back up your
data, back up accounts, automatically restore your phone,
and reset your phone settings to the factory settings.
By setting this option, the Google server will back up all of
your settings and data.
1. From the Home screen, tap
(Apps) ➔ Settings ➔
(Accounts tab) ➔ Back up and reset.
2. Tap Back up my data to enable or disable back up of
application data, WI-Fi passwords, and other settings
to the Google server.
Backup Account
If you have enabled the Back up my data option, then the
Backup account option is available.
1. From the Home screen, tap
(Apps) ➔ Settings ➔
(Accounts tab) ➔ Back up and reset.
2. Tap Backup account and tap your Google Gmail account
or tap Add account to set your Google Gmail account to
be backed up to the Google server.
Changing Your Settings
221
Automatic Restore
By setting this option, when you reinstall an application, all of
your backed up settings and data will be restored.
1. From the Home screen, tap
(Apps) ➔ Settings ➔
(Accounts tab) ➔ Back up and reset.
2. Tap Automatic restore to enable or disable automatic
restoration of settings from the Google server.
Factory Data Reset
From this menu you can reset your phone and sound settings
to the factory default settings.
1. From the Home screen, tap
(Apps) ➔ Settings ➔
(Accounts tab) ➔ Back up and reset.
2. Tap Factory data reset.
The Factory data reset screen displays reset
information.
3. Tap Reset device, then follow the prompts to perform
the reset.
Warning! Performing a Factory data reset will erase all data
from your phone and internal SD card, including your
Google account, system and application data and
settings, and downloaded applications. It will not
erase current system software, bundled
applications, and external SD card files such as
music and photos.
Location services
The Location services settings allow you to set up how the
phone will determine your location and the sensor settings
for your phone.
1. From the Home screen, tap
(Apps) ➔ Settings ➔
(More tab) ➔ Location services.
More
2. Tap any of the following options to create a checkmark
and activate the service:
• Access to my location: allows apps that have asked your
permission to use your location information. Tap the ON/OFF
icon
to turn it on.
• Use GPS satellites: allows applications to use GPS to pinpoint
your location.
222
• Use wireless networks: allows applications to use data from
mobile networks and Wi-Fi to help determine your location.
• My places: allows you to add location information for your
Home, Office, and Car.
Security
The Security settings allow you to determine the security
level for your phone.
Encryption
To require a numeric PIN or password to decrypt your phone
each time you power it on or encrypt the data on your SD
card each time it is connected:
1. From the Home screen, tap
(Apps) ➔ Settings ➔
(More tab) ➔ Security.
More
2. You must first set up a screen lock type if you haven’t
already done so. For more information, refer to “Screen
Lock” on page 191.
3. Tap Encrypt device. For more information, read the
displayed help screen.
4. Tap Encrypt external SD card to enable the encryption
on SD card data that requires a password be entered
each time the microSD card is connected.
Tip: Make sure your battery is charged more than 80 percent.
Encryption may take an hour or more.
Set up SIM card lock
Prevent another user from using your SIM card to make
unauthorized calls or from accessing information stored on
your SIM card by protecting the information using a PIN code.
When enabled, your phone will ask for a PIN number each
time you use the phone. Using this option you can also
change your SIM PIN number.
1. From the Home screen, tap
(Apps) ➔ Settings ➔
(More tab) ➔ Security.
More
2. Tap Set up SIM card lock.
3. Tap Lock SIM card, enter your SIM PIN code, then tap
OK.
Note: You must activate Lock SIM card before you can change
your SIM PIN code.
4. Tap Change SIM PIN.
5. Enter your old SIM PIN code and tap OK.
6. Enter your new SIM PIN code and tap OK.
Changing Your Settings
223
7. Re-type your new SIM PIN code and tap OK.
Make passwords visible
When enabled, password characters display briefly as you
touch them while entering passwords.
1. From the Home screen, tap
(Apps) ➔ Settings ➔
(More tab) ➔ Security.
More
2. Tap Make passwords visible to create a checkmark and
enable or disable the display of password characters.
Device Administrators
The Device Administration feature allows you to select one or
more administration applications that control your device for
security purposes (for example, if your phone is lost of
stolen). These applications enforce remote or local device
security policies.
Some of the features a device administration application
might control are:
• Setting the number of failed password attempts before the
device is restored to factory settings.
• Automatically locking the device.
• Restoring factory settings on the device.
224
Note: If a device uses multiple enabled administration
applications, the strictest policy is enforced.
1. From the Home screen, tap
(More tab) ➔ Security.
(Apps) ➔ Settings ➔
More
2. Tap Device administrators.
3. Select a device administrator and follow the prompts. If
no device administrators are listed, you can download
them from the Play Store.
Unknown sources
This feature allows you to download and install non-Market
applications.
1. From the Home screen, tap
(Apps) ➔ Settings ➔
(More tab) ➔ Security.
More
2. Tap Unknown sources.
A check mark is displayed to indicate it is active.
Warning! Enabling this option causes your phone and personal
data to be more vulnerable to attack by applications
from unknown sources.
Verify apps
This feature allows you to either block or warn you before
installing apps that may cause harm to your phone.
1. From the Home screen, tap
(Apps) ➔ Settings ➔
(More tab) ➔ Security.
More
2. Tap Verify apps.
A check mark is displayed to indicate it is active.
Trusted Credentials
If a certificate authority (CA) certificate gets compromised or
for some other reason you do not trust it, you can disable or
remove it.
1. From the Home screen, tap
(Apps) ➔ Settings ➔
(More tab) ➔ Security.
More
4. Scroll to the bottom of the details screen and tap Turn
off to disable a System certificate or Remove to remove
a User certificate.
Caution! When you disable a system CA certificate, the Disable
button changes to Enable, so you can enable the
certificate again, if necessary. When you remove a
user-installed CA certificate, it is permanently
deleted and must be re-installed, if needed.
5. Tap OK to return to the certificate list.
When enabled, a check mark appears in the check box.
Install from device storage
Install encrypted certificates from an installed memory card.
2. Tap Trusted credentials.
The trusted credentials screen has two tabs:
• System: Displays CA certificates that are permanently installed
in the ROM of your device.
• User: Displays any CA certificates that you installed, for
example, in the process of installing a client certificate.
3. Tap a CA certificate to examine its details.
Note: You must have installed a memory card containing
encrypted certificates to use this feature.
1. From the Home screen, tap
(More tab) ➔ Security.
(Apps) ➔ Settings ➔
More
2. Tap Install from device storage, then choose a
certificate and follow the prompts to install.
A scrolling screen displays the details.
Changing Your Settings
225
Clear credentials
Memory Usage
Clear stored credentials.
Note: This setting only appears if you have installed encrypted
certificates.
1. From the Home screen, tap
(More tab) ➔ Security.
(Apps) ➔ Settings ➔
More
2. Tap Clear credentials to remove all certificates.
Application Manager
You can download and install applications from Play Store or
create applications using the Android SDK and install them
on your device. Use Application manager settings to manage
applications.
Warning! Because this device can be configured with system
software not provided by or supported by Google or
any other company, end-users operate these devices
at their own risk.
226
See how memory is being used by Downloaded or Running
applications.
1. From the Home screen, tap
(Apps) ➔ Settings ➔
(More tab) ➔ Application manager.
More
2. Tap DOWNLOADED, ON SD CARD, RUNNING, or ALL to
display memory usage for that category of
applications.
The graph at the bottom of the Downloaded tab shows
used and free device memory. The graph at the bottom
of the Running tab shows used and free RAM.
Downloaded
Displays apps you have downloaded onto your device.
1. From the Home screen, tap
(Apps) ➔ Settings ➔
(More tab) ➔ Application manager.
More
2. Tap the DOWNLOADED tab to view a list of all the
downloaded applications on your device.
3. To switch the order of the lists displayed in the
(Menu) ➔ Sort by size or
Downloaded tabs, press
Sort by name.
4. To reset your application preferences, press
(Menu) ➔ Reset app preferences.
Note: This will reset the preferences for disabled apps,
disabled app notifications, default applications for
actions, and background data restrictions for apps. You
will not lose any app data.
Note: When you Reset app preferences, you will not lose any
app data.
5. Tap an application to view and update information
about the application, including memory usage, default
settings, and permissions.
Running Services
5. Tap an application to view and update information
about the application, including memory usage, default
settings, and permissions.
On SD Card
Displays apps you have downloaded onto your SD card.
1. From the Home screen, tap
(Apps) ➔ Settings ➔
(More tab) ➔ Application manager.
More
2. Tap the ON SD CARD tab to view a list of all the
downloaded applications on your device.
3. To switch the order of the lists displayed in the On SD
(Menu) ➔ Sort by size or Sort by
card tab, press
name.
4. To reset your application preferences, press
(Menu) ➔ Reset app preferences.
View and control services running on your device.
1. From the Home screen, tap
(Apps) ➔ Settings ➔
(More tab) ➔ Application manager.
More
2. Tap the RUNNING tab. All the applications that are
currently running on the device display.
3. Tap Show cached processes to display all the cached
processes that are running. Tap Show services in use to
switch back.
4. Tap one of the applications to view application
information.
The following options display:
• Stop: Stops the application from running on the device. This is
usually done prior to uninstalling the application.
Changing Your Settings
227
Warning! Not all services can be stopped. Stopping services
may have undesirable consequences on the
application or Android System.
• Report: Report failure and other application information.
Note: Options vary by application.
Battery
See how much battery power is used for device activities.
1. From the Home screen, tap
(Apps) ➔ Settings ➔
(More tab) ➔ Battery.
More
The battery level displays in percentage. The amount
of time the battery was used also displays. Battery
usage displays in percentages per application.
2. Tap Screen, Wi-Fi, Android OS or any other listed
application to view how it is affecting battery use.
Note: Other applications may be running that affect battery
use.
Storage
From this menu you can view the memory allocation for the
memory card and USB as well as mount or unmount the SD
card.
For more information about mounting or unmounting the SD
card, see “Memory Card” on page 41.
To view the memory allocation for your external SD card:
From the Home screen, tap
(Apps) ➔ Settings ➔
(More tab) ➔ Storage.The available memory
displays under the Total space and Available space
headings for both Device memory and SD card.
More
SD card
Tap Unmount SD card to unmount your SD card so that
you can safely remove it, then tap OK.
– or –
1. Tap Format SD card to format your SD card. This will
delete all data on your SD card including music, videos,
and photos.
2. Tap Format SD card again.
3. Tap Delete all to continue or press
228
to cancel.
Note: The Format SD card option is only available when your
SD card is mounted.
Date and time
This menu allows you to change the current time and date
displayed.
1. From the Home screen, tap
(Apps) ➔ Settings ➔
(More tab) ➔ Date and time.
7. Optional: Tap Use 24-hour format. If this is not selected
the phone automatically uses a 12-hour format.
8. Tap Select date format and tap the date format type.
About Device
This menu contains legal information, system tutorial
information, and other phone information such as the model
number, firmware version, baseband version, kernal version,
and software build number.
More
2. Tap Automatic date and time to allow the network to set
the date and time.
3. Tap Automatic time zone to allow the network to set the
time zone.
Important! Deactivate Automatic date and time to manually set
the rest of the options.
4. Tap Set date and tap the up and down arrows to set the
Month, Day, and Year then tap Set.
5. Tap Set time and tap the up and down arrows to set the
Hour, Minute, and PM/AM, then tap Set.
6. Tap Select time zone, then tap a time zone.
To access phone information:
1. From the Home screen, tap
(Apps) ➔ Settings ➔
(More tab) ➔ About device.
More
2. The following information displays:
• Software update: allows you to update your phone software, if
available. For more information, refer to “Software Update”
on page 230.
• Status: displays the Battery status, Battery level (percentage),
Network, Signal strength, Mobile network type, Service state,
Roaming status, Mobile network state, My phone number for
this device (My phone number), IMEI number, IMEISV
number,ICCID, IP address, Wi-Fi MAC address, Bluetooth
address, Serial number, Up time, and Device status.
Changing Your Settings
229
• Legal information: This option displays information about
Open source licenses, Google legal information, and Samsung
legal information. This information clearly provides copyright
and distribution legal information and facts as well as Google
Terms of Service, Terms of Service for Android-powered
Phones, and much more pertinent information as a reference.
Read the information and terms, then press
to return to
the Settings menu.
Software Update
• Model number: displays the phone’s model number.
The Software Update feature enables you to use your device
to connect to the network and upload any new software
directly to your device. The device automatically updates
with the latest available software when you access this
option.
• Android version: displays the android version loaded on this
handset.
The following icons show your Bluetooth connection status
at a glance:
• Device name: displays the phone’s model name.
• Baseband version: displays the baseband version loaded on
this handset.
Displays when the Software updated feature is
active.
• Kernel version: displays the kernel version loaded on this
handset.
Displays when the Software update feature is in
progress.
• Build number: displays the software, build number.
• SELinux status: displays the status of SELinux. SELinux is a
set of security policies/modules which is applied to the device
to improve the overall security.
• Secure boot status: displays the status of the Secure boot.
230
Note: Baseband, kernal and build numbers are usually used
for updates to the handset or support. For additional
information please contact your service representative.
To update your device:
1. From the Home screen, tap
(Apps) ➔ Settings ➔
(More tab) ➔ About device ➔ Software update.
More
2. Read the Software update information screen.
3. Select an available option:
Note: You configure the device’s software update parameters.
• Cancel: Tap this option to cancel the operation.
• Wi-Fi settings: Enable this option to only download available
updates via an active Wi-Fi connection. If disabled, the device
will begin available downloads via its’ metroPCS connection.
• OK: Tap this option to connect to the remote server, detect if
there is an available update, then begin the download over your
existing data connection.
Note: Software updates can include bug fixes, enhancements
to services, to the device or currently installed software.
Changing Your Settings
231
Section 10: Health and Safety Information
This device is capable of operating in Wi-Fi™ mode in the
2.4 and 5 GHz bands. The FCC requires that devices
operating within 5.15-5.25 GHz may only be used indoors,
not outside, in order to avoid interference with Mobile
Satellite Services (MSS). Therefore, this device is restricted
from being used outdoors when operating in frequencies
between 5.15-5.25 GHz.
This section outlines the safety precautions associated with
using your phone. The terms “mobile device” or “cell phone”
are used in this section to refer to your phone. Read this
information before using your mobile device.
Exposure to Radio Frequency (RF)
Signals
The U.S. Food and Drug Administration (FDA) has published
information for consumers relating to Radio Frequency (RF)
exposure from wireless phones. The FDA publication
includes the following information:
232
Do cell phones pose a health hazard?
Many people are concerned that cell phone radiation will
cause cancer or other serious health hazards. The weight of
scientific evidence has not linked cell phones with any health
problems.
Cell phones emit low levels of Radio Frequency (RF) energy.
Over the past 15 years, scientists have conducted hundreds
of studies looking at the biological effects of the radio
frequency energy emitted by cell phones. While some
researchers have reported biological changes associated
with RF energy, these studies have failed to be replicated.
The majority of studies published have failed to show an
association between exposure to radio frequency from a cell
phone and health problems.
The low levels of RF cell phones emit while in use are in the
microwave frequency range. They also emit RF at
substantially reduced time intervals when in the stand-by
mode. Whereas high levels of RF can produce health effects
(by heating tissue), exposure to low level RF that does not
produce heating effects causes no known adverse health
effects.
The biological effects of radio frequency energy should not
be confused with the effects from other types of
electromagnetic energy.
Very high levels of electromagnetic energy, such as is found
in X-rays and gamma rays, can ionize biological tissues.
Ionization is a process where electrons are stripped away
from their normal locations in atoms and molecules. It can
permanently damage biological tissues including DNA, the
genetic material.
The energy levels associated with radio frequency energy,
including both radio waves and microwaves, are not great
enough to cause ionization of atoms and molecules.
Therefore, RF energy is a type of non-ionizing radiation.
Other types of non-ionizing radiation include visible light,
infrared radiation (heat), and other forms of electromagnetic
radiation with relatively low frequencies.
While RF energy does not ionize particles, large amounts can
increase body temperatures and cause tissue damage. Two
areas of the body, the eyes and the testes, are particularly
vulnerable to RF heating because there is relatively little
blood flow in them to carry away excess heat.
Research Results to Date: Is there a connection
between RF and certain health problems?
The results of most studies conducted to date say no. In
addition, attempts to replicate and confirm the few studies
that have shown a connection have failed.
The scientific community at large therefore believes that the
weight of scientific evidence does not show an association
between exposure to Radio Frequency (RF) from cell phones
and adverse health outcomes. Still the scientific community
has supported additional research to address gaps in
knowledge. Some of these studies are described below.
Interphone Study
Interphone is a large international study designed to
determine whether cell phones increase the risk of head and
neck cancer. A report published in the International Journal
of Epidemiology (June, 2010) compared cell phone usage for
more than 5,000 people with brain tumors (glioma and
meningioma) and a similar number of healthy controls.
Results of this study did NOT show that cell phones caused
brain cancer. In this study, most people had no increased risk
of brain cancer from using cell phones. For people with the
heaviest use of cell phones (an average of more than ½ hour
per day, every day, for over 10 years) the study suggested a
Health and Safety Information
233
slight increase in brain cancer. However, the authors
determined that biases and errors prevented any conclusions
being drawn from this data. Additional information about
Interphone can be found at
http://www.iarc.fr/en/media-centre/pr/2010/pdfs/pr200_E.pdf.
Interphone is the largest cell phone study to date, but it did
not answer all questions about cell phone safety. Additional
research is being conducted around the world, and the FDA
continues to monitor developments in this field.
International Cohort Study on Mobile Phone Users
(COSMOS)
The COSMOS study aims to conduct long-term health
monitoring of a large group of people to determine if there
are any health issues linked to long-term exposure to radio
frequency energy from cell phone use. The COSMOS study
will follow approximately 300,000 adult cell phone users in
Europe for 20 to 30 years. Additional information about the
COSMOS study can be found at
http://www.ukcosmos.org/index.html.
234
Risk of Brain Cancer from Exposure to Radio
Frequency Fields in Childhood and Adolescence
(MOBI-KIDS)
MOBI-KIDS is an international study investigating the
relationship between exposure to radio frequency energy
from communication technologies including cell phones and
brain cancer in young people. This is an international
multi-center study involving 14 European and non-European
countries. Additional information about MOBI-KIDS can be
found at
http://www.creal.cat/programes-recerca/en_projectes-creal/
view.php?ID=39.
Surveillance, Epidemiology, and End Results (SEER)
Program of the National Cancer Institute
The National Cancer Institute (NCI) actively follows cancer
statistics in the United States to detect any change in rates of
new cases for brain cancer. If cell phones play a role in risk
for brain cancer, rates should go up, because heavy cell
phone use has been common for quite some time in the U.S.
Between 1987 and 2005, the overall age-adjusted incidence
of brain cancer did not increase. Additional information about
SEER can be found at
http://seer.cancer.gov/.
Cell Phone Industry Actions
Although the existing scientific data do not justify FDA
regulatory actions, the FDA has urged the cell phone industry
to take a number of steps, including the following:
• Support-needed research on possible biological effects of RF
for the type of signal emitted by cell phones;
• Design cell phones in a way that minimizes any RF exposure to
the user; and
• Cooperate in providing users of cell phones with the current
information on cell phone use and human health concerns.
The FDA also is working with voluntary standard-setting
bodies such as the Institute of Electrical and Electronics
Engineers (IEEE), the International Commission on
Non-Ionizing Radiation Protection (ICNIRP), and others to
assure that safety standards continue to adequately protect
the public.
Reducing Exposure: Hands-Free Kits and Other
Accessories
Steps to Reduce Exposure to Radio Frequency Energy
If there is a risk from being exposed to radio frequency
energy (RF) from cell phones - and at this point we do not
know that there is - it is probably very small. But, if you are
concerned about avoiding even potential risks, you can take
a few simple steps to minimize your RF exposure.
• Reduce the amount of time spent using your cell phone;
• Use speaker mode or a headset to place more distance between
your head and the cell phone.
Hands-Free Kits
Hands-free kits may include audio or Bluetooth® headsets
and various types of body-worn accessories such as
belt-clips and holsters. Combinations of these can be used to
reduce RF energy absorption from cell phones.
Headsets can substantially reduce exposure because the
phone is held away from the head in the user's hand or in
approved body-worn accessories. Cell phones marketed in
the U.S. are required to meet RF exposure compliance
requirements when used against the head and against the
body.
Health and Safety Information
235
Because there are no known risks from exposure to RF
emissions from cell phones, there is no reason to believe that
hands-free kits reduce risks. Hands-free kits can be used for
convenience and comfort. They are also required by law in
many states if you want to use your phone while driving.
Cell Phone Accessories that Claim to Shield the Head
from RF Radiation
Because there are no known risks from exposure to RF
emissions from cell phones, there is no reason to believe that
accessories which claim to shield the head from those
emissions reduce risks. Some products that claim to shield
the user from RF absorption use special phone cases, while
others involve nothing more than a metallic accessory
attached to the phone.
Studies have shown that these products generally do not
work as advertised. Unlike “hands-free” kits, these so-called
“shields” may interfere with proper operation of the phone.
The phone may be forced to boost its power to compensate,
leading to an increase in RF absorption.
236
Children and Cell Phones
The scientific evidence does not show a danger to any users
of cell phones from RF exposure, including children and
teenagers. The steps adults can take to reduce RF exposure
apply to children and teenagers as well.
• Reduce the amount of time spent on the cell phone;
• Use speaker mode or a headset to place more distance between
the head and the cell phone.
Some groups sponsored by other national governments have
advised that children be discouraged from using cell phones
at all. For example, The Stewart Report from the United
Kingdom made such a recommendation in December 2000.
In this report, a group of independent experts noted that no
evidence exists that using a cell phone causes brain tumors
or other ill effects. Their recommendation to limit cell phone
use by children was strictly precautionary; it was not based
on scientific evidence that any health hazard exists.
Additional information on the safety of RF exposures from
various sources can be obtained from the following
organizations (updated 10/1/2010):
• FCC RF Safety Program:
http://www.fcc.gov/oet/rfsafety/.
• Environmental Protection Agency (EPA):
http://www.epa.gov/radtown/wireless-tech.html.
• Occupational Safety and Health Administration (OSHA):
http://www.osha.gov/SLTC/radiofrequencyradiation/.
(Note: This web address is case sensitive.)
• National Institute for Occupational Safety and Health (NIOSH):
http://www.cdc.gov/niosh/.
• World Health Organization (WHO):
http://www.who.int/peh-emf/en/.
• International Commission on Non-Ionizing Radiation Protection:
http://www.icnirp.de.
• Health Protection Agency:
http://www.hpa.org.uk/Topics/Radiation/.
• US Food and Drug Administration:
http://www.fda.gov/Radiation-EmittingProducts/
RadiationEmittingProductsandProcedures/
HomeBusinessandEntertainment/CellPhones/default.htm.
Specific Absorption Rate (SAR)
Certification Information
Your wireless phone is a radio transmitter and receiver. It is
designed and manufactured not to exceed the exposure
limits for Radio Frequency (RF) energy set by the Federal
Communications Commission (FCC) of the U.S. Government.
These FCC RF exposure limits are derived from the
recommendations of two expert organizations: the National
Council on Radiation Protection and Measurement (NCRP)
and the Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers
(IEEE). In both cases, the recommendations were developed
by scientific and engineering experts drawn from industry,
government, and academia after extensive reviews of the
scientific literature related to the biological effects of RF
energy.
The RF exposure limit set by the FCC for wireless mobile
phones employs a unit of measurement known as the
Specific Absorption Rate (SAR). The SAR is a measure of the
rate of absorption of RF energy by the human body
expressed in units of watts per kilogram (W/kg). The FCC
requires wireless phones to comply with a safety limit of 1.6
watts per kilogram (1.6 W/kg).
Health and Safety Information
237
The FCC SAR limit incorporates a substantial margin of safety
to give additional protection to the public and to account for
any variations in measurements.
SAR tests are conducted using standard operating positions
accepted by the FCC with the phone transmitting at its
highest certified power level in all tested frequency bands.
Although the SAR is determined at the highest certified
power level, the actual SAR level of the phone while
operating can be well below the maximum reported value.
This is because the phone is designed to operate at multiple
power levels so as to use only the power required to reach
the network. In general, the closer you are to a wireless base
station antenna, the lower the power output of the phone.
Before a new model phone is available for sale to the public,
it must be tested and certified to the FCC that it does not
exceed the SAR limit established by the FCC. Tests for each
model phone are performed in positions and locations (e.g. at
the ear and worn on the body) as required by the FCC. For
body-worn operation, this phone has been tested and meets
FCC RF exposure guidelines when used with an accessory
that contains no metal and that positions the mobile device a
minimum of 1.0 cm from the body.
238
Use of other accessories may not ensure compliance with
FCC RF exposure guidelines. The FCC has granted an
Equipment Authorization for this mobile device with all
reported SAR levels evaluated as in compliance with the FCC
RF exposure guidelines.
This [mobile phone/tablet/device] has a FCC ID number:
A3LSGHM819N [Model Number: SGH-M819N and the
specific SAR levels for this [mobile phone/tablet/device] can
be found at the following FCC website:
http://www.fcc.gov/oet/ea/.
The SAR information for this device can also be found on
Samsung’s website:
http://www.samsung.com/sar.
SAR information on this and other model phones can be
accessed online on the FCC's website through http://
transition.fcc.gov/oet/rfsafety/sar.html. To find information that
pertains to a particular model phone, this site uses the phone
FCC ID number which is usually printed somewhere on the
case of the phone. Sometimes it may be necessary to
remove the battery pack to find the number. Once you have
the FCC ID number for a particular phone, follow the
instructions on the website and it should provide values for
typical or maximum SAR for a particular phone. Additional
SAR information can also be obtained at
http://www.fcc.gov/encyclopedia/specific-absorption-rate-sarcellular-telephones.
which can be determined by turning the equipment off and
on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference
by one or more of the following measures:
• Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna.
Pursuant to part 15.21 of the FCC Rules, you are cautioned
that changes or modifications not expressly approved by
Samsung could void your authority to operate the device.
• Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver.
• Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from
This device complies with part 15 of the FCC Rules.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This
device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this
device must accept any interference received, including
interference that may cause undesired operation.
• Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help.
FCC Part 15 Information to User
Note: This equipment has been tested and found to comply
with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to part
15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide
reasonable protection against harmful interference in a
residential installation. This equipment generates, uses and
can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and
used in accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful
interference to radio communications.
that to which the receiver is connected.
Commercial Mobile Alerting System
(CMAS)
This device is designed to receive wireless emergency alerts
from the Commercial Mobile Alerting System ("CMAS";
which may also be known as the Personal Localized Alerting
Network ("PLAN")). If your wireless provider has chosen to
participate in CMAS/PLAN, alerts are available while in the
provider's coverage area. If you travel outside your provider's
coverage area, wireless emergency alerts may not be
available. For more information, please contact your wireless
provider.
However, there is no guarantee that interference will not
occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does
cause harmful interference to radio or television reception,
Health and Safety Information
239
Smart Practices While Driving
On the Road - Off the Phone
The primary responsibility of every driver is the safe
operation of his or her vehicle.
Responsible drivers understand that no secondary task
should be performed while driving whether it be eating,
drinking, talking to passengers, or talking on a mobile phone
- unless the driver has assessed the driving conditions and is
confident that the secondary task will not interfere with their
primary responsibility. Do not engage in any activity while
driving a moving vehicle which may cause you to take your
eyes off the road or become so absorbed in the activity that
your ability to concentrate on the act of driving becomes
impaired. Samsung is committed to promoting responsible
driving and giving drivers the tools they need to understand
and address distractions.
Check the laws and regulations on the use of mobile devices
and their accessories in the areas where you drive. Always
obey them. The use of these devices may be prohibited or
restricted in certain areas. For example, only hands-free use
may be permitted in certain areas.
240
Before answering calls, consider your circumstances. Let the
call go to voicemail when driving conditions require.
Remember, driving comes first, not the call!
If you consider a call necessary and appropriate, follow these
tips:
• Use a hands-free device;
• Secure your phone within easy reach;
• Place calls when you are not moving;
• Plan calls when your car will be stationary;
• Do not engage in stressful or emotional conversations;
• Let the person with whom you are speaking know that you are
driving and will suspend the call if necessary;
• Do not take notes or look up phone numbers while driving;
Notice regarding legal restrictions on mounting this device in
an automobile:
Laws in some states may prohibit mounting this device on or
near the windshield of an automobile. In other states, the law
may permit mounting this device only in specific locations in
the automobile. Be sure to consult the state and local laws or
ordinances where you drive before mounting this device in
an automobile. Failure to comply with these restrictions could
result in fines, penalties, or other damages.
Never mount this device in a manner that will obstruct the
driver's clear view of the street and traffic.
Never use wireless data services such as text messaging, Web
browsing, or e-mail while operating a vehicle.
Never watch videos, such as a movie or clip, or play video
games while operating a vehicle.
For more information, go to http://www.ctia.org.
Battery Use and Safety
Important! Handle and store batteries properly to avoid injury or
damage. Most battery issues arise from improper
handling of batteries and, particularly, from the
continued use of damaged batteries.
• Do not disassemble, crush, puncture, shred, or otherwise
attempt to change the form of your battery. Do not put a high
degree of pressure on the battery. This can cause leakage or an
internal short-circuit, resulting in overheating.
• Do not let the phone or battery come in contact with liquids.
Liquids can get into the phone's circuits, leading to corrosion.
Even when the phone appears to be dry and appears to operate
normally, the circuitry could slowly corrode and pose a safety
hazard. If the phone and/or battery get wet, have them checked
by your service provider or contact Samsung, even if they appear
to be working properly.
• Do not place your battery in or near a heat source. Excessive
heating can damage the phone or the battery and could cause the
phone or the battery to explode. Do not dry a wet or damp battery
with an appliance or heat source such as a microwave oven, hair
dryer, iron, or radiator. Avoid leaving your phone in your car in
high temperatures.
• Do not dispose of the phone or the battery in a fire. The phone
or the battery may explode when overheated.
• Do not handle a damaged or leaking battery. Do not let leaking
battery fluid come in contact with your eyes, skin or clothing. For
safe disposal options, contact your nearest Samsung-authorized
service center.
Health and Safety Information
241
• Avoid dropping the cell phone. Dropping the phone or the
battery, especially on a hard surface, can potentially cause
damage to the phone and battery. If you suspect damage to the
phone or battery, take it to a service center for inspection.
• Never use any charger or battery that is damaged in any way.
• Do not allow the battery to touch metal objects. Accidental
short-circuiting can occur when a metallic object (coin, key,
jewelry, clip, or pen) causes a direct connection between the +
and - terminals of the battery (metal strips on the battery), for
example when you carry a spare battery in a pocket or bag.
Short-circuiting the terminals may damage the battery or the
object causing the short-circuiting.
Important! Use only Samsung-approved batteries, and
recharge your battery only with
Samsung-approved chargers which are
specifically designed for your phone.
242
WARNING!
Use of a non-Samsung-approved battery or charger may
present a risk of fire, explosion, leakage, or other hazard.
Samsung's warranty does not cover damage to the phone
caused by non-Samsung-approved batteries and/or
chargers.
• Do not use incompatible cell phone batteries and chargers.
Some websites and second-hand dealers not associated with
reputable manufacturers and carriers, might be selling
incompatible or even counterfeit batteries and chargers.
Consumers should purchase manufacturer or
carrier-recommended products and accessories. If unsure about
whether a replacement battery or charger is compatible, contact
the manufacturer of the battery or charger.
• Misuse or use of incompatible phones, batteries, and
charging devices could result in damage to the equipment
and a possible risk of fire, explosion, or leakage, leading to
serious injuries, damages to your phone, or other serious
hazard.
Samsung Mobile Products and
Recycling
Samsung cares for the environment and encourages its
customers to recycle Samsung mobile devices and genuine
Samsung accessories.
Proper disposal of your mobile device and its battery is not
only important for safety, it benefits the environment.
Batteries must be recycled or disposed of properly.
Recycling programs for your mobile device, batteries, and
accessories may not be available in your area.
We've made it easy for you to recycle your old Samsung
mobile device by working with respected take-back
companies in every state in the country.
Drop It Off
You can drop off your Samsung-branded mobile device
and batteries for recycling at one of our numerous
Samsung Recycling Direct (SM) locations. A list of these
locations may be found at:
Samsung-branded devices and batteries will be accepted
at these locations for no fee.
Consumers may also recycle their used mobile device or
batteries at many retail or carrier-provided locations
where mobile devices and batteries are sold. Additional
information regarding specific locations may be found at:
http://www.epa.gov/epawaste/partnerships/plugin/cellphone/
index.htm or at http://www.call2recycle.org/.
Mail It In
The Samsung Mobile Take-Back Program will provide
Samsung customers with a free recycling mailing label.
Just go to
http://fun.samsungmobileusa.com/recycling/index.jsp.
Dispose of unwanted electronics through an approved
recycler.
To find the nearest recycling location, go to our website:
www.samsung.com/recyclingdirect
Or call, (877) 278-0799.
http://pages.samsung.com/us/recyclingdirect/
usactivities_environment_samsungrecyclingdirect_locations.jsp
.
Health and Safety Information
243
Follow local regulations regarding disposal of mobile
devices and batteries
Dispose of your mobile device and batteries in accordance
with local regulations. In some areas, the disposal of these
items in household or business trash may be prohibited. Help
us protect the environment - recycle!
Warning! Never dispose of batteries in a fire because they may
explode.
UL Certified Travel Charger
The Travel Charger for this phone has met applicable UL
safety requirements. Please adhere to the following safety
instructions per UL guidelines:
FAILURE TO FOLLOW THE INSTRUCTIONS OUTLINED MAY
LEAD TO SERIOUS PERSONAL INJURY AND POSSIBLE
PROPERTY DAMAGE.
IMPORTANT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS - SAVE THESE
INSTRUCTIONS.
DANGER - TO REDUCE THE RISK OF FIRE OR
ELECTRIC SHOCK, CAREFULLY FOLLOW THESE
INSTRUCTIONS.
244
FOR CONNECTION TO A SUPPLY NOT IN NORTH
AMERICA, USE AN ATTACHMENT PLUG ADAPTOR
OF THE PROPER CONFIGURATION FOR THE
POWER OUTLET.
THIS POWER UNIT IS INTENDED TO BE
CORRECTLY ORIENTED IN A VERTICAL OR
HORIZONTAL OR FLOOR MOUNT POSITION.
Display / Touch-Screen
Please note the following information when using your
mobile device:
WARNING REGARDING DISPLAY
The display on your mobile device is made of glass or
acrylic and could break if your mobile device is
dropped or if it receives significant impact. Do not use
if screen is broken or cracked as this could cause
injury to you.
WARRANTY DISCLAIMER: PROPER USE OF A
TOUCH-SCREEN MOBILE DEVICE
If your mobile device has a touch-screen display,
please note that a touch-screen responds best to a
light touch from the pad of your finger or a non-metallic
stylus. Using excessive force or a metallic object when
pressing on the touch-screen may damage the
tempered glass surface and void the warranty. For
more information, please refer to the “Standard
Limited Warranty”.
GPS
Certain Samsung mobile devices can use a Global Positioning
System (GPS) signal for location-based applications. A GPS
uses satellites controlled by the U.S. Government that are
subject to changes implemented in accordance with the
Department of Defense policy and the 2008 Federal Radio
navigation Plan (FRP). Changes may affect the performance
of location-based technology on your mobile device.
Even with GPS, when you make an emergency call:
• Always tell the emergency responder your location to the best of
your ability; and
• Remain on the mobile device for as long as the emergency
responder instructs you.
Navigation
Maps, directions, and other navigation-data, including data
relating to your current location, may contain inaccurate or
incomplete data, and circumstances can and do change over
time. In some areas, complete information may not be
available. Therefore, you should always visually confirm that
the navigational instructions are consistent with what you see
before following them. All users should pay attention to road
conditions, closures, traffic, and all other factors that may
impact safe driving or walking. Always obey posted road signs.
Emergency Calls
This mobile device, like any wireless mobile device, operates
using radio signals, wireless and landline networks, as well
as user-programmed functions, which cannot guarantee
connection in all conditions, areas, or circumstances.
Therefore, you should never rely solely on any wireless
mobile device for essential communications (medical
emergencies, for example). Before traveling in remote or
underdeveloped areas, plan an alternate method of
contacting emergency services personnel. Remember, to
make or receive any calls, the mobile device must be
switched on and in a service area with adequate signal
strength.
Health and Safety Information
245
Emergency calls may not be possible on all wireless mobile
device networks or when certain network services and/or
mobile device features are in use. Check with local service
providers.
To make an emergency call:
1. If the mobile device is not on, switch it on.
2. From the Home screen, tap
.
3. Key in the emergency number for your present location
(for example, 911 or other official emergency number).
Emergency numbers vary by location.
4. Tap
.
If certain features are in use (call blocking, for example), you
may first need to deactivate those features before you can
make an emergency call. Consult your User Manual and your
local cellular service provider. When making an emergency
call, remember to give all the necessary information as
accurately as possible. Remember that your mobile device
may be the only means of communication at the scene of an
accident; do not cut off the call until given permission to do
so.
246
Care and Maintenance
Your mobile device is a product of superior design and
craftsmanship and should be treated with care. The
suggestions below will help you fulfill any warranty
obligations and allow you to enjoy this product for many
years:
Keep your Samsung Mobile Device away from:
Liquids of any kind
Keep the mobile device dry. Precipitation, humidity, and
liquids contain minerals that will corrode electronic
circuits. If the mobile device does get wet, do not
accelerate drying with the use of an oven, microwave, or
dryer, because this may damage the mobile device and
could cause a fire or explosion.
Do not use the mobile device with a wet hand. Doing so
may cause an electric shock to you or damage to the
mobile device.
Extreme heat or cold
Avoid temperatures below 0°C / 32°F or above 45°C /
113°F.
Microwaves
Responsible Listening
Do not try to dry your mobile device in a microwave oven.
Doing so may cause a fire or explosion.
Caution! Avoid potential hearing loss.
Dust and dirt
Do not expose your mobile device to dust, dirt, or sand.
Cleaning solutions
Do not use harsh chemicals, cleaning solvents, or strong
detergents to clean the mobile device. Wipe it with a soft
cloth slightly dampened in a mild soap-and-water
solution. If the mobile device has a retractable camera
lens, do not use soap and water to clean the lens. Use a
blower or brush or lens cleaning paper dampened in a
lens cleaning solution.
Shock or vibration
Do not drop, knock, or shake the mobile device. Rough
handling can break internal circuit boards.
Paint
Do not paint the mobile device. Paint can clog the
device’s moving parts or ventilation openings and prevent
proper operation.
Damage to hearing occurs when a person is exposed to loud
sounds over time. The risk of hearing loss increases as
sound is played louder and for longer durations. Prolonged
exposure to loud sounds (including music) is the most
common cause of preventable hearing loss. Some scientific
research suggests that using portable audio devices, such as
portable music players and cell phones, at high volume
settings for long durations may lead to permanent
noise-induced hearing loss.
This includes the use of headphones (including headsets,
earbuds, and Bluetooth® or other wireless devices).
Exposure to very loud sound has also been associated in
some studies with tinnitus (a ringing in the ear),
hypersensitivity to sound, and distorted hearing. Individual
susceptibility to noise-induced hearing loss and potential
hearing problem varies. Additionally, the amount of sound
produced by a portable audio device varies depending on the
nature of the sound, the device settings, and the headphones
Health and Safety Information
247
that are used. As a result, there is no single volume setting
that is appropriate for everyone or for every combination of
sound, settings, and equipment.
• Limit the amount of time you listen. As the volume increases, less
You should follow some common sense recommendations
when using any portable audio device:
• Always turn the volume down before plugging the earphones into
an audio source.
such as rock concerts, that might cause temporary hearing loss.
Temporary hearing loss might cause unsafe volumes to sound
normal.
• Set the volume in a quiet environment and select the lowest
volume at which you can hear adequately.
• Be aware that you can adapt to higher volume settings over time,
not realizing that the higher volume may be harmful to your
hearing.
time is required before you hearing could be affected.
• Avoid using headphones after exposure to extremely loud noises,
• Do not listen at any volume that causes you discomfort. If you
experience ringing in your ears, hear muffled speech, or
experience any temporary hearing difficulty after listening to your
portable audio device, discontinue use and consult your doctor.
You can obtain additional information on this subject from the
following sources:
• When using headphones, turn the volume down if you cannot
hear the people speaking near you or if the person sitting next to
you can hear what you are listening to.
• Do not turn the volume up to block out noisy surroundings. If you
choose to listen to your portable device in a noisy environment,
use noise-cancelling headphones to block out background
environmental noise. By blocking background environment noise,
noise cancelling headphones should allow you to hear the music
at lower volumes than when using earbuds.
248
American Academy of Audiology
11730 Plaza American Drive, Suite 300
Reston, VA 20190
Voice: (800) 222-2336
Email: info@audiology.org
Internet:
http://www.audiology.org/Pages/
default.aspx
National Institute on Deafness and Other
Communication Disorders
National Institutes of Health
31 Center Drive, MSC 2320
Bethesda, MD 20892-2320
Email: nidcdinfo@nih.gov
Internet:
http://www.nidcd.nih.gov/
National Institute for Occupational Safety
and Health (NIOSH)
395 E Street, S.W., Suite 9200
Patriots Plaza Building
Washington, DC 20201
Voice: 1-800-35-NIOSH
(1-800-356-4674)
1-800-CDC-INFO (1-800-232-4636)
Outside the U.S. 513-533-8328
Email: cdcinfo@cdc.gov
Internet:
http://www.cdc.gov/niosh/topics/noise/
default.html
1-888-232-6348 TTY
Operating Environment
Remember to follow any special regulations in force in any
area, and always switch your mobile device off whenever it is
forbidden to use it, or when it may cause interference or
danger. When connecting the mobile device or any accessory
to another device, read its user's guide for detailed safety
instructions. Do not connect incompatible products.
Using Your Mobile Device Near Other Electronic
Devices
Most modern electronic equipment is shielded from Radio
Frequency (RF) signals. However, certain electronic
equipment may not be shielded against the RF signals from
your wireless mobile device. Consult the manufacturer to
discuss alternatives.
Health and Safety Information
249
Implantable Medical Devices
A minimum separation of six (6) inches should be maintained
between a handheld wireless mobile device and an
implantable medical device, such as a pacemaker or
implantable cardioverter defibrillator, to avoid potential
interference with the device.
Persons who have such devices:
• Should ALWAYS keep the mobile device more than six (6) inches
from their implantable medical device when the mobile device is
turned ON;
• Should not carry the mobile device in a breast pocket;
• Should use the ear opposite the implantable medical device to
minimize the potential for interference;
• Should turn the mobile device OFF immediately if there is any
reason to suspect that interference is taking place;
• Should read and follow the directions from the manufacturer of
your implantable medical device. If you have any questions about
using your wireless mobile device with an implantable medical
device, consult your health care provider.
For more information see: http://www.fcc.gov/oet/rfsafety/rffaqs.html#.
250
Other Medical Devices
If you use any other personal medical devices, consult the
manufacturer of your device to determine if it is adequately
shielded from external RF energy. Your physician may be able
to assist you in obtaining this information. Switch your
mobile device off in health care facilities when any
regulations posted in these areas instruct you to do so.
Hospitals or health care facilities may be using equipment
that could be sensitive to external RF energy.
Vehicles
RF signals may affect improperly installed or inadequately
shielded electronic systems in motor vehicles. Check with
the manufacturer or its representative regarding your vehicle
before using your mobile device in a motor vehicle. You
should also consult the manufacturer of any equipment that
has been added to your vehicle.
Posted Facilities
Switch your mobile device off in any facility where posted
notices require you to do so.
Potentially Explosive Environments
Switch your mobile device off when in any area with a
potentially explosive atmosphere and obey all signs and
instructions. Sparks in such areas could cause an explosion
or fire resulting in bodily injury or even death. Users are
advised to switch the mobile device off while at a refueling
point (service station).
Users are reminded of the need to observe restrictions on the
use of radio equipment in fuel depots (fuel storage and
distribution areas), chemical plants, or where blasting
operations are in progress. Areas with a potentially explosive
atmosphere are often, but not always, clearly marked. They
include below deck on boats, chemical transfer or storage
facilities, vehicles using liquefied petroleum gas (such as
propane or butane), areas where the air contains chemicals
or particles, such as grain, dust, or metal powders, and any
other area where you would normally be advised to turn off
your vehicle engine. Vehicles using liquefied petroleum gas
(such as propane or butane) must comply with the National
Fire Protection Standard (NFPA-58). For a copy of this
standard, contact the National Fire Protection Association.
When your Device is Wet
Do not turn on your device if it is wet. If your device is
already on, turn it off and remove the battery immediately (if
the device will not turn off or you cannot remove the battery,
leave it as-is). Then, dry the device with a towel and take it
to a service center.
FCC Hearing Aid Compatibility (HAC)
Regulations for Wireless Devices
The U.S. Federal Communications Commission (FCC) has
established requirements for digital wireless mobile devices
to be compatible with hearing aids and other assistive
hearing devices.
When individuals employing some assistive hearing devices
(hearing aids and cochlear implants) use wireless mobile
devices, they may detect a buzzing, humming, or whining
noise. Some hearing devices are more immune than others
to this interference noise, and mobile devices also vary in the
amount of interference they generate.
The wireless telephone industry has developed a rating
system for wireless mobile devices to assist hearing device
users find mobile devices that may be compatible with their
hearing devices. Not all mobile devices have been rated.
Mobile devices that are rated have the rating on their box or
a label located on the box.
The ratings are not guarantees. Results will vary depending
on the user's hearing device and hearing loss. If your hearing
device happens to be vulnerable to interference, you may not
Health and Safety Information
251
be able to use a rated mobile device successfully. Trying out
the mobile device with your hearing device is the best way to
evaluate it for your personal needs.
hearing aid meets the M2 level rating and the wireless
mobile device meets the M3 level rating, the sum of the two
values equals M5.
M-Ratings: Wireless mobile devices rated M3 or M4 meet
FCC requirements and are likely to generate less interference
to hearing devices than mobile devices that are not labeled.
M4 is the better/higher of the two ratings. M-ratings refer to
enabling acoustic coupling with hearing aids that do not
operate in telecoil mode.
Under the standard, this should provide the hearing aid user
with normal use while using the hearing aid with the
particular wireless mobile device. A sum of 6 or more would
indicate excellent performance.
T-Ratings: Mobile devices rated T3 or T4 meet FCC
requirements and are likely to generate less interference to
hearing devices than mobile devices that are not labeled. T4
is the better/higher of the two ratings. T-ratings refer to
enabling inductive coupling with hearing aids operating in
telecoil mode.
However, these are not guarantees that all users will be
satisfied. T ratings work similarly.
M3
+
M2
=
5
T3
+
T2
=
5
Hearing devices may also be rated. Your hearing aid
manufacturer or hearing health professional may help you
find this rating. Higher ratings mean that the hearing device
is relatively immune to interference noise.
Under the current industry standard, American National
Standards Institute (ANSI) C63.19, the hearing aid and
wireless mobile device rating values are added together to
indicate how usable they are together. For example, if a
252
The HAC rating and measurement procedure are described in
the American National Standards Institute (ANSI) C63.19
standard.
HAC for Newer Technologies
This phone has been tested and rated for use with hearing
aids for some of the wireless technologies that it uses.
However, there may be some newer wireless technologies
used in this phone that have not been tested yet for use with
hearing aids.
It is important to try the different features of this phone
thoroughly and in different locations, using your hearing aid
or cochlear implant, to determine if you hear any interfering
noise. Consult your service provider or the manufacturer of
this phone for information on hearing aid compatibility. If you
have questions about return or exchange policies, consult
your service provider or phone retailer.
Restricting Children's Access to Your
Mobile Device
Your mobile device is not a toy. Do not allow children to play
with it because they could hurt themselves and others,
damage the mobile device, or make calls that increase your
mobile device bill.
Keep the mobile device and all its parts and accessories out
of the reach of small children.
FCC Notice and Cautions
FCC Notice
The mobile device may cause TV or radio interference if used
in close proximity to receiving equipment. The FCC can
require you to stop using the mobile device if such
interference cannot be eliminated.
Cautions
Any changes or modifications to your mobile device not
expressly approved by Samsung could void your warranty for
this equipment and void your authority to operate this
equipment. Only use approved batteries, antennas, and
chargers. The use of any unauthorized accessories may be
dangerous and void the mobile device warranty if said
accessories cause damage or a defect to the mobile device.
Although your mobile device is quite sturdy, it is a complex
piece of equipment and can be broken. Avoid dropping,
hitting, bending, or sitting on it.
Other Important Safety Information
• Only qualified personnel should service the mobile device or
install the mobile device in a vehicle. Faulty installation or service
may be dangerous and may invalidate any warranty applicable to
the device.
Health and Safety Information
253
• Ensure that any mobile devices or related equipment installed in
your vehicle are securely mounted.
• Check regularly that all wireless mobile device equipment in your
vehicle is mounted and operating properly.
• When using a headset in dry environments, static electricity can
build up in the headset and cause a small quick static electrical
shock. To minimize the risk of electrostatic discharge from the
headset avoid using the headset in extremely dry environments or
touch a grounded unpainted metal object to discharge static
electricity before inserting the headset.
• Do not store or carry flammable liquids, gases, or explosive
materials in the same compartment as the mobile device, its
parts, or accessories.
• For vehicles equipped with an air bag, remember that an air bag
inflates with great force. Do not place objects, including installed
or portable wireless equipment near or in the area over the air
bag or in the air bag deployment area. If wireless equipment is
improperly installed and the air bag inflates, serious injury could
result.
254
• Switch your mobile device off before boarding an aircraft. The use
of wireless mobile devices in aircraft is illegal and may be
dangerous to the aircraft's operation. Check with appropriate
authorities before using any function of a mobile device while on
an aircraft.
• Failure to observe these instructions may lead to the suspension
or denial of cell phone services to the offender, or legal action, or
both.
• While using your device, leave some lights on in the room and do
not hold the screen too close to your eyes.
• Seizures or blackouts can occur when you are exposed to flashing
lights while watching videos or playing games for extended
periods. If you feel any discomfort, stop using the device
immediately.
• Reduce risk of repetitive motion injuries. When you repetitively
perform actions, such as pressing keys, drawing characters on a
touch screen with your fingers, or playing games, you may
experience occasional discomfort in your hands, neck, shoulders,
or other parts of your body. When using your device for extended
periods, hold the device with a relaxed grip, press the keys lightly,
and take frequent breaks. If you continue to have discomfort
during or after such use, stop use and see a physician.
• If your device has a camera flash or light, do not use the flash or
light close to the eyes of people or pets. [122011]
Health and Safety Information
255
Section 11: Warranty Information
Standard Limited Warranty
What is covered and for how long?
SAMSUNG TELECOMMUNICATIONS AMERICA, LLC
(“SAMSUNG”) warrants that SAMSUNG’s handsets and
accessories (“Products”) are free from defects in material
and workmanship under normal use and service for the
period commencing upon the date of purchase by the first
consumer purchaser and continuing for the following
specified period of time after that date:
Device
1 Year
Battery(ies)*
1 Year
Case/Pouch/Holster*
90 Days
Other Device
Accessories*
1 Year
*If applicable.
What is not covered?
This Limited Warranty is conditioned upon proper use of the
Product.
256
This Limited Warranty does not cover: (a) defects or damage
resulting from accident, misuse, abnormal use, abnormal
conditions, improper storage, exposure to liquid, moisture,
dampness, sand or dirt, neglect, or unusual physical,
electrical or electromechanical stress; (b) scratches, dents
and cosmetic damage, unless caused by SAMSUNG;
(c) defects or damage resulting from excessive force or use
of a metallic object when pressing on a touch screen;
(d) equipment that has the serial number or the
enhancement data code removed, defaced, damaged,
altered or made illegible; (e) ordinary wear and tear;
(f) defects or damage resulting from the use of Product in
conjunction or connection with accessories, products, or
ancillary/peripheral equipment not furnished or approved by
SAMSUNG; (g) defects or damage resulting from improper
testing, operation, maintenance, installation, service, or
adjustment not furnished or approved by SAMSUNG;
(h) defects or damage resulting from external causes such as
collision with an object, fire, flooding, dirt, windstorm,
lightning, earthquake, exposure to weather conditions, theft,
blown fuse, or improper use of any electrical source;
(i) defects or damage resulting from cellular signal reception
or transmission, or viruses or other software problems
introduced into the Product; or (j) Product used or purchased
outside the United States. This Limited Warranty covers
batteries only if battery capacity falls below 80% of rated
capacity or the battery leaks, and this Limited Warranty does
not cover any battery if (i) the battery has been charged by a
battery charger not specified or approved by SAMSUNG for
charging the battery; (ii) any of the seals on the battery are
broken or show evidence of tampering; or (iii) the battery has
been used in equipment other than the SAMSUNG phone for
which it is specified.
What are SAMSUNG’s obligations?
During the applicable warranty period, provided the Product
is returned in accordance with the terms of this Limited
Warranty, SAMSUNG will repair or replace the Product, at
SAMSUNG’s sole option, without charge. SAMSUNG may, at
SAMSUNG’s sole option, use rebuilt, reconditioned, or new
parts or components when repairing any Product, or may
replace the Product with a rebuilt, reconditioned or new
Product.
Repaired/replaced cases, pouches and holsters will be
warranted for a period of ninety (90) days. All other repaired/
replaced Products will be warranted for a period equal to the
remainder of the original Limited Warranty on the original
Product or for ninety (90) days, whichever is longer. All
replaced Products, parts, components, boards and
equipment shall become the property of SAMSUNG. Except to
any extent expressly allowed by applicable law, transfer or
assignment of this Limited Warranty is prohibited.
What must you do to obtain warranty service?
To obtain service under this Limited Warranty, you must
return the Product to an authorized phone service facility in
an adequate container for shipping, accompanied by the
sales receipt or comparable proof of sale showing the
original date of purchase, the serial number of the Product
and the seller’s name and address.
To obtain assistance on where to deliver the Product, please
call SAMSUNG Customer Care at 1-888-987-4357. If
SAMSUNG determines that any Product is not covered by this
Limited Warranty, you must pay all parts, shipping, and labor
charges for the repair or return of such Product.
You should keep a separate backup copy of any contents of
the Product before delivering the Product to SAMSUNG for
warranty service, as some or all of the contents may be
deleted or reformatted during the course of warranty service.
Warranty Information
257
What are the limits on SAMSUNG’s liability?
THIS LIMITED WARRANTY SETS OUT THE FULL EXTENT OF
SAMSUNG’S RESPONSIBILITIES, AND THE EXCLUSIVE
REMEDY REGARDING THE PRODUCTS.
ALL IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING WITHOUT
LIMITATION, IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY
AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE, ARE LIMITED TO
THE DURATION OF THIS LIMITED WARRANTY. IN NO EVENT
SHALL SAMSUNG BE LIABLE FOR DAMAGES IN EXCESS OF
THE PURCHASE PRICE OF THE PRODUCT OR FOR, WITHOUT
LIMITATION, COMMERCIAL LOSS OF ANY SORT; LOSS OF
USE, TIME, DATA, REPUTATION, OPPORTUNITY, GOODWILL,
PROFITS OR SAVINGS; INCONVENIENCE; INCIDENTAL,
SPECIAL, CONSEQUENTIAL OR PUNITIVE DAMAGES; OR
DAMAGES ARISING FROM THE USE OR INABILITY TO USE THE
PRODUCT. SOME STATES AND JURISDICTIONS DO NOT
ALLOW LIMITATIONS ON HOW LONG AN IMPLIED WARRANTY
LASTS, OR THE DISCLAIMER OR LIMITATION OF INCIDENTAL
OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES, SO THE ABOVE LIMITATIONS
AND DISCLAIMERS MAY NOT APPLY TO YOU.
SAMSUNG MAKES NO WARRANTIES OR REPRESENTATIONS,
EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, STATUTORY OR OTHERWISE, AS TO
THE QUALITY, CAPABILITIES, OPERATIONS, PERFORMANCE
258
OR SUITABILITY OF ANY THIRD-PARTY SOFTWARE OR
EQUIPMENT USED IN CONJUNCTION WITH THE PRODUCT, OR
THE ABILITY TO INTEGRATE ANY SUCH SOFTWARE OR
EQUIPMENT WITH THE PRODUCT, WHETHER SUCH
THIRD-PARTY SOFTWARE OR EQUIPMENT IS INCLUDED WITH
THE PRODUCT DISTRIBUTED BY SAMSUNG OR OTHERWISE.
RESPONSIBILITY FOR THE QUALITY, CAPABILITIES,
OPERATIONS, PERFORMANCE AND SUITABILITY OF ANY
SUCH THIRD-PARTY SOFTWARE OR EQUIPMENT RESTS
SOLELY WITH THE USER AND THE DIRECT VENDOR, OWNER
OR SUPPLIER OF SUCH THIRD-PARTY SOFTWARE OR
EQUIPMENT.
Nothing in the Product instructions or information shall be
construed to create an express warranty of any kind with
respect to the Products. No agent, employee, dealer,
representative or reseller is authorized to modify or extend
this Limited Warranty or to make binding representations or
claims, whether in advertising, presentations or otherwise,
on behalf of SAMSUNG regarding the Products or this Limited
Warranty.
This Limited Warranty gives you specific legal rights, and you
may also have other rights that vary from state to state.
What is the procedure for resolving disputes?
ALL DISPUTES WITH SAMSUNG ARISING IN ANY WAY FROM
THIS LIMITED WARRANTY OR THE SALE, CONDITION OR
PERFORMANCE OF THE PRODUCTS SHALL BE RESOLVED
EXCLUSIVELY THROUGH FINAL AND BINDING ARBITRATION,
AND NOT BY A COURT OR JURY.
Any such dispute shall not be combined or consolidated with
a dispute involving any other person’s or entity’s Product or
claim, and specifically, without limitation of the foregoing,
shall not under any circumstances proceed as part of a class
action. The arbitration shall be conducted before a single
arbitrator, whose award may not exceed, in form or amount,
the relief allowed by the applicable law. The arbitration shall
be conducted according to the American Arbitration
Association (AAA) Commercial Arbitration Rules applicable to
consumer disputes. This arbitration provision is entered
pursuant to the Federal Arbitration Act. The laws of the State
of Texas, without reference to its choice of laws principles,
shall govern the interpretation of the Limited Warranty and all
disputes that are subject to this arbitration provision. The
arbitrator shall decide all issues of interpretation and
application of this arbitration provision and the Limited
Warranty.
For any arbitration in which your total damage claims,
exclusive of attorney fees and expert witness fees, are
$5,000.00 or less (“Small Claim”), the arbitrator may, if you
prevail, award your reasonable attorney fees, expert witness
fees and costs as part of any award, but may not grant
SAMSUNG its attorney fees, expert witness fees or costs
unless it is determined that the claim was brought in bad
faith. In a Small Claim case, you shall be required to pay no
more than half of the total administrative, facility and
arbitrator fees, or $50.00 of such fees, whichever is less, and
SAMSUNG shall pay the remainder of such fees.
Administrative, facility and arbitrator fees for arbitrations in
which your total damage claims, exclusive of attorney fees
and expert witness fees, exceed $5,000.00 (“Large Claim”)
shall be determined according to AAA rules. In a Large Claim
case, the arbitrator may grant to the prevailing party, or
apportion among the parties, reasonable attorney fees,
expert witness fees and costs. Judgment may be entered on
the arbitrator’s award in any court of competent jurisdiction.
This arbitration provision also applies to claims against
SAMSUNG’s employees, representatives and affiliates if any
such claim arises from the Product’s sale, condition or
performance.
Warranty Information
259
You may opt out of this dispute resolution procedure by
providing notice to SAMSUNG no later than 30 calendar days
from the date of the first consumer purchaser’s purchase of the
Product. To opt out, you must send notice by e-mail to
optout@sta.samsung.com, with the subject line: “Arbitration
Opt Out.” You must include in the opt out e-mail (a) your name
and address; (b) the date on which the Product was purchased;
(c) the Product model name or model number; and (d) the IMEI
or MEID or Serial Number, as applicable, if you have it (the IMEI
or MEID or Serial Number can be found (i) on the Product box;
(ii) on the Product information screen, which can be found
under “Settings;” (iii) on a label on the back of the Product
beneath the battery, if the battery is removable; and (iv) on the
outside of the Product if the battery is not removable).
Alternatively, you may opt out by calling 1-888-987-4357 no
later than 30 calendar days from the date of the first consumer
purchaser’s purchase of the Product and providing the same
information. These are the only two forms of notice that will be
effective to opt out of this dispute resolution procedure. Opting
out of this dispute resolution procedure will not affect the
coverage of the Limited Warranty in any way, and you will
continue to enjoy the benefits of the Limited Warranty.
260
Severability
If any portion of this Limited Warranty is held to be illegal or
unenforceable, such partial illegality or unenforceability shall
not affect the enforceability of the remainder of the Limited
Warranty.
Precautions for Transfer and Disposal
If data stored on this device is deleted or reformatted using
the standard methods, the data only appears to be removed
on a superficial level, and it may be possible for someone to
retrieve and reuse the data by means of special software.
To avoid unintended information leaks and other problems of
this sort, it is recommended that the device be returned to
Samsung’s Customer Care Center for an Extended File
System (EFS) Clear which will eliminate all user memory and
return all settings to default settings. Please contact the
Samsung Customer Care Center for details.
Important! Please provide warranty information (proof of
purchase) to Samsung’s Customer Care Center in
order to provide this service at no charge. If the
warranty has expired on the device, charges may
apply.
Samsung Telecommunications America, LLC
1301 E. Lookout Drive
Richardson, Texas 75082
Phone: 1-800-SAMSUNG
Phone: 1-888-987-HELP (4357)
No reproduction in whole or in part allowed without prior
written approval. Specifications and availability subject to
change without notice. [111611]
End User License Agreement for
Software
IMPORTANT. READ CAREFULLY: This End User License
Agreement ("EULA") is a legal agreement between you
(either an individual or a single entity) and Samsung
Electronics Co., Ltd. ("Samsung") for software, owned by
Samsung and its affiliated companies and its third party
suppliers and licensors, that accompanies this EULA, which
includes computer software and may include associated
media, printed materials, "online" or electronic
documentation in connection with your use of this device
("Software").
This device requires the use of preloaded software in its
normal operation. BY USING THE DEVICE OR ITS PRELOADED
SOFTWARE, YOU ACCEPT THE TERMS OF THIS EULA. IF YOU
DO NOT ACCEPT THESE TERMS, DO NOT USE THE DEVICE OR
THE SOFTWARE.
1. GRANT OF LICENSE. Samsung grants you the following
rights provided that you comply with all terms and conditions
of this EULA: You may install, use, access, display and run
one copy of the Software on the local hard disk(s) or other
permanent storage media of one computer and use the
Software on a single computer or a mobile device at a time,
and you may not make the Software available over a network
where it could be used by multiple computers at the same
time. You may make one copy of the Software in machine
readable form for backup purposes only; provided that the
backup copy must include all copyright or other proprietary
notices contained on the original.
Certain items of the Software may be subject to open source
licenses. The open source license provisions may override
some of the terms of this EULA. We make the applicable
open source licenses available to you on the Legal Notices
section of the Settings menu of your device.
Warranty Information
261
2. RESERVATION OF RIGHTS AND OWNERSHIP. Samsung
reserves all rights not expressly granted to you in this EULA.
The Software is protected by copyright and other intellectual
property laws and treaties. Samsung or its suppliers own the
title, copyright and other intellectual property rights in the
Software. The Software is licensed, not sold.
3. LIMITATIONS ON END USER RIGHTS. You may not reverse
engineer, decompile, disassemble, or otherwise attempt to
discover the source code or algorithms of, the Software
(except and only to the extent that such activity is expressly
permitted by applicable law not withstanding this limitation),
or modify, or disable any features of, the Software, or create
derivative works based on the Software. You may not rent,
lease, lend, sublicense or provide commercial hosting
services with the Software.
4. CONSENT TO USE OF DATA. You agree that Samsung and its
affiliates may collect and use technical information gathered
as part of the product support services related to the
Software provided to you, if any, such as IMEI (your device’s
unique identification number), device number, model name,
customer code, access recording, your device’s current SW
version, MCC (Mobile Country Code), MNC (Mobile Network
Code). Samsung and its affiliates may use this information
solely to improve their products or to provide customized
262
services or technologies to you and will not disclose this
information in a form that personally identifies you. At all
times your information will be treated in accordance with
Samsung’s Privacy Policy, which can be viewed at:
http://account.samsung.com/membership/pp.
5. SOFTWARE UPDATES. Samsung may provide to you or
make available to you updates, upgrades, supplements and
add-on components (if any) of the Software, including bug
fixes, service upgrades (parts or whole), products or devices,
and updates and enhancements to any software previously
installed (including entirely new versions), (collectively
“Update”) after the date you obtain your initial copy of the
Software to improve the Software and ultimately enhance
your user experience with your device. This EULA applies to
all and any component of the Update that Samsung may
provide to you or make available to you after the date you
obtain your initial copy of the Software, unless we provide
other terms along with such Update. To use Software
provided through Update, you must first be licensed for the
Software identified by Samsung as eligible for the Update.
After the Update, you may no longer use the Software that
formed the basis for your Update eligibility. The updated
Software version may add new functions and, in some
limited cases, may delete existing functions.
While the Update will be generally available, in some limited
circumstances, the Software updates will only be offered by
your network carrier, and such Software updates will be
governed by your contractual relationship with your network
carrier.
With the “Automatic Update” function enabled (as in the
default setting in the System Update menu in the Setting),
your device downloads some Updates automatically from
time to time. Your device will, however, ask for your consent
before installing any Update If you choose to disable the
“Automatic Update” function, then you can check the
availability of new Updates by clicking on the “Check
Update” menu in the Setting. We recommend that you check
availability of any new Updates periodically for optimal use of
your device. If you want to avoid any use of network data for
the Update downloads, then you should choose the “Wi-Fi
Only” option in the Setting. (Regardless of the option you
choose, the “Automatic Update” function downloads Updates
only through Wi-Fi connection.)
6. Some features of the Software may require your device to
have access to the internet and may be subject to
restrictions imposed by your network or internet provider.
Unless your device is connected to the internet through Wi-Fi
connection, the Software will access through your mobile
network, which may result in additional charges depending
on your payment plan. In addition, your enjoyment of some
features of the Software may be affected by the suitability
and performance of your device hardware or data access.
7. SOFTWARE TRANSFER. You may not transfer this EULA or
the rights to the Software granted herein to any third party
unless it is in connection with the sale of the mobile device
which the Software accompanied. In such event, the transfer
must include all of the Software (including all component
parts, the media and printed materials, any upgrades, this
EULA) and you may not retain any copies of the Software.
The transfer may not be an indirect transfer, such as a
consignment. Prior to the transfer, the end user receiving the
Software must agree to all the EULA terms.
8. EXPORT RESTRICTIONS. You acknowledge that the
Software is subject to export restrictions of various countries.
You agree to comply with all applicable international and
national laws that apply to the Software, including all the
applicable export restriction laws and regulations.
9. TERMINATION. This EULA is effective until terminated. Your
rights under this License will terminate automatically without
notice from Samsung if you fail to comply with any of the
Warranty Information
263
terms and conditions of this EULA. Upon termination of this
EULA, you must cease all use of the Software and destroy all
copies, full or partial, of the Software.
10. DISCLAIMER OF WARRANTY. UNLESS SEPARATELY STATED
IN A WRITTEN EXPRESS LIMITED WARRANTY
ACCOMPANYING YOUR DEVICE, ALL SOFTWARE PROVIDED
BY SAMSUNG WITH THIS MOBILE DEVICE (WHETHER
INCLUDED WITH THE DEVICE, DOWNLOADED, OR
OTHERWISE OBTAINED) IS PROVIDED "AS IS" AND ON AN
"AS AVAILABLE" BASIS, WITHOUT WARRANTIES OF ANY KIND
FROM SAMSUNG, EITHER EXPRESS OR IMPLIED. TO THE
FULLEST EXTENT POSSIBLE PURSUANT TO APPLICABLE
LAW, SAMSUNG DISCLAIMS ALL WARRANTIES EXPRESS,
IMPLIED, OR STATUTORY, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO,
IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY, SATISFACTORY
QUALITY OR WORKMANLIKE EFFORT, FITNESS FOR A
PARTICULAR PURPOSE, RELIABILITY OR AVAILABILITY,
ACCURACY, LACK OF VIRUSES, QUIET ENJOYMENT, NON
INFRINGEMENT OF THIRD PARTY RIGHTS OR OTHER
VIOLATION OF RIGHTS. SOME JURISDICTIONS DO NOT
ALLOW EXCLUSIONS OR LIMITATIONS OF IMPLIED
WARRANTIES, SO THE ABOVE EXCLUSIONS OR LIMITATIONS
MAY NOT APPLY TO YOU. NO ADVICE OR INFORMATION,
WHETHER ORAL OR WRITTEN, OBTAINED BY YOU FROM
264
SAMSUNG OR ITS AFFILIATES SHALL BE DEEMED TO ALTER
THIS DISCLAIMER BY SAMSUNG OF WARRANTY REGARDING
THE SOFTWARE, OR TO CREATE ANY WARRANTY OF ANY
SORT FROM SAMSUNG.
11. THIRD-PARTY APPLICATIONS. Certain third party
applications may be included with, or downloaded to this
mobile device. Samsung makes no representations
whatsoever about any of these applications. Since Samsung
has no control over such applications, you acknowledge and
agree that Samsung is not responsible for the availability of
such applications and is not responsible or liable for any
content, advertising, products, services, or other materials
on or available from such applications. You expressly
acknowledge and agree that use of third party applications is
at your sole risk and that the entire risk of unsatisfactory
quality, performance, accuracy and effort is with you. It is up
to you to take precautions to ensure that whatever you select
to use is free of such items as viruses, worms, Trojan horses,
and other items of a destructive nature. References on this
mobile device to any names, marks, products, or services of
any third-parties are provided solely as a convenience to you,
and do not constitute or imply an endorsement, sponsorship,
or recommendation of, or affiliation with the third party or its
products and services. You agree that Samsung shall not be
responsible or liable, directly or indirectly, for any damage or
loss, including but not limited to any damage to the mobile
device or loss of data, caused or alleged to be caused by, or
in connection with, use of or reliance on any such third party
content, products, or services available on or through any
such application. You acknowledge and agree that the use of
any third-party application is governed by such third party
application provider's Terms of Use, License Agreement,
Privacy Policy, or other such agreement and that any
information or personal data you provide, whether knowingly
or unknowingly, to such third-party application provider, will
be subject to such third party application provider's privacy
policy, if such a policy exists. SAMSUNG DISCLAIMS ANY
RESPONSIBILITY FOR ANY DISCLOSURE OF INFORMATION OR
ANY OTHER PRACTICES OF ANY THIRD PARTY APPLICATION
PROVIDER. SAMSUNG EXPRESSLY DISCLAIMS ANY
WARRANTY REGARDING WHETHER YOUR PERSONAL
INFORMATION IS CAPTURED BY ANY THIRD PARTY
APPLICATION PROVIDER OR THE USE TO WHICH SUCH
PERSONAL INFORMATION MAY BE PUT BY SUCH THIRD
PARTY APPLICATION PROVIDER.
12. SAMSUNG APPLICATIONS. Certain Samsung applications
and services may be included with, or downloaded to, this
mobile device. Many of them require Samsung Services
membership registration (“Samsung Account”), and your
rights and obligations will be set forth in separate Samsung
Account terms and conditions and privacy policies. There are
non-Samsung Account applications and services that require
your consent to their separate terms and conditions and
privacy policies. You expressly acknowledge and agree that
your use of such applications and services will be subject to
the applicable terms and conditions and privacy policies.
13. LIMITATION OF LIABILITY. SAMSUNG WILL NOT BE LIABLE
FOR ANY DAMAGES OF ANY KIND ARISING OUT OF OR
RELATING TO THE USE OR THE INABILITY TO USE THE
SOFTWARE OR ANY THIRD PARTY APPLICATION, ITS
CONTENT OR FUNCTIONALITY, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED
TO DAMAGES CAUSED BY OR RELATED TO ERRORS,
OMISSIONS, INTERRUPTIONS, DEFECTS, DELAY IN
OPERATION OR TRANSMISSION, COMPUTER VIRUS, FAILURE
TO CONNECT, NETWORK CHARGES, IN-APP PURCHASES,
AND ALL OTHER DIRECT, INDIRECT, SPECIAL, INCIDENTAL,
EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES EVEN IF
SAMSUNG HAS BEEN ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH
DAMAGES. SOME JURISDICTIONS DO NOT ALLOW THE
EXCLUSION OR LIMITATION OF INCIDENTAL OR
CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES, SO THE ABOVE EXCLUSIONS OR
LIMITATIONS MAY NOT APPLY TO YOU. NOTWITHSTANDING
Warranty Information
265
THE FOREGOING, SAMSUNG ELECTRONIC CO.'S TOTAL
LIABILITY TO YOU FOR ALL LOSSES, DAMAGES, CAUSES OF
ACTION, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THOSE BASED ON
CONTRACT, TORT, OR OTHERWISE, ARISING OUT OF YOUR
USE OF THE SOFTWARE OR THIRD PARTY APPLICATIONS ON
THIS MOBILE DEVICE, OR ANY OTHER PROVISION OF THIS
EULA, SHALL NOT EXCEED THE AMOUNT PURCHASER PAID
SPECIFICALLY FOR THIS MOBILE DEVICE OR ANY SUCH
THIRD PARTY APPLICATION THAT WAS INCLUDED WITH THIS
MOBILE DEVICE. THE FOREGOING LIMITATIONS,
EXCLUSIONS, AND DISCLAIMERS (INCLUDING SECTIONS 10,
11, 12 AND 13) SHALL APPLY TO THE MAXIMUM EXTENT
PERMITTED BY APPLICABLE LAW, EVEN IF ANY REMEDY
FAILS ITS ESSENTIAL PURPOSE.
14. U.S. GOVERNMENT END USERS RESTRICTED RIGHTS. The
Software is licensed only with "restricted rights" and as
"commercial items" consisting of "commercial software"
and "commercial software documentation" with only those
rights as are granted to all other end users pursuant to the
terms and conditions herein. All Products are provided only
with "restricted rights" with only those rights as are granted
to all other end users pursuant to the terms and conditions
herein. All Software and Products are provided subject to
Federal Acquisition Regulation (FAR) 52.227.19.
266
15. APPLICABLE LAW. This EULA is governed by the laws of
the jurisdiction where you are a resident or, if a resident of
the United States, by the laws of the state of Texas, without
regard to its conflict of law provisions. This EULA shall not be
governed by the UN Convention on Contracts for the
International Sale of Goods, the application of which is
expressly excluded.
16. DISPUTE RESOLUTION.
(a) Non-United States residents. If a dispute, controversy or
difference arising in any way from this EULA or your use of
the Software is not amicably settled, it shall be subject to the
non-exclusive jurisdiction of the courts of the jurisdiction
where you are a resident. Notwithstanding the foregoing,
Samsung may apply for injunctive remedies (or an equivalent
type of urgent legal relief) in any jurisdiction.
(b) United States residents. ALL DISPUTES WITH SAMSUNG
ARISING IN ANY WAY FROM THIS EULA OR YOUR USE OF THE
SOFTWARE SHALL BE RESOLVED EXCLUSIVELY THROUGH
FINAL AND BINDING ARBITRATION, AND NOT BY A COURT OR
JURY. Any such dispute shall not be combined or
consolidated with any other person’s or entity’s claim or
dispute, and specifically, without limitation of the foregoing,
shall not under any circumstances proceed as part of a class
action. The arbitration shall be conducted before a single
arbitrator, whose award may not exceed, in form or amount,
the relief allowed by the applicable law. The arbitration shall
be conducted according to the American Arbitration
Association (AAA) Commercial Arbitration Rules applicable to
consumer disputes. This arbitration provision is entered
pursuant to the Federal Arbitration Act. The laws of the State
of Texas, without reference to its choice of laws principles,
shall govern the interpretation of the EULA and all disputes
that are subject to this arbitration provision. The arbitrator
shall decide all issues of interpretation and application of this
arbitration provision and the EULA. For any arbitration in
which your total damage claims, exclusive of attorney fees
and expert witness fees, are $5,000.00 or less ("Small
Claim"), the arbitrator may, if you prevail, award your
reasonable attorney fees, expert witness fees and costs as
part of any award, but may not grant Samsung its attorney
fees, expert witness fees or costs unless it is determined that
the claim was brought in bad faith. In a Small Claim case,
you shall be required to pay no more than half of the total
administrative, facility and arbitrator fees, or $50.00 of such
fees, whichever is less, and Samsung shall pay the
remainder of such fees. Administrative, facility and arbitrator
fees for arbitrations in which your total damage claims,
exclusive of attorney fees and expert witness fees, exceed
$5,000.00 ("Large Claim") shall be determined according to
AAA rules. In a Large Claim case, the arbitrator may grant to
the prevailing party, or apportion among the parties,
reasonable attorney fees, expert witness fees and costs.
Judgment may be entered on the arbitrator's award in any
court of competent jurisdiction. This arbitration provision also
applies to claims against Samsung’s employees,
representatives and affiliates if any such claim arises from
the licensing or use of the Software. You may opt out of this
dispute resolution procedure by providing notice to Samsung
no later than 30 calendar days from the date of the first
consumer purchaser’s purchase of this device. To opt out,
you must send notice by e-mail to
optout@sta.samsung.com, with the subject line: "Arbitration
Opt Out." You must include in the opt out e-mail (a) your
name and address; (b) the date on which the device was
purchased; (c) the device model name or model number; and
(d) the IMEI or MEID or Serial Number, as applicable, if you
have it (the IMEI or MEID or Serial Number can be found (i) on
the device box; (ii) on the device information screen, which
can be found under "Settings;" (iii) on a label on the back of
the device beneath the battery, if the battery is removable;
and (iv) on the outside of the device if the battery is not
Warranty Information
267
removable). Alternatively, you may opt out by calling
1-888-987-4357 no later than 30 calendar days from the
date of the first consumer purchaser's purchase of the
device and providing the same information. These are the
only two forms of notice that will be effective to opt out of
this dispute resolution procedure. Opting out of this dispute
resolution procedure will not affect your use of the device or
its preloaded Software, and you will continue to enjoy the
benefits of this license.
17. ENTIRE AGREEMENT; SEVERABILITY. This EULA is the
entire agreement between you and Samsung relating to the
Software and supersedes all prior or contemporaneous oral
or written communications, proposals and representations
with respect to the Software or any other subject matter
covered by this EULA. If any provision of this EULA is held to
be void, invalid, unenforceable or illegal, the other provisions
shall continue in full force and effect. [050113]
268
Index
Numerics
2G Network
Using Only 183
2-Sec Pause
Adding 52
2-sec Pause
Adding 49
4G Mobile Hotspot
Activating 171
A
Abc mode 44
About Device 229
Accounts 219
Synchronize 220
Add accounts 219
Adding a New Contact
Idle Screen 68
Address Book 66
Adding a New Contact 67
Adding Pauses to Contact
Numbers 69
Copying a contact to the Phone 80
Copying Contacts to Phone 79
Copying Contacts to SIM Card 78
Deleting Address Book Entries 80
Deleting Contacts from SIM card
80
Dialing a Number 70
Favorites 78
Finding an Address Book Entry 70
Group Settings 76
Managing Address Book Contacts
78
Service Dialing Numbers 80
Using Contacts List 70
Address Book Options 74
Air Gesture
Quick Glance 27
Air view 218
Airplane mode 180, 195
Alarm 113
Alerts
Presidential 90
AllShare Play
see Samsung Link 146, 148
AllShareCast Hub 146
AMBER Alerts 90
Disable 91
Android Beam 188
Application Folders
Creating 37
Applications
Google Mail 120
Hide 107
Messages 130
Sharing with Others 36
Show Hidden 107
Shutting Down 108
Using the Camcorder 102
Using the Camera 96
World Clock 115
Applications settings
managing 226
running services 227
269
Apps
Adding 29
Apps Screen
Customizing 107
AppStore 109
B
Backing up your data 221
Battery
charging 10
Display Percentage 12
Extending Life 12
Installing 9
Low Battery Indicator 12
Show Battery Percentage 12
Battery Life
Extending 12
Battery Use & Safety 241
Bigger Font
Setting 208
Blocking Mode 206
On 206
Bluetooth
Changing Name 179
Device Name 14
270
Outgoing Headset Condition 200
Sending contacts 169
Bluetooth Name
Changing 167
Books
Play Books 136
Brightness
Adjustment 40
Browser 126
Entering a URL 126
Bubble
Options 87
C
Calculator 109
Calendar 110
Calibrate Screen 28
Calibration
Gyroscope 217
Call
Settings 53
Call Barring 201
Call Forwarding 200
Settings 201
Call Functions 49
3-Way Calling (Multi-Party Calling)
63
Address Book 55
Adjusting the Call Volume 59
Answering a Call 55
Call Back Missed Call 56
Call Duration 58
Call Forwarding 201
Call Log 55
Correcting the Number 50
Dialing a Recent Number 50
Ending a Call 50
International Call 49
Making a Call 49
Manual Pause Dialing 49
Options During a Call 59
Putting a Call on Hold 61
Saving a recent call number to
Address Book 56
Searching for a Number in
Address Book 64
Using the Speakerphone 63
Call rejection 198
Call Sound
Adding More Volume 59
Personalize 61
Call Waiting 62, 201
Settings 201
Caller ID 200
Calling
Using Wi-Fi 185
Camcorder 102
Settings 99
Shooting Video 102
Camcorder Options
Camcorder Options after a Video is
Taken 103
Camera
Modes 97
Quick Settings 98
Settings 99
Taking Pictures 96
Care and Maintenance 246
Changing Your Settings 175
Charging battery 10
ChatON 111
Adding a Buddy 112
Adding New Buddy 112
Chatting On 112
Deleting Bubble 112
Register Service 111
Children and Cell Phones 236
Clock 113
Cloud 220
CMAS 90
Commercial Mobile Alerting System
(CMAS) 239
Contact
Copying to microSD Card 80
Contacts 66
Merge with Samsung Account 74
Create Folder
Group Apps 107
Creating a Playlist 133
D
Deregister
Web Storage 149
Device
Calibration 28
Dialing Options 52
Display
icons 21
Using Negative Colors 209
Display / Touch-Screen 244
Do cell phones pose a health hazard?
232
Downloads 117
Draft Messages 83
Driving Mode 206
Dropbox 149
Uploading Picture 119
E
Easy Mode
Home Screen 198
EDGE Network 183
271
Editing a Picture 100
Email 94
Creating a Corporate Email
Account 94
Creating Additional Email
Accounts 95
Switching Between Email
Accounts 95
Emergency
Alert Preview 90
Alerts 90
Emergency Alert
Configuration 90
Emergency Alerts 90
AMBER 90
Imminent Extreme 90
Message Settings 90
Severe 90
Emergency Calls 245
Making 51
With SIM 51
Without SIM 51
Emoticons 83
272
Entering Text
Changing the Text Entry Mode 44
Using 123Sym Mode 45
Using Abc Mode 44
Using Swype 46, 47
Using Symbol/Numeric Mode 45
Exposure to Radio Frequency (RF)
Signals 232
Extra Volume 59
Extreme Alert
Disable 91
F
FCC Hearing Aid Compatibility (HAC)
Regulations for Wireless Devices 251
FCC Notice and Cautions 253
Fixed Dialing Numbers 201
Flipboard 119
Folder
Create 29
Font Size
Caption 160
Changing 208
Forgot Pattern? 193
G
Gallery 103, 120
viewing pictures 104
viewing videos 104
Gestures 216
Overview 26
Getting Started 6
Setting Up Your Phone 7
Voicemail 15
Gmail 120
Google
Settings 122
Signing into Your Account 120
Google Chrome 113
Google Maps 129
Google Now
Adjust Settings 122
Google Play Music 137
Google Settings 122
Google Talk
see Hangouts 125
Google Voice Typing 43
Google voice typing settings 211
Google+
Settings 122
GPS 245
Group
Adding a contact 76
Editing 77
Joining 124
Removing a contact 76
Group Play
Creating a Group 124
Joining a Group 124
Sharing Pictures 124
Group Settings
Editing a Caller Group 77
Gyroscope
Calibration 27, 28
H
HAC 205
Handwriting 46
Handwriting feature 46
Hangouts 125
HDR 98
Health and Safety Information 232
Hearing Aids 205
Help
In-Device 125
Hidden Applications
Show 107
Home Screen
Assigning a New 39
Menu Settings 29
Home screen mode 197
Hotspots 180, 181
I
Icons
Application 106
Indicator 21
Icons, description 21
In call
Options 60
In-Call Options 59
Incognito 127
Create Window 127
Exit Window 127
International Call 49
Internet 126
Search 126
IR
Smart Remote 17
K
Keyboard Input Methods 210
Keyboard settings 211
Keypad
Changing Text Input 44
L
Landscape 44
Language and input 210
Language and keyboard settings
select locale 210
273
Linking Contacts 71
Local 128
Location services 222
Location services settings 191
Lock Pattern
If I Forgot My Pattern 193
Lock Screen
Say Wake-Up Command 192
Shortcuts 191
LTE 171
Network Mode 182
Selecting 182
LTE Network 182
M
Maps 129
Memory Card 41
Merge with Google 74
Message
Register a Number as Spam 86
Reply 112
Thread Options 86
274
Message Options 83
Message Search 88
Messaging
Adding a Signature 90
Block Unknown Senders 90, 92
Creating and Sending Text
Messages 82
Deleting a message 87
Draft 83
Handwriting 46
Insert Smiley 83
Locked 83
Options 83
Scheduled Messages 83
Settings 88
Signature 90
Signing into Email 94
Spam 83
Text Templates 93
Translate Text 84
Types of Messages 81
MetroZONE 131
microSD card 41
microSDHC card 41
Microsoft Exchange 67, 94
Mobile Hotspot 131
Allowed Devices 173
Changing Password 172
Connecting 172
MAC FIltering 173
Mobile Web
Entering Text in the Mobile Web
Browser 126
Using Bookmarks 128
Mono
Audio Setup 209
Motion 216
Activate 27
Overview 26
Motions 216
Movies 137
Multi Window
Activate/Deactivate 30
Customizing 31
Increase App Window Size 33
Maximize App 33
Panel Relocation 31
Rearrange Apps 31
Removing Apps 31
Restoring Apps 31
Running Multiple Apps 32
Switch Arrangement 33
Tab Repositioning 30
Using 30
Music 132
Music App
Searching for Music 138
Tab Options 138
Music Player 132
adding music 133
creating a playlist 133
removing music 133
Mute 60, 64
My Files 134
My Places 129
myMetro 135
N
terms used 26
touch gestures 26
Nearby devices 189
Negative Colors 209
Network Mode
2G Network 182, 183
LTE 182
WCDMA/GSM 182
NFC
On 104
Noise Reduction 61
O
One-Handed Operation
On/Off 53, 60
Operating Environment 249
Other Important Safety Information
253
Outlook 94
P
Palm Motion
Activate 27
On 27
Panorama 98
PC Connections 170
Personal Localized Alerting Network
(PLAN) 239
Phone
Front View 18
icons 21
Rear View 21
Side View 20
Switching On/Off 13
Photo
Editing 100
Picture
Color Correction 101
Face Corrections 101
Frame 101
Pictures 103, 120
Gallery 103, 120
Sharing 104
Places 136
Play Books 136
Navigation 135
context-sensitive menus 26
275
Play Movies & TV 137
Play Music 137
Play Store 138
Quick Access 107
Pointer speed 215
Power Saving Mode 207
Powering
Off 13
On 13
PredictiveText 211
Privacy settings
factory data reset 222
Q
QWERTY keypad 44
R
Red Eye
Correction 101
Reducing Exposure
Hands-Free Kits and Other
Accessories 235
Reject List
Add to 57
Add to Reject List 58
276
Reject list 58
remote control WatchON 155
Reset
factory data 222
Responsible Listening 247
Restricting Children's Access to Your
Mobile device 253
Rhapsody 139
S
S Beam 189
On 105
Sharing Multiple Pictures 105
Sharing Pictures 104
S Memo 139
Creating a New Memo 139
S Translator 141
S Voice 141
Set Wake-Up Command 192
Samsung Account
Merge Contacts 74
Samsung Hub
Creating a New Account 143
Using 144
Samsung Keyboard 44
Samsung Link 146
Definitions 146
Deregister Storage 149
Sharing Media 150
Web Storage Setup 149
Samsung Link Settings 148
Samsung Mobile Products and
Recycling 243
scientific calculator 109
Screen Lock Pattern
Forgot My Pattern 193
Screen Mirroring
On 190
SD Card 41
SD card
Formatting 42
Mounting 41
Space 41
Unmounting 41
Security 221, 223
Security settings
device administration 224
trusted credentials 225
Service Dialing Numbers 80
Settings 99, 175
Call 53
Severe Alert
Disable 91
Share Applications 36
Shortcuts
Adding from Apps 34
Changing Primary 35
Creating 34
Show Battery Percentage 12
SIM
Micro 6
SIM card
installation 9
Installing 8
SkyDrive 149
Smart Practices While Driving 240
Smart screen 217
Smart Switch 17
Snooze 114
Software Update 230
Wi-Fi 231
Spam 93
Accessing Your Spam Folder 93
Add a Phrase 90, 92
Add Number 84, 86
Assigning Manually 91
Assigning Phone Numbers 91
Block Unknown Numbers 92
Block Unknown Senders 90, 92
Manually Add a Number 90, 91
Match Criteria 92
Registering a Phrase as Spam 92
Settings 90, 91
Spam Messages
Assigning 83
Speakerphone Key 63
Specific Absorption Rate (SAR)
Certification Information 237
Speed Dial
Changing an entry 54
Removing an entry 54
Standard Limited Warranty 256
Standard Mode
Home Screen 197
Stopwatch 115
SugarSync 149
Swap 62
SWYPE
entering text using 46, 47
Swype
Cellular Data 214
Swype Keypad Settings 213
Swype Settings 47
Symbol/Numeric mode 45
Synchronization settings
auto-sync 191
Synchronizing Accounts 220
T
Tethering
Active Icon 174
Disconnecting 174
Mobile Hotspot 171
see USB Tethering 173
Tethering and Mobile Hotspot 184
Text Input
Abc mode 44
Methods 42
numeric mode 45
277
symbol mode 45
Text Input Method
Selecting 43
Text Templates 93
Create Your Own 93
Timer 116
Automatic Answering 200
Touch Screen 13
Lock/Unlock 13
Transferring Large Files 104
Translate 84
TranslateMessage Bubble 87
Translator 141
Travel Charger 10
Using 11
TTY Mode 205
U
UL Certified Travel Charger 244
Understanding Your Phone 17
Features of Your Phone 17
Front View 18
Rear View 21
Side Views 20
278
Unknown Numbers
Blocking Messages 92
Unmute 60
USB settings
mass storage device 170
USB Tethering
Activating 174
Use GPS Satellites 129
Use Wireless Networks 129
V
Video 151
Sharing Videos 152
Video player 151
Voice control 218
Voice Recorder 153
Voicemail
Accessing 16
From Another Phone 16
Setup 15
Volume 195
VPN Client 155
W
Wait
Adding 50
Wallpaper
Assign Home 29
Warranty Information 256
WatchON 155
Adding a New Room 159
Changing Channels 157
Configure Just For You 158
Customizing Your Remote 156
Initial Configuration 155
Locating Programs 157
Personalize 158
Settings 158
Using 157
Web 126
Widget
Adding Widgets 29
Widgets
Adding/Removing 35
Wi-Fi 162
Calling 185
using Kies via Wi-Fi 190
Wi-Fi Calling
Activating 185, 186
Connection Preferences 187
Icons 188
Launching 187
Settings 186
Wi-Fi Direct 165, 176
Device Name 14
Wi-Fi Settings 176
World Clock
Deleting an Entry 115
World clock 115
WPA2 PSK 171, 172
WPS PIN
Pairing 178
WPS Push Button
Connect 177
Pairing 177
Y
YouTube 159
High Quality 161
Settings 160
279